Tips Category RSS Feed | Tips RSS Feed on en Launch Media Network Dark Souls: Remastered Giant Dad Build Guide Fri, 25 May 2018 13:49:14 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Giant Dad might just be the most overpowered PvP meta build in Dark Souls.

Commanding high Stamina and Strength values, they're a min/maxing tank that can utterly devastate even the most seasoned players. Because of that, some of you will want to run out and craft this build as quickly as possible. On the other hand, some of you will want to know the strategies that'll beat him in an instant.

This guide to Dark Souls: Remastered will show you how to do two things:

  1. Construct this build, including what weapons and armor you'll need
  2. Show you the best tactics for beating Giant Dad in PvP

Phantoms wait for no one, so let's get started.  

Assigning Your Stats

This build starts at Soul-level 99. You can go higher to take advantage of higher-level PvP locations and arenas. If you want to stay "true" to the base Giant Dad build, you'll want to put stats into other categories than those shown below. If you don't care about that, then you can obviously allocate more points as you see fit. 

This is what your primary stat line should look like when you reach Soul-level 99: 

  • Vitality (48)
  • Endurance (66)
  • Attunement (12)
  • Strength (16)
  • Dexterity (10)

Equipment You'll Need

Mask of the Father: This helm provides players with a +5% equipment load modifier. Get it from Pinwheels in the Catacombs or from Patches in Firelink. 

Giant Armor Set (minus helm): You can buy this set from the Giant Blacksmith in Anor Londo's Cathedral. You'll need to keep the Giant Armor (the cuirass), the Giant Gauntlets, and the Giant Leggings. You can ditch the helm. This set provides good elemental and physical defense while being one of the lighter heavy armor sets in the game. 

Ring of Favor and Protection and Havel's Ring: The Ring of Favor gives a 20% buff to Vitality, Stamina, and Equip load. You can find it after defeating Knight Lautrec of Carim as a drop. You can also visit Snuggly the Crow and drop the Xanthous Crown. Havel's Ring increases your Equip load and can be found after defeating Havel the Rock as a drop. 

Giant Shield: One of the best shields in the game if you can wield it, you can get the Giant Shield either from the Giant Blacksmith or from the Sentinels roaming Anor Londo. You can also opt for the Grass Crest Shield (dropped by Black Knights) because it provides Stamina regen. 

Chaos Zweihander: This might be one of the most efficient two-handed weapons in Dark Souls: Remastered. You only need 16 STR to wield it, easing both equip load and stat allocation. The Chaos upgrade path is important here because it scales the Zweihander's damage with Humanity. 

You can also opt to use the Dark Hand with this build. Use it as a shield and it will deflect 80% of all damage types. On top of that, you can use the Dark Hand to steal humanity from other players. This works well with the Chaos Zweihander, helping you make the latter weapon even more powerful. 

Lastly, get the Pyromancy called Dark Flame. After you get it from the Chasm of the Abyss, you'll find it's particularly powerful at close range. In fact, it mauls stamina when enemies block your attacks, wearing them down relatively quickly depending on how you use it. 

Best Offensive Strategies

If you're using this build, there area few key things you're going to want to keep in mind as you wreck enemies into oblivion. 

The key is using stunlock. The Zweihander is so powerful in its Chaos form that a single hit can stun enemy phantoms in place, setting them up for a devastating follow-up attack. 

And although the Giant Dad's attacks have long(er) animations, having increased END levels, as well as equipping Havel's Ring and the Ring of Favor and Protection, mean you can dodge and roll quite a bit. Use this to your advantage. Confuse other phantoms and players by looking for backstab opportunities, which can be especially useful since most players will expect Giant Dads to attack head on.  

If you do take enemies head on, use the Black Flame to deplete most of their Stamina, then go for the stunlock. Once that connects, quickly follow up with another Zweihander swing to finish them off. 

How to Counter Giant Dad

If you're facing off against a Giant Dad, you'll want to employ these strategies if you want to survive. 

Essentially, focus on parrying, rolling, and backstabbing. You most likely won't be able to face this build blow for blow, so your best bet is to be patient and be defensive. Reading the section above, you'll see that you have to not only be wary of stunlock, but also Black Flame and/or Dark Hand. 

Tranquil Walk of Peace is a fantastic spell to use against this build. However, you have to be quick to catch the Giant Dad as they roll away from the AoE. If played correctly, you can get a nasty backstab in. 

Alternatively, you can spam certain spells such as Crystal Souls Spear or Great Heavy Soul Arrow. However, unless you have a high DEX rating and can cast spells very quickly, this is an unsafe strategy at best. 


It's true: some players will wretch at the thought of seriously playing a Giant Dad. Griefers have made the build one that many players avoid. However, if you must venture into PvP using this specific class, don't be an arsehole. Nobody likes griefers. 

Be one of the good guys and bring Giant Dad back to prominence. 

Got any other strategies for using or defending this build? Let us know in the comments below, and make sure to check out our other Dark Souls: Remastered guides while you're here. 

Wizard of Legend Arcana Guide: From Worst to Best Fri, 25 May 2018 10:56:58 -0400 Sergey_3847


Fire Arcana

  • Bouncing Blaze. This basic fire arcana is more powerful than some of the standard air or lightning attacks. It deals 12 damage and 20 knockback with zero cooldown.
  • \n
  • Flare Rush. This is one of the better dash attacks, with 10 damage and 20 knockback, but some cooldown is present as well.
  • \n
  • Dragon Arc. This is definitely the best standard fire attack as it summons fiery dragons every second. The damage isn't too high at only 8 points, but if you spam it, then the effect will be immense.
  • \n
  • Exploding Fireball. Here is a classic signature fireball that deals 50 damage on impact and 35 knockback.
  • \n



Hopefully, this quick guide helped you choose the best arcana for your build in Wizard of Legend, and don't forget to come back soon for even more guides at GameSkinny!


Air Arcana

  • Wind Slash. There isn't much difference between the two basic attacks, but Wind Slash feels better and also deals a bit more damage than Air Spinner.
  • \n
  • Air Burst. A simple yet effective dash attack with 8 damage and 8 knockback and zero cooldown. This could easily become a swift and deadly tool in the right hands.
  • \n
  • Airborne Slam. Some standard arcana are more powerful than the signature ones, and Airborne Slam is exactly that kind of arcana. It rockets you into the sky before slamming into the ground, dealing 50 damage and 40 knockback.
  • \n
  • Cyclone Boomerang. This type of attack creates an air current that slams enemies around you and returns back. You can repeat this attack every 3 seconds.
  • \n

Earth Arcana

  • Earth Knuckles. This basic arcana is not only superior to Stone Shot in terms of damage and knockback, but it also looks cooler. It basically pummels your enemies with earthen fists.
  • \n
  • Spike Track. One of the better dash arcana, it leaves behind a trail of spikes that deal with the rest of the enemies. While you dash forward, you also deal 30 points of damage, which is quite significant for a dash attack.
  • \n
  • Earthquake Axe. There are some really powerful standard earth arcana, such as Seismic Entry, but their cooldown times make them unusable. Earthquake Axe, on the other hand, has only 4 seconds of cooldown, 30 damage, and 15 knockback.
  • \n
  • Terra Ring. All signature earth arcana are quite impressive, but Terra Ring has the best animation as it pulverizes the ground beneath the foes. It also strikes with multitudes of spikes that each deal up to 15 damage.
  • \n

Lightning Arcana

  • Spark Contact. This is a clear winner between the two basic lightning arcana. It has higher damage and knockback than Bolt Rail.
  • \n
  • Circuit Line/Shock Line. Both dashes are quite effective at what they do, leaving behind electric lines or orbs depending on the arcana of your choice.
  • \n
  • Star Bolt. Most standard lightning arcana have large cooldowns, which makes them inconvenient to use. But Star Bolt has only 3 seconds of cooldown, 10 damage, and 20 knockback.
  • \n
  • Ball Lightning. This signature arcana is all about its massive knockback of 75. It deals 15 damage in the process and has a large cooldown of 6 seconds, but it's worth it.
  • \n

Water Arcana

  • Ice Dagger. This is the better basic water arcana of the two. The Ice Dagger has a massive knockback, whereas Water Arc has lower knockback and only slightly higher damage.
  • \n
  • Frost Feint/Wave Front. Both dash arcana are powerful, but for different purposes. Frost Feint is an offensive one that deals 25 points of damage, although it offers zero knockback. Wave Front is designed for defensive purposes, but it deals almost no damage.
  • \n
  • Aqua Beam. Of all standard arcana, Aqua Beam has the lowest cooldown of only 1 second. It offers a decent damage of 10 and quite a large knockback of 20. This is overall the best standard water arcana you can get.
  • \n
  • Glacial Cross. This is the most powerful signature arcana of all. Although it has a large cooldown of 7 seconds, it deals 50 damage and 70 knockback, which is huge.
  • \n

There are five basic elemental arcana in Wizard of Legend: Air, Earth, Fire, Lightning, and Water. Each has four types of attacks: Basic, Dash, Standard, and Signature. All these arcana have various stats in terms of damage, knockback, and cooldown.


If you want to know which arcana attacks are the best for each of the five elements, then follow this guide for all the information you need. This will help you choose the best arcana for your build and help you complete the most difficult parts of the game.

Dark Souls Remastered: PvP Builds For Strength, Dexterity, & Magic Thu, 24 May 2018 19:34:23 -0400 Jonathan Moore

One of the most grueling aspects of Dark Souls: Remastered is the game's PvP element. Whether you're voluntarily summoning players to duel with you in the arena or getting invaded by irritating red phantoms, player versus player combat isn't always easy.

Knowing which build fits your playstyle is essential to success. But that's something only you can determine by playing the game. However, knowing which builds are the best for PvP -- and those you should fashion your character after or outright construct -- is what we're here for. 

In the following sections, I'll list out a variety of builds alongside what weapons and armor you'll need to make them. We won't exactly be min/maxing here, but there will be suggestions for well-rounded starter builds for each stat type.  

If you have any that aren't listed here but are effective in PvP, let us know in the comments at the bottom of the page. We'll add it (or them) to this list and credit you with the addition. 

Be sure to check out our other guides for the re-release here: 

Strength Builds

This category is for players looking to utterly crush their opponents using pure power to win any encounter.

Strength builds are typically more patient than other builds. Players do not need to turtle during encounters (unless they're making a turtle build). Liberal use of shields and defensive maneuvers is recommended since Vitality and Endurance stats are used to create walking fortresses and tanks.

It's also worth noting that many of the weapons and armor sets in this category are slow, making strategy and defense the primary principles of these build types. Of course, there are hybrids with high DEX values, but pure strength isn't known for it maneuverability. 

Prioritize These Stats First
  • Strength
  • Endurance
  • Vitality
  • Dexterity (after everything else)

The higher your Strength value, the better you'll be able to wield powerful weapons. However, increasing this attribute is also because your strength value combines with the Strength Parameter Bonus to provide additional damage based on scaling.  

Endurance gives you more stamina, so you'll be able to attack more and block more. You'll also be able to use heavier weapons without expending all of your stamina. Endurance benefits taper off around Lvl. 40

Vitality benefits taper off around Lvl. 30 during your first playthrough. This stat is important for PvP, but you should not sacrifice other stats to increase its level. 

Ignore Intelligence, Faith, Attunement, and Resistance until much later in the game -- or entirely. You should only assign points to these stats after you've reached the soft caps for Strength, Vitality, and Endurance or if you're going for a hybrid build that, for example, might wield a catalyst. 

Also be aware that if you wield a weapon with both hands, you get a strength multiplier of 1.5. On top of that, you want to make sure your equip burden never eclipses 50% so that you retain a high poise value -- which keeps you from getting stunned. 

Pure Strength

This Soul-level 120 build might be as min/maxey as we want to get in this guide. It puts a ton of emphasis on strength and wielding heavy weapons. Here are the stats: 

  • Strength: 60-65
  • Endurance: 40
  • Vitality: 30
  • Dexterity: 20-25

Dexterity is listed because once you hit the caps for END and VIT, DEX will help you wield a few of the higher level weapons -- such as the Silver Knight Straight Sword -- if you choose to use them. It will also let you wield the Black Knight Great Axe or the Demon's Great Axe, both of which are excellent choices for two-handing here.

You'll also want to use the Giant's Set because although it's heavy, it provides a poise boost in return. On top of that, use Havel's Ring because it increases your equip load by 50%. 

Of course, you won't be able to dodge much using this type of build, but you will be able to take damage while dealing large amounts of it in return. You can also wear either Red Tearstone Ring or Blue Tearstone Ring to increase damage and/or defense on low health respectively. 

Dexterity Builds

Players in this category like to toy with their opponents, using misdirection and speed to gain the upper hand. 

Dexterity builds are typically more agile than other builds. Players should not turtle or rely on traditional blocking during encounters. Liberal rolling and evading are recommended, as well as backstabbing and riposte maneuvers

Many of the weapons and armor sets used in this category are fast and nimble, making speed and precision the core principles of these build types.

Prioritize These Stats First 
  • Dexterity
  • Endurance
  • Vitality
  • Strength 

A higher Dexterity value will boost your overall attacking power, as well as your finesse. Increasing this attribute also boosts the Dexterity Parameter Bonus, which increases your damage when wielding Dexterity-based weapons such as Rapiers, Daggers, Spears, and Bows. 

Endurance gives you better bleed resistance. This is very important because Dexterity builds often wear light armor and do not carry shields. 

Vitality will also decrease fall damage. This is important for stealth builds such as the Ninja and Rogue. 

Strength gives you weapon options. Don't invest heavily in Strength early on. Instead, increase Strength to wield more powerful Dexterity-class weapons in the mid- to late-game. 

You can ignore Intelligence, Faith, and Attunement until the late-game or subsequent playthroughs. Resistance could be useful for a Dexterity Build; however, Dex builds should not get hit very often, so skill points are better spent elsewhere. 

Pure Dexterity

This Soul-level 122 build focuses on speed and evasion. Here are the stats: 

  • Dexterity: 45
  • Endurance: 48
  • Vitality: 45
  • Strength: 20

Putting 20 into your STR stat will let you wield a fair amount of Dark Souls' weapons, effectively giving you a few extra choices for this build. You'll want to wield something like the Balder Side Sword or the Uchigatana (which also provides good bleed damage). Alternatively, you could also wield Great Scythe, which surprisingly very powerful for DEX builds. 

If you want to go ranged, choose either the Longbow or the Black Bow of Pharis

Since Dexterity doesn't necessarily affect armor, you can theoretically where whatever armor you like as long as you can roll quickly and have enough STR. However, to be fast and light while also having a good defense rating, equip the Elite Knight Armor, Elite Knights Gauntlets, Chain Helm, and Chain Leggings. All of these give you good poise to weight ratios. Alternatively, you could swap some of these light armor pieces out for medium armor pieces if you increase END and STR or wear Havel's Ring

Use the Grass Crest Shield to take advantage of its Stamina regen, which works whether you're wielding it or if it's on your back. 

Sorcerer/Magic Builds 

Honestly, Sorcerer/Magic builds are some of the most difficult to use in PvP because spells can take forever to cast and sacrificing stats such as Strength and Vitality to increase your Attunement and Intelligence slots can put you at an early disadvantage. 

I would recommend using a hybrid build such as the Pyromancer or a Knight/Mage variant. 

However, if you're determined to create a Sorcerer/Magic build, play defense from afar. You use the environment to your advantage. Casting spells such as Chameleon and Hidden Body are recommended to surprise your enemies, while learning the cadence of spells such as Great Heavy Soul Arrow, Crystal Soul Spear, and Great Magic Weapon is essential to timing your attacks. 

It's also recommended you finish the game before going into PvP as a Sorcerer since you'll be able to find some of the most powerful talismans, spells, and weapons during the end-game or New Game+. 

Prioritize These Stats First 
  • Intelligence
  • Dexterity
  • Attunement
  • Vitality/Endurance

Intelligence will let you cast more powerful spells. This is very important for Sorcerer/Magic builds. To get the best Catalysts and to cast all of the spells in Dark Souls: Remastered, you'll need to get your Intelligence stat to 50. Going higher gives no advantages. 

Dexterity means you can cast spells faster. This is important because you will need to increase the animation speeds of spells to land more of them against a human opponent. 

Attunement will let you equip more spells and magic. Unless you want to swap spells in and out -- or find the Dark Moon Seance Ring or White Seance Ring, both of which give you +1 Attunement slot each -- you'll want to make sure you have your Attunement stat leveled to 50 if you want to equip 10 or more spells.  

Depending on your playstyle, you will not need to put many points into Vitality. As long as you play defensively (and with good wit), you can get away with a Vitality stat of 15 or so. If you feel like you will take more damage, push Vitality up to around 25. 

You can ignore Resistance and Faith altogether -- or at least until the late-game or subsequent playthroughs. Much like DEX builds, you shouldn't be getting hit much as a Sorcerer. And Faith is only for casting miracles, which you won't be doing with this build very much.  

Pure Sorcery/Magic

There are several ways to go about making a Sorcerer in Dark Souls: Remastered. Here, we'll focus mostly on using increasing INT and ATT to cast more spells faster. However, there are a few strength options, one of which works very well with the build we're currently working on. 

Here are the stats: 

  • Intelligence: 45
  • Attunement: 50
  • Dexterity: 45
  • Strength: 16 
  • Vitality: 15
  • Endurance: 15

For this Soul-level 124 build, you'll need enough STR to wield a decent weapon just in case you need to engage in melee combat. However, putting 16 points into Strength will aloow you to wield the Moonlight Greatsword. This sword's damage scales with your INT rating, so it's perfect to have for this build. In your primary hand, you'll want to wield either Logan's Catalyst or the Crystal Catalyst

On the armor front, you'll want to wear the Crown of Dusk and the Dragoncrest Ring because both increase your damage. For light armor, go for the Xanthous Set. For medium armor, equip Havel's Ring and wear either Ornstein's Armor or the Eastern Armor with either the greaves and the leggings of the Xanthous Set or those of the Chain Set. Just be wary that those two cuirasses decrease stamina regen. 


Outside of these builds, one of the best things about Dark Souls: Remastered (and all the Souls games, for that matter) is that you can come up with your own builds if you don't like what I -- or anyone else -- has on offer. 

What is your favorite build in this revamped ARPG? Let us know in the comments below! 

How to Beat the Dark Souls: Remastered Hackers Thu, 24 May 2018 15:57:49 -0400 Ty Arthur

It's the moment all the masochistic PC gamers out there have been waiting for -- Dark Souls: Remastered has arrived with better graphics, better frame rate, and some quality of life changes. It even landed on Steam a full day early and can be installed right now instead of waiting for the official Friday release.

In this instance, that early release wasn't quite as exciting as it could have been, as the launch was (perhaps predictably) marred by a major issue with unethical players.

Without any effective tools to stop them, hackers have immediately infested the new multiplayer aspect and are busy ruining the game for everyone they come across.

Check out our other guides for this remaster here: 

Dark Souls: Remastered Hackers Mar Launch

Anyone loading up the game will be subjected to nearly immediate harassment by players who can insta-kill them with a single spell, destroy their equipment, or modify them with terrible status effects.

Sometimes they come from the front and annihilate you, while at others, they are completely invisible to attack from behind, and they never seem to go down no matter how much damage they receive. One of the hackers has even gone out of his way to helpfully chronicle his exploits on YouTube (see the clip below).

While mods like PVP Watch Dog warn you when a known hacker is playing with you for Dark Souls III, there's no such mod available at the moment for the remastered version of the original game.

Beyond just getting killed or being Cursed and needing to make a new character, there's been some major collateral damage here as people who aren't breaking the rules are now getting soft banned. Hackers are abusing the anti-cheat function to convince the game that normal players are doing the cheating, resulting in absolute havoc.

A serious question for the hackers ruining Dark Souls: Remastered -- what's the appeal here? If you want to cheat in single player mode, well cool, that's between you and your PC, but why go out of your way to ruin the experience for other people in multiplayer when you don't have to?

Luckily, there is a workaround made by a fan to mitigate the worst of the abuses currently going on.

What You Should and Shouldn't Do Right Now

First and foremost, do not pick up any items the cheaters drop. This will normally get you flagged as a cheater and soft banned, but that's not a guarantee of avoiding the issue, as they can trip you up in other ways, like messing with the code to change your stats.

For now, it's also best to avoid Undead Berg and Anor Londo entirely, as that's where the majority of the problem can be found, with hackers congregating there to kill other players. That's not a great solution, though, as eventually you will want to pass through those areas. This is where a nifty little player-made tool comes into play.

An enterprising Redditor who goes by the handle Sciguma came up with a quick solution (why do the fans always end up having to do this stuff instead of the developers?) that effectively negates the hacking problem.

Save yourself a lot of trouble while waiting for the official patch in the works, and grab the anti-hacking tool here. While it doesn't stop the hackers in their tracks, this Python auto-save script for Dark Souls: Remastered does significantly reduce their annoyance.

Essentially, the script immediately creates a backup of all your save files, then automatically backs up any save that gets modified at regular intervals, preventing hackers from spamming copies of your characters. This reduces the likelihood of a character getting soft banned, and also means you won't lose much progress when coming across a cheater.

Because the auto-save script initiates itself every five minutes, this means that in the event that you do get hacked (and you probably will), you will only lose a few minutes of play time at most when you restart.

Have you found any other effective tools for avoiding the Dark Souls: Remastered hackers, or have you been soft banned by these annoying players trying to ruin the game for everyone else?

Let us know in the comments below, and hopefully we'll see a patch soon to address this ongoing problem in the Souls-verse.

Wizard of Legend Guide: Best Builds Thu, 24 May 2018 15:39:26 -0400 Zackpalm

Feeling overwhelmed with the the massive list of arcana and relics you can find in Wizard of Legend? With the amount of potential magical builds you can come up with, you may find it difficult knowing where to get started. 

With a wide variety of robes, relics, and arcana combinations at your disposal, you have to find the right build to fit your preferred playstyle. In this guide, we have collected a handful of builds you might find useful to try out during your next attempt to conquer the Chaos Trials.

Up Close and Personal

  • Robe: Grit
  • Basic: Earth Knuckles
  • Dash: Gust Burst
  • Standard: Seismic Entry or Blazing Onslaught
  • Signature: Flame Breath

This build was designed for those who relish being in the middle of every encounter. Right at the start of a fight, you can introduce yourself to your enemies with Seismic Entry or Blazing Onslaught. Both serve as great openers. After you've gotten their attention, use Gust Burst to target the nearest one, and start pummeling them with Earth Knuckles.

With the robe Grit equipped, you'll find yourself shrugging off more damage from enemies, despite being in the middle of all of them. Don't get too cocky. It only takes a few well-placed hits for enemies to take down your health, regardless of how much armor you're stacking.

Make use of your dash arcana to hunt down ranged targets who have kept their distance from you, and save your standard ability for the melee-based foes. If you feel like you're taking on too much pressure, use your Flame Breath to char your foes while still keeping them in range of your other arcana.

Your relic choices should focus on increasing your armor as much as possible. This means picking up Euphie's Shawl, Calcifying Bonemail, and Armor of Resolve to take with you. If you're confident you can pick up additional earth arcana during your run, then take Neve's Emerald to increase your health and armor, as well as lower stun and knockback timers. Neve's Emerald requires you to have seven earth arcana equipped to take effect, so make sure you're not wasting a relic spot!

Wind Demon

  • Robe: Pace or Tempo
  • Basic: Stone Shot or Ice Dagger
  • Dash: Gust Burst
  • Standard: Evading Zephyr or Scales of Babylon
  • Signature: Shock Assault

You'll be on your enemies before they even know you're in the room. Wait for enemies to spawn, and use Gust Burst to pull them closer to you. As they're falling forward, pull back a bit and open up a volley of Stone Shot. Take out a few of them before using Gust Burst to do it all over again. If you're using Scales of Babylon, hit enemies with this ability after using Gust Burst, and you'll think this ability doesn't come with a cooldown.

For those preferring Ice Dagger to Stone Shot, activate Evading Zephyr just before you jump into the fray to avoid incoming attacks. This will save you the trouble of having to constantly glance at your health while you're dashing all over the place. 

Whenever you're feeling overwhelmed, fire off Shock Assault to quickly lower the health of multiple foes. However, remember you'll return to your starting position after the end of this ability. Don't use this when you're stuck in a corner!

You will want to equip the Autograph Pad relic to increase your movement if you find yourself not using your signature arcana often. Because you can use Gust Burst so often, have the defensive relic Spell Thief's Socks equipped to further raise your overall movement. To make your basic attacks even more devastating, equip the miscellaneous relic Combo Gloves.

The robes, Tempo and Pace, both complement this build. Those who use their abilities more often will want Tempo equipped. If you're running around, dodging enemy attacks and using your basic attacks more, then you'll feel more comfortable with Pace.


  • Robe: Awe or Shift
  • Basic: Ice Dagger or Spark Contact
  • Dash: Circuit Line or Searing Rush
  • Standard: Bouncing Surge
  • Signature: Tracer Barrage

Keep the pressure on your enemies -- and when you hit them, you hit them hard. Dive into the room using your dash arcana, and move away from the enemies. The further away you go, the more likely you'll find enemies clustering together to try and trap you. As this happens, fire out Bouncing Surge, and use their numbers to your advantage. Get closer and rely on your basic attack to deplete their remaining health. If you find too many enemies in a room as your battle continues, or Bouncing Surge is still on cooldown, use Tracer Barrage to give you some space.

To properly optimize your chance of doing damage, you're going to lean more heavily on relics that increase your chances of landing a critical. The most obvious relic for you to choose is Analytical Monocle, which increases your overall critical chance. If you feel comfortable with effectively dodging your foe's strikes, go with Covert Ops Mask. And if you want to focus solely on using your melee basic arcana, equip the Dark Katana to triple its critical hit chance.

Regardless of what your offensive relic is, you want to equip Vampire's Eyeglasses. This item heals you for every critical hit you successfully land. If you want to spam your signature arcana, equip Albert's Formula so you can receive more charges every time you heal. Complement every part of this build!

Choking Hazard

  • Robe: Tempo
  • Basic: Player's Choice
  • Dash: Toxic Trap
  • Standard: Toxic Bolas
  • Signature: Exploding Fireball or Whirling Tornado

Stay on the move with Toxic Trap dash, and you'll leave a deadly trail of poison for your enemies to step in. This DoT damage should serve as a great opener as your enemies spawn. When they start to focus on you, hit them with the Toxic Bolas arcana. If you find any of them still standing, finish them off with Exploding Fireball. If you prefer dashing straight through your enemies, switch out Exploding Fireball for Whirling Tornado, and you'll stun lock your foes in the trails of poison you left behind.

Because you're going to rely on your dash and standard in every fight, you definitely want to have the Tempo robe equipped. Top off this build with your preferred basic, and you're ready to enter the fray.

Grab any one of these relics to complement your new build:

  • Mercury's Sandals for increased movement speed
  • Hunter's Stiletto to do additional damage to enemies with a status effect
  • Noxious Mushroom to potentially poison your enemies
  • Greased Boots to increase the distance of your dash
  • Leemo's Leaf to evade all attacks while dashing


At the end of the day, Wizard of Legend features over 178 relics and 128 arcana for you to equip. Needless to say, there's a lot of combinations for you to try. Some of them may work for you, and others will get you sent back to the starting area without ever having encountered a boss.

And that's okay! This game is all about finding a magical playstyle for you. There's no "correct" way to play this game. Take your time during each run to discover what arcana suit you like the most to dispatch your enemies. It doesn't even have to fit under a specific category. Make something up and have a blast!

If you have a preferred build, we'd love to hear about it! Share it in the comments below and compare with other Wizard of Legend fans here on GameSkinny.

How to Build a Capable Gaming PC on an Insanely Low Budget Thu, 24 May 2018 13:55:47 -0400 RobotsFightingDinosaurs

We know why you're here. You've decided to build yourself a gaming PC, and you started hyperventilating, worried that it will be insanely difficult, stressful, and expensive. Then you googled "building a gaming PC on a budget" as your heart rate steadily rose. It's okay. Breathe. We're here for you.

The truth is that depending on what you already have, you can build a PC that can run modern games at respectable settings for around 600 bucks. "But Sam!" I hear you cry. "Didn't Bitcoin ruin all of this because now you need more money than God to buy a decent graphics card?" Well, yes and no. Sure, graphics cards are a whole lot more expensive now because high-end ones are used to mine cryptocurrency. But that doesn't mean there aren't still tools and hacks you can use to find yourself a decent graphics card at face value. 

Building a Gaming PC on a Budget

Getting Started

The first thing you'll need to do is set your budget, though this is a bit more complicated than you might think. Most PC building guides do not include the price of necessary accessories like keyboards, mice, and monitors in the total build cost. If you don't have any of those lying around, you'll want to be aware that this is going to be an added cost down the line. You'll also likely need a CD drive in order to install your operating system (which you'll also need to snag somehow). Be aware that all these costs do add up. When I built my first PC, all together, I ended up spending an additional $250 on all of these components. 

Of course, if you already have your operating system and a monitor you want to use, you don't really need to worry about this, but for a first-time build, this really bears mentioning. 

Now, once you've identified the additional costs, you can drill down a bit. The next, most helpful step is to get a sense of what exactly you'll need for your build, especially if this is your first time building a PC. My favorite tool for this is Logical Increments.

If you've never used it before, it really is an incredibly useful site. In short, it lists recommended builds and their total price point. It's a great place to start for something like this so that you can pinpoint everything you'll need and get a sense of how much it'll hurt your wallet. As an added bonus, every build that Logical Increments lists is fully compatible as long as you're on the same horizontal line. 

In this use case, we'll be splitting the difference between the Good and Fair tiers. Don't worry, we're really not sacrificing much in terms of quality here. You'll be just fine running modern games in 1080p at medium-to-high settings.

CPU, Motherboards, and RAM

Though the CPU is ostensibly the core of your computer (and, admittedly, a place where you'll want to invest pretty heavily), it's actually fairly easy to upgrade your central processing unit. The same goes for RAM. 

The only tricky part is pairing each of these components with a motherboard that will be compatible with each. Logical Increments' recommendations for motherboards are usually fairly future-proof up to about three or four years, and their recommendation of the MSI B350 PC MATE has an AM4 socket for your processor and room for 4 DDR4 RAM sticks for $90. This might seem steep for a motherboard, but trust me, this is one part of your computer you will not want to replace anytime soon. This means you'll want to make sure it'll last and be able to accommodate upgraded CPUs and additional RAM upgrades as well, making the AM4 sockets and DDR4 compatibility a must.

In terms of your CPU, AMD's RYZEN series has been absolutely killing it, packing a whole lot of power into a budget-friendly chip. We love the R5 1500x, which, as of writing, is on sale for only $135.

In terms of RAM, you might want to go all out right now and buy 16 gigs, but trust us when we say you really don't need to. For now, start off with 8 gigs of DDR4 RAM, then if you notice you really need more, buy another stick and slot it in later. It's really super easy. Plus, RAM is expensive at $83/8gb.

Ok, so that's about half our budget gone, with a total cost so far of $308. Let's talk about graphics cards.

Picking a Graphics Card

Our own Ty Arthur put together a pretty great guide that runs down a few tools that are incredibly helpful in terms of making sure you're getting the best price no matter what graphics card you pick. You really should read it. 

Done? Good. 

Personally, for a build that's around $600, I think that AMD is the better choice for budget-friendly GPUs. The Radeon RX 560 isn't just our recommendation for a great, cheap card, it's pretty much everyone's. And as an added bonus? As of writing, Newegg has it right now for the MSRP of $155.


Hard drives are now cheap enough that for any build, you should be using two: a solid-state drive that holds your operating system, and a standard hard drive that can hold all of your pro Fortnite replays.

For $95, you can snag yourself both a 128GB solid state drive to hold your system files, as well as a 2TB internal hard drive. Installing your OS to a solid-state drive might sound unnecessary, but it really does increase performance across the board on your computer. You'll be booting your system in a second or two, installation speeds will be slashed, and at the same time, since SSDs are much more reliable than HDDs, your mission critical files are much more safe. Just make sure that once you close everything up and install your OS that you choose the right drive!

Power Supply, Case, and Heat Management

Of course, you gotta plug your rig in. The EVGA 500 B1 ($45 as of writing) should handle anything you throw at it; this PC won't be a monster, so you don't need any super heavy-duty power supply to deal with that. 

In terms of your case, feel free to shop around on Amazon and Newegg to find something you find attractive. We like this Corsair Carbide series case (now on sale for just $50!) because of its front-mounted USB and audio ports, as well as its convenient side window. If that's not your speed, find something else! There are plenty of case options out there, with front-mounted HDMI ports and all sorts of odds and ends, so think about where you'll put the computer and let that guide your thinking.

For heat management on your budget build, we recommend just using the heat sink included with your CPU if you don't plan on overclocking. If you do, you can absolutely drop $25 on a fancier heat sink, but it really shouldn't be necessary for a rig like this. 

Final Cost: $638

This build should give you everything you need out of a gaming PC. It'll be relatively future-proof, easily upgradeable, and will, out of the box, be able to play modern games at respectable settings. 

Notes on Upgrading and Changing the Build

Looking to upgrade further, or to cut corners and bring the build down under that all-important $600 mark? There's a very important tool over at PCPartPicker that can help you with that. In fact, it's a must for every build. 

The site allows you to, essentially, create a complete list of parts for your build. It will then check everything for you and alert you to any compatibility issues that have been found. In addition, after you've built your PC, it will allow you to confidently upgrade parts using recommendations based on the components you've already installed. So if you're a fan of this build but want an Nvidia card, or want to use an Intel chipset instead of an AMD one, the site can guide your purchase decisions in a very helpful way.

Final Notes

Phew. Isn't that better? Like we said, building a decent PC doesn't really have to break the bank. And once you get all the parts, we promise, it'll be a whole lot of fun to put everything together. It's like adult Legos, except at the end, you get to play Overwatch with texture quality set to high.

Black Desert Online Lahn Class Guide: Best Skills and Combos Thu, 24 May 2018 13:24:25 -0400 Sergey_3847

Black Desert Online NA/EU servers have just received a brand-new class: Lahn. It's a mobile, fast-moving class that uses a weapon called Crescent Pendulum, a sharp, crescent-shaped pendulum with a ribbon attached to it.

Lahn has an incredible skill tree with lots of powerful abilities. However, if you want to be a Lahn main, then you need to know which ones are the best. Follow our guide below if you want to know which Lahn skills and combos are the best for PvE in Black Desert Online.

Best Lahn Class Skills in BDO

  • Moon Slash. At the very beginning, this skill is most important. It will boost your basic attacks, and it has no cooldown, which makes it perfect for fast leveling.
  • Eye of the Phoenix. This is a combo skill that boosts other skills. It also has no cooldown, which is a necessity at early stages of the game.
  • Blooming Nether Flower. You can start using this skill after you've achieved level 50. It will work as an AOE, where Lahn moves forward and  and spins her Crescent Pendulum.
  • Soul Cleansing. This is Lahn's main DPS skill, as it does a lot of powerful things simultaneously: it makes enemies float, decreases the enemies’ DP, has Super Armor, and offers 100% Critical Hit rate.
  • Cymbidium + Flow. These two skills should be used in combination for a more powerful attack. This skill combo not only deals a lot of damage, but also increases the Lahn’s survivability.
  • Furious Chase. This is Lahn's main mobility skill in PvE, when she does a fast sequence of short-ranged attacks.
  • Nimbus Stride. With the help of this skill, Lahn can fly. She will do a sort of long jump and then fly through the air. That's how you can quickly get from one distant point to another.
  • Pendulum Cleaver + Dismemberment. Here is another combination of skills that should not be overlooked. It gives Lahn an Attack Speed buff and an AP buff respectively.

Best Lahn Class Combos in BDO

Eye of the Phoenix + Moon Slash
  • LMB + Space + Space + Space

This is the combo for players who haven't reached level 50 yet. It's a strong series of attacks as far as basic attacks go. It uses up a relatively small amount of stamina, so you should be able to hold it for quite some time.

Pendulum Cleaver + Eye of the Phoenix + Moon Slash + Sacred Dance
  • Left/Right + LMB + Space + LMB + Down + RMB + LMB

This combo is all about fast attacks. That's what Pendulum Cleaver is for -- it increases the speed of your attacks, and the rest of the pieces of the combo deal damage in short sequence, leaving your enemies knocked down.

Dismemberment + Eye of the Phoenix + Moon Slash + Blooming Nether Flower + Furious Chase
  • Left/Right + RMB + Space + LMB + RMB + LMB + Up + RMB

If you manage to make this combo work in one continuous flow, the result will be amazing. This combo will not only knock down your enemies, but will keep dealing more damage when they're down.

Cymbidium + Three Point Stipple + Flow: Four Point Splatter + Crescent Barrage + Fragrant Stigma
  • Down + F + LMB (Hold)

The first part of this combo activates the Cymbidium skill that connects other skills into one long sequence. That's why you need to quickly press LMB and hold it for as long as you can after Cymbidium got activated. It will initiate an entire series of heavy damage attacks.

Berated Ghost + Crescent Barrage + Fragrant Stigma + Three Point Stipple + Flow: Four Point Splatter + Sacred Dance
  • Shift + LMB + LMB (Hold) + Down + RMB + LMB

Berated Ghost is very similar in effect to Cymbidium in that it connects other skills into a long sequence. The only difference is that Berated Ghost produces a narrower AOE than Cymbidium, which results in more accurate and stronger attacks.


Hopefully, this guide on the best Lahn skills and combos will help you enjoy the gameplay even more, and for other Black Desert Online guides at GameSkinny, please visit the links below:

Dark Souls: Remastered - Ember Locations Guide Thu, 24 May 2018 12:55:10 -0400 Jonathan Moore

You can only get so far with the base weapons found in Dark Souls: Remastered. After a while, you're going to need to ascend your normal, fire, divine, and magical weapons to take on tougher enemies and harder bosses. 

As you near the end-game -- or if you're playing PvP -- it's even more important to max out your weapons. You can do so by finding the game's 10 hidden embers. Each can be taken to a specific blacksmith so that they can ascend your weapons into more powerful versions of themselves. 

In this guide, I'll show you where to find each ember, which blacksmith you have to take it to in order to use it, and which weapons it modifies to which levels. 

Some are easier to find than others, and some require that you perform certain actions to unlock their locations. 

Be sure to check out our other guides for the re-release here: 

Large Ember



Location: Depths
Blacksmith: Andre of Astora
Modifies: +5 Normal into +10 Normal; +5 Normal into +5 Raw

How to Get It: You can find this ember after you enter the kitchen in the Depths. Defeat the butcher here and look in the chest behind his original location. 

Very Large Ember


New Londo Ruins
Blacksmith: Andre of Astora
Modifies: +10 Normal into +15 Normal

How to Get It: After you drain the water from New Londo Ruins, you'll find this ember in a previously inaccessible area. However, I would suggest starting at the Valley of Drakes to get to it since that's the easier path.

In the Valley, go to the entrance of New Londo Ruins and follow the path up and to the right. Go past the Dark Wraiths in the hall, through the open area and to the right (past two more Dark Wraiths), and follow the path up two more staircases. 

Continue following the path around and turn left when it eventually splits. The ember will be in a chest sitting on a precipice. 

Crystal Ember



Location: The Duke's Archives
Blacksmith: Giant Blacksmith
Modifies: +10 Normal to +5 Crystal

How to Get It: Go to the Duke's Archives and the bonfire outside on the bottom floor. From that bonfire, go inside and take a right. Go through the room with the lever on the left side. As you enter the next room full of bookcases, turn right and go through the opening in the bookcases. The ember will be in a large chest.  

Large Flame Ember



Location: Demon Ruins
Blacksmith: Blacksmith Vamos

Modifies: +5 Fire into +10 Fire

How to Get It: Go toward the fog gate in the Demon Ruins. As you approach, go left and then turn left to look at the path below. Perform a plunging attack on the enemy below and follow the path. There are several very strong enemies here, but at the end of the path, you'll find a chest with the ember inside. 

Chaos Flame Ember



Location: Demon Ruins
Blacksmith: Blacksmith Vamos
Modifies: +5 Fire into +5 Chaos

How to Get It: Defeat Ceaseless Discharge. Go down into the now-open lava bed. There will be a chest there. Open it to nab this ascension tool. 

Large Magic Ember



Location: The Duke's Archives
Blacksmith: Rickert
Modifies: +5 Magic weapons into +10 Magic weapons

How to Get It: Defeat Seath the Scaleless. Return to the Duke's Archives where you first get killed by him. It will be in the large chest in the center of the room. 

Enchanted Ember



Location: Darkroot Garden
Blacksmith: Rickert
Modifies: +5 Magic into +5 Enchanted

How to Get It: This one's kind of a pain in the rear to get. From the bonfire in Darkroot Garden, go through Alvina's Tower. On the other side, go to the right and through the forest. You'll come to a small, watery area with several large Mushroom Men. Defeat them and open the chest in the water. 

Divine Ember


Darkroot Garden
Blacksmith: Andre of Astora
Modifies: +5 Normal into +5 Divine

How to Get It: Go to Darkroot Garden and defeat the Moonlight Butterfly. Afterward, continue across the bridge and head toward the tower. Climb to the top to find this ember clutched by a dead blacksmith. 

Large Divine Ember



Location: Tomb of the Giants
Blacksmith: Andre of Astora
Modifies: +5 Divine weapons into +10 Divine weapons

How to Get It: From the first bonfire in the Tomb of the Giants (near where you meet Patches), climb the ladder and go right. Continue until you come to the second stone structure. There will be a hole in the ground. Drop down into it. 

The room below will be filled with skeletons -- at least six. Defeat them to retrieve this one from the dead blacksmith at the back of the room. 

Dark Ember



Location: Painted World of Ariamis
Blacksmith: Andre of Astora
Modifies: +5 Divine into +5 Occult

How to Get It: From the central area in the Painted World of Ariamis, climb down the well to the left of the area. At the bottom, go left and strike the wall in front of you. Continue down the path and pick up the Annex Key from the corpse. 

Climb back out of the well and go to the right, across the central area. Once you're across the area, turn left under the structure, and open the wooden door using the Annex Key. Go up the stairs, across the ramparts, and down another set of stairs.

Search the dead blacksmith here after defeating the enemies.


Now that you know where to find all the embers in Dark Souls: Remastered, you can ascend all of your meager peasant's weapons into powerful merchants of death. 

If you're headed into player versus player combat, make sure to check out our guide on the best PvP builds to make sure you're jumping in fully equipped. 

Cities: Skylines Parklife DLC - How to Use the New Systems in Your City Thu, 24 May 2018 12:54:07 -0400 Fox Doucette

As with most things in Cities: Skylines, learning how to integrate the new mechanics and systems from the "Parklife" DLC into your city can be a case of trial and error ... mostly error.

After all, not only do you have the option to build new park types, treat them like a proper district for the first time, and play an impromptu game of Parkitect inside your metropolis, but there are sightseeing bus tours, new game mechanics involving noise reduction, a bunch of new maps, and some resources for modders.

I won't go into the modder resources; that stuff flies five miles over my head and is a subject you'll want to go to Skylines' existing modding community to get your head around. I'm a writer, not a coder or a programmer or a game designer.

Likewise, the free patch updates can best be summarized as “trees now reduce noise pollution, and the greater the concentration of trees, the greater the effect -- so plant forests between stuff like windmills and your city proper.” And new maps, of course, mean new, fun places to build cities on, all of which work just fine with other DLC, and all of which are just begging you to build a brand-new city to take full advantage of the new features.

Now then, there are two main features to get to grips with here: park districts and sightseeing tours.

Park Districts

We begin with the bread and butter. Creating a park area is as simple as drawing it in exactly the same way you draw any other district in your city:

How to draw a park area

You then choose what kind of park you want. Your choices are City Park (something roughly akin to Central Park in New York City, with walking trails, activities, and trees and such), Nature Reserve (perfect for those parts of the map where the terrain makes it impractical for zoning), Zoo (animals!), and Amusement Park (a place with all the zip of Nuka-Cola.)

Ultimately, which one you choose depends on your play style.

Once you've drawn the district, you'll need a Main Entrance; this can be found in the standard Parks interface, where you'll notice some new tabs, one for each of the different park types. Click around and experiment; Skylines is not a game that benefits from a linear “do this, this, and this” attitude. 

A main gate makes connections to the park paths where your visitors roam.

Main gates must have a road connection; you then build park paths to direct walking traffic through the park. You can also build side gates to allow more access points into the park, useful for preventing traffic backups near the park's main entryway.

At first, you'll only be able to place a couple of basic structures, and here is where leveling up enters into it.

Once your park reaches a certain entertainment rating and has received enough visitors, you can level it up, but you can't just plunk down a bunch of the same structure and expect it to work; there's a diminishing returns mechanic in play.

Instead, beautification matters. In a park district, trees, landscaping, and other means of making the land more attractive also add entertainment value. But the bar is set low enough that you don't need to go overboard.

Furthermore, the main gate allows you to set an admission price. The more attractive the park, the higher the price you can charge; the larger the tourist volume and population in your city, the larger the potential customer base.

Or you can make the park free and treat it as a loss leader for attracting people to other city services. The choice is again yours, but costs add up, especially in big parks and at higher levels. The game automatically raises the price for you about 20 percent at each level-up, and that seems a reasonable step size.

Policies, "Parklife" Style

"Parklife" includes policies that can be set for each park district. They work exactly the same way as district policies already in place in the game. It's precisely the same mechanic.

Policies include Animal Ethics for zoos, Advertising Campaigns to increase park visitor volume (especially useful when you've got the park up to the right entertainment value to level up but haven't quite cleared the visitor level bar), and setting a park as the Main Park so tourists prefer it, essentially saying to would-be visitors “this is why you'll want to come to the city."

There's even a park policy that improves non-DLC parks, the ones that have always been in the game, taking a bit of your treasury and satisfaction even higher than ever before.

Do you district? You know this stuff already. So have fun with it; Colossal Order made it user-friendly.

New Park Services

There's also a new building: the Park Maintenance building.

Not only does it work on the "Parklife" stuff, but it also adds a new booster to previous parks like Japanese gardens and basketball courts, giving them a boost to attractiveness as long as they're within the catchment area of the maintenance building.

But for "Parklife" buildings, the maintenance crews create a level that's on a slider in any given building's feedback to let you know how much of a bonus the object is getting.

Done correctly, this is a key part of keeping those entertainment and attractiveness values high enough to climb that level tree.

New Buildings!

Besides the maintenance building, there are also new DLC-specific buildings with their own requirements, which unlock based on what you do with your parks.

Most of them unlock at Level 6 unique buildings (the Small City milestone), and as with all other unique buildings, the game outright tells you what you need to do once you reach that point in order to complete the unlock.

The more interesting one, however, is the Castle of Lord Chirpwick; this one doesn't unlock until you've built all of the "Parklife" unique buildings, and besides nightly fireworks shows (which look awesome if you've got the day/night cycle enabled and a decent computer), it increases all other Unique Building attractiveness by 25 percent while raising the city's profile for tourists.

Lord Chirpwick offers a huge reward; if you're playing "Parklife," do everything you can to unlock the castle and make your entire purchase worth the while. Just know that it's like any other monument in the game in that you can't take your eye off the ball of making a great city to rush for it.

See the Sights!

There are two kinds of sightseeing tours: walking tours and bus tours.

They both work on the same principle, using existing public transportation mechanics; if you've created a bus line in your city, you have the know-how to make a sightseeing tour.

The difference is that unlike public transit, which is about getting people between their homes and their jobs, the value of a stop on a sightseeing tour is in the attractiveness of the landmarks you push your visitors past.

Which means if you have some well-placed parks in your city, you can line them up for people to visit them, amplifying their effect.

You can also create hot air balloons; these don't have routes, they just take to the air and view the city from above. Of course, the montgolfieres will stay in the general area of their launch pad, so if you put them near unique buildings, parks, and other high-attractiveness areas, you'll get the most satisfaction out of them.

Using these is simple and a great revenue source, and tours also improve the effectiveness of the locations they're guided past.

A New Way to Manage Tourism

Finally, Skylines has given the player a deeper dive into the data for how tourism is affecting the city.

Much like any other info panel, color-coded markers on the map show where the highest-appeal buildings are, making it easy to plan sightseeing tours around them.

Indeed, you're going to want to consult this view when you're working in that mode, because that's the only way you'll be able to visualize whether your efforts are working or just chewing through your money.

Plus, the budget panel now lets you know how much money tourists are spending and where they're spending it.

As with all things in Skylines, this is something players who have started to climb the learning curve already know; data visualization is how you stay on top of things in this game, from where the water pipes are to how hard the wind's blowing to, now, where the tourist traps are and whether any actual tourists are being trapped.

It's the glue that holds the whole strategy together, so make use of it.

But wait, there's more! The dev team added new assets clearly marked as tourism assets. Notice a bunch of campers, vans, and the like parked near your attractions? That's the game's way of telling you folks drove in just to see whatever their vehicles are parked in front of.

It's all holistic so you're not constantly in menu mode if you know what to look for.

And tourists themselves are now simulated much the same way as your Cims always have been, going about their business and able to be followed and tracked to get a good idea of their flow around your city.

Some Final Thoughts

Getting the most out of Skylines or any of its DLC involves knowing what's there, playing around with it until you get a good sense of how it works, then integrating it into your own strategy.

You can do as much or as little of this as you want, of course, but if you're paying for the content, you might as well use it.

So happy hunting! Leave a comment with a screenshot of your city's own Castle of Lord Chirpwick, and stick with GameSkinny for even more info on "Parklife" and other Cities: Skylines guides.

State of Decay 2: Known Bugs and Their Fixes Wed, 23 May 2018 14:31:19 -0400 Zackpalm

The zombie plague continues in Undead Labs' latest title, State of Decay 2. Anyone who purchased the State of Decay 2 Ultimate Edition has already had a full weekend to gather their survivors, build their fortifications, and raid abandoned houses. But they discovered a new foe far deadlier than the zombie hordes: game bugs.

Here's a list of notable bugs the State of Decay 2 community has reported and their respective fixes, if any solution was found.

Lose Weapon After Executing NPC With Full Inventory

During a side quest, you have the opportunity to choose a dialog option to execute an NPC. Choosing this option pulls you into a cut-scene, and your character wields a pistol instead of what they were previously holding. If you had a full inventory during this cut-scene, the game discards your equipped weapon and leaves you with a pistol in its place.

You can efficiently handle this problem by having a vehicle nearby to store your main weapon inside. When you're forced to wield the pistol, you won't lose your favorite weapon. Plus, you now have a new pistol!

This bug is not related to executing an NPC when they have the blood plague.

Invisible Followers

Don't Lose Track of Your Followers

You should never embark on a supply run by yourself -- you need somebody to watch your back. But some players have found their followers go invisible when they invite them to leave the base. And not the good kind of invisible.

When this bug happens, the invisible follower shows up on the player's map, and they make comments about the environment, but that's about it. If you try switching between followers to fix the issue, the new NPC will also turn invisible.

Some players have had success fixing the bug by locating the follower that started this bug in the community tab and switching to them. When you switch to them, the character you were should show up in front of you as an active follower.

You can switch back to your original character to dismiss the troublesome follower or continue on your journey.

Unable to Cure Blood Plague Victim

If you're attempting to cure an NPC of the Blood Plague, you may not get the prompt to do so despite having all the resources available. 

To address this, all you need to do is log out and then log back in again. When you approach the NPC this time, you should see the prompt to give them the cure. You may have to relog several times for this fix to take effect.

Host Facilities Not Working for Guest Players in Multiplayer

When you host a multiplayer session, your guests may not have access to specific facilities, such as the supply locker, infirmary, and workshop at your main base. This prevents them from accessing a great deal of helpful tools they're going to need to survive the undead.

One way to get around this issue involves the host player creating a new outpost. A guest player can reliably store any items they find on their journey at these locations. However, the host player will have to make specialized outposts to give their guests access to medical supplies or provide them with a means of repairing their damaged gear.

At the time of this writing, Undead Labs has not stated if they are actively working on a solution for this bug on their support page.

Code 6 Error When Connecting to Multiplayer (PC)

Code 6 Error Pop Up

If you tried jumping into a friend's game, you may have received a Code 6 Error while attempting to connect. Resetting your internet or relaunching the game won't get rid of it. 

The solution to this issue lies in your firewall settings. No, turning it off won't help. You need to turn your firewall on! 

Perform the following to fix this issue:

  1. Go to your Start menu and search for Command Prompt. Right-click on this program and run as an Administrator.
  2. Run the following sequence in Command Prompt: netsh advfirewall show currentprofile
  3. On the left side of the list, locate Firewall Policy, and to the right of that it should read BlockInbound,AllowOutbound
  4. If the Firewall Policy reads AllowInbound instead, reset your firewall policy by running the following: netsh advfirewall set currentprofile firewallpolicy blockinbound,allowoutbound
  5. Restart your PC to ensure the change went into effect.

Grounded on Black Loading Screen (PC)

Not all players have had this issue, but some have found themselves stuck on a loading screen. Undead Labs knows about this issue, but they do not have an exact fix for this yet. They need your help to find the solution. If you encounter this issue, follow these steps to send critical information to Undead Labs so they can figure out how to solve it:

Get your Startup Logs:

  1. Press the Winkey + R and you should see a small Run program pop up on the bottom left of your screen.
  2. Paste this into the program: %localappdata%\Packages\Microsoft.Dayton_8wekyb3d8bbwe\LocalState\StateOfDecay2\Saved\Logs and then click Ok.
  3. Copy the StateofDecay2.log to your desktop.

Getting DxDiag:

  1. Go to your Startup menu and search for DxDiag Run Command.
  2. Select Save All Information and save the DxDiag file to your desktop.

When you have all of this information, send it to This will assist the support team in learning about this error and how to best address it in a future patch.

In the meantime, you can try to find out if perhaps the error is on your end. The suggestions listed below may not provide a solution, but they will prove there's an issue with the game itself and not your hardware. Here's some simple solutions you can try to fix the problem:

  • Compare your PC specs to the minimum requirements section of State of Decay 2's Microsoft Store page.
  • Download the latest graphics driver for your graphics card released for State of Decay 2.

Infinite Loading Error (Xbox One)

Those who bought State of Decay 2 for their Xbox One have encountered an infinite loading screen error. Undead Labs is aware of this issue, but they do not have a solution for it yet.

They will address this error in a future patch.

Multiplayer Guests Unable to Kill Zombies with Car Door

Passenger Door Doesn't Open in Multiplayer

In a multiplayer session, some players have found they cannot open the passenger car door to hit zombies while the host drives. This can make driving around boring as players do not have access to their weapons while in the passenger seat.

Undead Labs has not stated on their support page if they are actively working on a solution for this bug or not.

Flashlights Load In Behind Characters in Multiplayer

Players have to keep their wits sharp when traveling at night to prevent getting ambushed by a horde of zombies. A reoccurring problem players have encountered while playing multiplayer centers around their character's flashlight loading in behind them.

When this happens, the flashlight displays the character's shadow, making the device completely useless. Some players have reported that reloading their game fixes this bug, though this was not a reliable fix.

If this problem occurs to you during your playthrough with your friends, send a message to so the developers can learn about this issue.


Should you find any bugs or glitches not mentioned in this guide, let us know about them in the comments below, and we'll add them to the list. Good luck hunting zombies, and for more State of Decay 2 guides, be sure to stick with GameSkinny.

Behemoths, and Hunters, and Surprisingly Well-Crafted Gear, Oh My! A Dauntless Beginner's Guide Wed, 23 May 2018 14:29:08 -0400 A. Weber

Set in a world of floating islands and elemental Behemoths, Phoenix Labs' Dauntless is a co-op action RPG that seems to blend the Monster Hunter: World narrative with Fortnite's style. As a player, you and a group of friends are tasked with hunting down large monsters called Behemoths and crafting potions or gear from their remains. However, as straightforward and familiar as the concept is, not everything about the gameplay is quite as obvious.

So to make sure you’re focused on the real prize -- wasting Behemoths and taking trophies -- here's our Dauntless beginner's guide, full of some things you should know before you start.

Character Creation: Be Wary

The first challenge of Dauntless starts before you’ve even entered the game. When creating your character, you are asked to choose between 12 ancestors, both male and female -- you can choose one of each or do two of the same sex, it doesn’t matter. Your character’s initial appearance will be a combination of these two ancestors, which you can then further tailor by moving the slider at the bottom of the screen right or left. This will allow you to veer closer to one ancestor’s looks than the other’s.

Once you’ve picked your ancestors, you have the normal options, like hair style, hair color, eye size, mouth size, etc., as well as the option for makeup, facial hair, and face paint.

What’s not so obvious is the selection between ‘male’ or ‘female’ -- there isn’t one. Instead, if you’d like to change your character from the default ‘male’ body, you need to click "Change Body Type" at the bottom of the character creation page and select ‘small’ instead of ‘large.’

It’s also important that you are completely happy with the character you’ve created because there’s no turning back once you’ve decided. Dauntless currently offers no option to create more than one character, or a button to delete the one you previously created should you wish to do so. Though they may institute something in the future, emailing the Dauntless crew at and waiting for a response or trying to access ‘Character Reset’ through your account on the website are the only ways to wipe a character at the present time (though 'Character Reset' doesn’t appear on every account).

However, don’t worry! If you have somehow ended up with a character design you loathe, there is a stylist in the game called Gregario, who will help you out and allow you to change your appearance.

The Hunt Begins -- Where Is the Behemoth?

After you’ve created your character, you’ll be launched into your first hunt. Dauntless does a pretty good job of giving you a mini-tutorial on battle mechanics, but it skimps on some of the details -- like how you’re supposed to find the Behemoth in the first place.

If you guessed searching the area for clues, you’re wrong. The Behemoths in Dauntless don’t leave tracks unless they’re hitting things mid-battle. There’s also no in-game map to check for points. So the only way to find Behemoths is to walk around looking for them. If you’re in a group, this process gets expedited as there are more people to cover more ground. However, when you’re working alone, this can take a bit more time (and you only have 30 minutes for each hunt).

The best tactic if you don’t see the Behemoth right away is to get to higher ground. Littered around most elevated areas are blue, glowing craters that shoot out air -- stand over these to get boosted up. You should try to get to the highest possible area so you can scan the full landscape. Hopefully, you’ll see a giant, hulking beast out there. If not, just keep wandering. If you don’t spot it visually, the music usually changes when you get close.

I Found It, Now How Do I Fight It?

The basic mechanics for Behemoth fights in Dauntless are pretty simple -- hack, slash, dodge, repeat. Each Behemoth in the game has its own set of specialized attacks that it'll cycle through. After enough time, it’s easy to spot the patterns and prepare.

To do this, it’s important to understand all of the skills you have at your disposal. For example, your lantern.

Each lantern in the game has a different skill -- either a health boost, an attack boost, or something else. These can be a massive asset in a fight as you’re running around dodging for your life. To use your lantern, hold down V. It should slowly auto-refill once it’s spent.

You also want to make sure you’re fully utilizing your special attack, accessed by Q. The power bar for these skills fills up every time you hit the Behemoth -- kind of like ults in Overwatch.

Another thing to note is that within each area where you'll find a Behemoth, there is one large, glowing blue crater, usually in the middle of the battlefield. The craters are actually health points -- you just have to be able to stand on them long enough to get through a full cycle of pressing E before the Behemoth attacks. Each of these craters has at least 4 charges to help you heal up. You can find them at every spot in which a Behemoth is located, even after they’ve moved across the map.

Finally, when fighting a Behemoth, it’s vital to keep them in front of you at all times. Though this may seem obvious, there’s no in-game auto focus when playing on a keyboard. So if you go to dodge and then immediately attack, you might find yourself facing the wrong direction and hitting nothing but air. Though this is a small thing in short battles, in a 30-minute fight with a shifty opponent, constantly having to readjust your camera angle can get pretty annoying.

If you find you’re struggling with this, try switching to a controller. It makes battles a lot easier, trust me.

So You’ve Come Out Victorious -- What’s Next?

After your first Behemoth hunt, you’ll be sent to the starting city: Ramsgate. This is where you will be able to pick up additional quests, craft potions, and upgrade/change-out gear. It’s a pretty small town, but it can be somewhat confusing to navigate without a map.

Fortunately, there is a scrolling compass at the top of the screen for players to follow. This will not only show you where you’re going, but the direction for quest pick-ups and turn-ins. If you miss the large, yellow exclamation points and question marks, though, most NPCs in Dauntless will stage whisper at you when they want your attention. There are also large signs located outside most of the city’s establishments that can help guide you.

In the beginning, the armor shop, weapon shop, and potion/crafting master (and maybe Gregario, too) are really all you need. After your first hunt or two, you should be able to upgrade all of your armor and weapons. You will also have the option of picking different weapons than the sword you start with.

It’s a good idea to at least test out each weapon separately, as they all have their own specialized attacks and can really change up your gameplay. For example, the axe is great for heavy damage, but bad if you’re looking to attack quickly, while the chain blades are ideal for anyone hoping to keep a bit of distance.

To change out your gear, press ‘L’ for the Loadout screen, or simply hit the ESC button and click 'Loadout' -- this is where you can alter your character’s appearance through their armor and weapons. There is also an option to change dyes, but this is currently permanent should you choose to dye your armor, so beware.

Setting Out Again

Once you’ve updated your gear and picked up a new quest or two, it’s time to head back out to the hunt. To access your quests and choose a hunt to participate in, find one of the hunt boards spread about town. These will give you the option to select a hunt from your quest list or to ‘find a hunt’ where you can pair up with other players. Whichever option you choose will take you to a load screen where you can change-out gear and wait for other party members to ready-up.

This is the ideal time to double-check that you have the right armor, weapon, or potions equipped! Once you land on the island, you won’t be able to change anything.

After that, it’s all about the hunt. Good luck!


Hopefully this Dauntless beginner's guide has set you off on the right foot toward decimating those Behemoths. Be sure to check back with GameSkinny regularly as we dive deeper into the game with even more tips and guides!

Far Cry 5 Friendly Fire Event -- How to Get the MP34 Super Fast Wed, 23 May 2018 13:37:02 -0400 Ty Arthur

After the insanely silly shovel offered up by the White Collar event and the Armstrong airplane from last week's Sharpshooter challenge, a new limited time Far Cry 5 event just went live for all players!

This time around its all about Friendly Fire. If you manage to complete the challenge within five days, the unique MP34 rifle will be ready and waiting for you at any gun store across the Montana wilderness.

Let's see how to get it. 

Starting The Far Cry 5 Friendly Fire Event

While your goal is to get 10 kills with a gun for hire, you don't actually get the reward unless you activate the event.

To start this limited time event, access the pause menu (not the standard in-game menu where you view the map and assign guns for hire) and look for the slideshow of notifications at the lower-right corner. 

Select the slideshow when it rolls around to the Friendly Fire event -- the one that showcases the MP34 and the Kimiko Rye outfit.

Activating The Friendly Fire Far Cry 5 Event 
Press A on the Xbox One or Circle on the PS4 to activate the event. Now that Friendly Fire is active, you can get started with the challenge to have your guns for hire kill 10 Peggies.

There's a catch though -- your nine main companions don't actually count in this instance as a gun for hire! Head to any stronghold you've completed already and look for any of the locals. Most of them can be recruited as an NPC gun for hire bodyguard just by talking to them.

If you have the Leadership perk unlocked (costing 6 points on the Leader skill tree) you can have two of these guns for hire at the same time, making the event go much faster.

Unlocking The MP34 and Kimiko Rye Outfit

With two NPC guns for hire recruited, your best bet to get 10 kills quickly is to head for a stronghold you haven't liberated yet, as they will have the most Peggies already milling around waiting to be killed. If you've already completed the full map, you will have to search around road blocks and other locations to find random groups of enemies instead.

Don't go into the compound stealthy though, as you want the enemy to know you are there and sound the alarm, which will bring more Peggies in trucks that can easily be destroyed with explosives.

To reach the 10-kill count in Friendly Fire, you have to actually command your guns for hire to get the kill, which means targeting one of the Peggies in your line of sight and pressing the left or right arrow on the d-pad to assign the target to your NPC companions.

Within a few minutes, you should have easily racked up 10 kills and completed the single-player portion of the Friendly Fire event.

You don't need to do anything else to get the second half of the event rewards. The Kimiko Rye outfit has already been unlocked, as the community managed to complete their overall challenge in a stunning two hours! That's a lot of Peggies killed by guns for hire.

Where did you get your 10 Friendly Fire kills in the Montana landscape? Let us know your best farming spot in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Far Cry 5 tips and tricks guides here:

How to Pause in State of Decay 2 Wed, 23 May 2018 13:33:06 -0400 Ashley Gill

One feature that almost every online multiplayer game lacks is the ability to pause. We expect not to be able to pause with certain games, but you can in State of Decay 2. You just have to know how to do it.

The same rule that applies for most games you play online applies to State of Decay 2: You simply cannot pause when you are online. Even if you are only playing by yourself, you can't pause if your game is online.

If you know you're going to need to pause, or just like to have the feature available to you, you can enable the ability to pause the game by turning multiplayer off.

You can turn multiplayer off by doing the following:

  • Press the Start button on the Xbox One controller (Esc on keyboard) to open up the Pause Menu
  • Go to the Multiplayer option
  • Switch it to "Offline"

After you've done this, you'll be able to fully pause the game when pressing the Pause Menu button, rather than simply open up the menu as it does when you are set to online.

The downside to all this is that there is no way to pause in multiplayer at all, but that's typical. It doesn't make sense to be able to pause a multiplayer game. But if you intend to play by yourself and need to be able to pause from time to time, it's best to simply set the game to be completely offline so you can press that magic Start button/Esc key when needed.

Having to turn your entire gameplay experience offline isn't a huge deal if you'd rather play by yourself anyway, and if you generally play multiplayer, having to set the game to offline just makes sense. Good luck out there!

Be sure to check out our other, more comprehensive State of Decay 2 guides, including the best base locations, how to rack up unlimited food, and more!

State of Decay 2 Co-Op Multiplayer Guide Wed, 23 May 2018 11:48:36 -0400 Sergey_3847

Microsoft Studios and Undead Labs heard the fans and implemented a multiplayer co-op mode in State of Decay 2. However, to the surprise of many players, the local co-op mode is not available, so you cannot play the game with a buddy on a split screen.

This means that you have to either join a multiplayer game online or invite friends to your own game. Either way, if you want to know how to set things up in State of Decay 2, then follow our guide below.

How to Join a Co-Op Game in State of Decay 2

If you get bored playing solo, you can always join an online multiplayer game. In order to do this, you need to open up your Radio menu by pressing up on your D-Pad. In the open menu, select "Volunteer."

The matchmaking process will start, and you will be added to the playthrough of someone else, who called for help. Obviously, you need to be connected to the internet when choosing this mode.

Also, be well-prepared before venturing into another player's game, since you never know what might be needed there. So try to stock up on as many useful items as you can, and then choose the Volunteer option.

How to Call for Help in Co-Op Mode

If you're playing solo and got yourself into trouble, but there are no friends that can help you out, then you can ask the game to find somebody from the online matchmaking lists.

Ask another player to join your game through a Radio signal (the same as before), but instead of the "Volunteer" option, you need to choose "Call for Help." You can do this at any point in the game, and rather soon, one more random player will be helping you out.

How to Invite Friends in State of Decay 2

On the other hand, if you do have friends that you want to invite to your game, then you can do so with up to three other players. In order to invite your friends, you need to go to the Settings menu and choose the Multiplayer tab.

There you can choose either "Invite Only," which lets you choose specific players, or "Friends Only," which gives you an option to invite players from your friends list.

When you choose either of these options, you need to send guest invites to one or more friends. As soon as they accept your invitation, your co-op game will start.

How to Play a Local Co-Op Game in State of Decay 2

As already mentioned, you can't play local co-op games in State of Decay 2. The split-screen option isn't available, so you need to opt for one of the online multiplayer modes described previously.


That is all you need to know about the multiplayer co-op modes in State of Decay 2, and for other guides at GameSkinny, check out the list below:

State of Decay 2 Guide: How to Get Unlimited Food and Molotovs Tue, 22 May 2018 16:33:53 -0400 Ty Arthur

If you want to stay alive and build up your base while stomping zombies in State of Decay 2, you are going to need a lot of resources, which can be scarce. Constant scavenging for food, medicine, ammo, and fuel is all well and good, but why work harder when you can work smarter?

One group of survivors in particular will have you go out on a rather annoying series of fetch quests, but once that's out of the way, you can use them to potentially get an unlimited supply of food and molotovs!

Unlimited Food Cheat/Hack

When you come across the drunk survivors trying to re-build their whiskey distillery, be sure to complete all of their requests and keep them as happy as possible -- but don't recruit them to your group. As recruits (rather than free roaming survivors who offer quests) they aren't very helpful at your base, and they won't be able to call in food airdrops.

While interacting with these survivors, they will constantly ask you for food, and go into fights drunk out of their minds, which makes it easier to wash your hands of them and go on your merry way in the apocalypse. Don't make this mistake, however, because they become extremely useful if you put in a little extra effort!

While gathering supplies for the survivors during the quest line, you'll eventually need to grab a wheat sack from a barn. The wheat item looks like a standard food rucksack, but will be marked with ! as well. Because it seems like standard food, be sure NOT to deposit it at your own base, as this will screw up the quest.

The wheat sack is also available for pick up before this section of the quest starts, which can completely nerf the whole quest line as well. If you accidentally grabbed the wheat before meeting the survivors, return the rucksack back to the original location where you picked it up at the barn.

Pick it back up again when you have this particular objective active. That should reset the item position and let you proceed without any problems.

After going through their fetch quests, one member of the drunk group will eventually get infected and you will have a limited amount of time to return that character to their base to save them.

Make absolutely certain to complete this section of the quest within the 10-minute timeframe, and then finally ask the group to start making medicine instead of whiskey. Turns out they just needed a little guiding hand to get on the right path.

Raining Unlimited Food Airdrops

From this point on, the distillery survivor group is available to call in an airdrop that can be repeated over and over for infinite State Of Decay 2 food supplies. Each airdrop will only cost you 75 influence, and with the cooldown timer, a drop can be called in once every 8 minutes.

Every single airdrop will always have a ready supply of food, molotovs, and luxury liquor to sell for a return of 35 influence. By repeating this airdrop each time it resets, you can end up with unlimited food and molotovs for very little effort.

If you bring the whiskey distillery survivors into your group, exile them, let them die, or otherwise ignore their requests for help, you sadly won't have access to these easy resources!

Have any other tips on getting lots of resources quickly without much effort? Let us know your strategy below, and be sure to check out our other State of Decay 2 guides here:

Returners Beginner's Guide: You're Not Bronze Anymore, Baby! Tue, 22 May 2018 14:49:35 -0400 Joseph Rowe

Are you tired of getting your butt handed to you in League matches? Sick of the AI stomping your tuchus in Adventure mode? Fed up with feeling like your rear is going to get handed to you if you don't spend some real money on some items soon? Have no fear, this Returners beginner's guide is here to teach you how to kick butt and play optimally.

I will skip going over the basics of the game as the tutorial does a thorough job of explaining the mechanics. This guide will instead cover the best use of your time and resources for your first several hours of the game.

Team Building Tips

The image above shows the basic team you start off with in Returners. I'm a free-to-play player in most games, and Returners actually isn't that much of a pay-to-win game, so you can get quite far with just this team if you feel like it. You'll definitely have no problem getting out of bronze if you put the time and effort into leveling your characters.

That being said, there are certain characters that synchronize better with a specific teammate over others. For example, King Arthur is a tank, but he needs heals before his ultimate attack can activate. You can either bring a healing tactic card that you have to watch very carefully, or you can set yourself up with a healing support like Panacea. 

You should also build your team around the specific fight you're about to engage in. If your enemy team is mostly mages, don't send a bunch of characters in with only physical defense. You will need to adjust formations and equipment as need be. Take some time to go through each piece of equipment you get, especially once you start getting multiple rares and legendaries for each role. You'll be surprised by your ability to take down foes with much higher CP than you if you play smart in terms of counters.


Battle Enhancements and Tactic Cards

When you unlock the ability to spend formation points, you will want to very carefully consider what you want to do. There are counters to pretty much every team composition in Returners, so even if you play as smart as possible, you can still lose. That being said, go with what feels right. If you want an attack-heavy team, just take some battle tactic cards to help you burst down your foes before defense becomes an issue, or take some to enhance your defenses.

The tactic cards you bring in will change from battle to battle. If your foe is going to burst down your mage, you'll want to take a taunt to draw the enemy team's attention to your tankiest character(s). If you lack a healing support, you can either gamble and try to burst your foe down before you die with some attack enhancement cards, or you can play it safe by bringing some heals. This will be something you learn with trial and error. Furthermore, don't be afraid to use your cards in Adventure if you can. For example, heal a character with about 80% health to keep them topped off. Your cards will refresh their cooldown faster than you think in Returners.

How to Spend Your Bluestone

There's quite a bit of debate in the Returners community about the best way to spend your bluestone. From my experience and from what I've seen other players talk about, you will want to spend it more on equipment than on characters. You can get a character you really want, but avoid spending your precious resources on characters you won't use just for the sake of completion. Once you get up to higher ranks, you can do that if you want. Until then, either use it for equipment or for energy (discussed below).

Resource Acquisition

By the time you're reading this Returners guide, you've likely already completed the tutorial and need something else to do. Check out the dungeons. You can get items necessary to level up and enhance equipment, level up skills, and more. As a lower-level player, though, you will want to focus on the daily Upgrade Material dungeons instead of the non-daily ones as there will be a much larger energy cost if you do the latter. If you play every day, though, you will have ample resources, so this shouldn't be a problem for you after a week or so.

You will also get plenty of relics, equipment, experience books, etc. from playing through the Adventure and League in Returners. Just put the time into those modes, and your characters will level up, you can enhance them to upgrade them, you can level up and enhance weapons/armor, rinse and repeat.

Another simple way to get more resources is to check the achievement list (like in the image above). You will be able to get gold, bluestone, energy, potions, scrolls, etc. Check the achievement list often because there are both daily and weekly missions as well as the items you get from achievements. Always do your dailies and weeklies if you want to play this game without spending cash.

Save Your Money by Gaining Energy

Most mobile games like Returners are insanely greedy. They try to get you to spend as much of your money as possible and punish you for being free-to-play. Thankfully, this one isn't like that -- or at least is less so than others on the market. Like we've discussed above, there are tons of ways to accrue resources. Energy is probably the most important resource in the game because without it, you can't really do much.

There are many ways to regain energy. The most obvious one is by ranking up. Doing so will increase your maximum capacity for energy. Another obvious way is by spending bluestones and/or real money on bluestones to get more energy. You will get a lot of bluestones just from playing the game as a beginner, so you can save them up for higher levels when you need more energy if you don't feel like gambling with the equipment gachas.

You can regain energy from claiming rewards from your achievement list like discussed above. You can give your friends friend points to get energy. You can even watch your most recent League match replay to get some energyReturners is surprisingly generous in this regard.


All right, that does it for this Returners beginner's guide. We went over the best use of your resources, how to accrue more of them, battle formations, tactic cards, and team building! Stay tuned for more Returners content, and let us know if there's a specific guide you'd like to see for this game. If you have any questions or tips, leave them in the comments section!

How to Get the Jetpack in Fortnite Tue, 22 May 2018 10:52:06 -0400 Ty Arthur

The long, agonizing wait for full flight in Fortnite is over! Announced way back in February and then put on the back burner so the developers could focus on other limited time events and items, the jetpack finally made it to Fortnite.

After the low gravity hop rocks appeared at Risky Reels and Dusty Divot at the start of Season 4, it seemed like Fortnite's jetpacks were forever forgotten. Now that they've arrived with the 4.2 update, we've got all the details on where to pick them up and how to use them!

Finding It

Legendary rarity drops like the Jetpack are a whole new class of item known as a backpack, with more types besides the jetpack due to be added in the future. While you can loot them from dead players, you won't find them as normal ground loot because they only spawn in treasure chests.

Like any other weapon or consumable healing item, the jetpack takes up an inventory slot and can be moved around or swapped out for another item. Any back bling cosmetic items you have equipped will be effectively hidden while the jetpack is equipped.

 Jetpacking over a house to get a good shot
(thanks to NoahJ456 for the screenshot)

How To Use It

To activate the Jetpack, just hit the jump button while already in mid-air. This will engage the jets and give you enhanced mobility and movement -- like an upgraded version of the hop rock.

There's a catch, though -- jetpacks don't last forever and you can't just zip around the air killing all the ants (er, players) on the ground below.

Each thrust of the jetpack has a limited duration that runs out rapidly. It lasts longer than the hop rocks, but its still a limited-time effect.

To begin the recharge, land and leave the jetpack turned off for a second or so. If you run out of charge for the jetpack altogether by using it too long, it will crumble into dust and disappear from your inventory, bringing you back bling item back into view.

While perfect for re-positioning, the jetpack is actually less about getting kills from the air than you might expect. There's one major reason for this -- you can't enter weapon targeting mode at all while the jetpack is engaged. Yep, you are firing blind.

That makes weapons like the rocket launcher or shotgun a lot more effective than the sniper rifle with the jetpack, unless you can perfectly time disengaging the jetpack, switching to your gun, and getting off a shot before you start falling (and I have no doubt some pro player will!).

 Woo-hoo, for once they weren't lying about what "coming soon" means! 

That's all you need to know for now about the new jetpack Fortnite 4.2 update! Where did you find your first jetpack, and have you pulled off any amazing mid-air kills with it yet?

Let us know your best jetpack kill story below, and if you are still looking for help to wrap up the other Season 4 challenges, check out the rest our Fortnite guides at GameSkinny below:

Fortnite Challenge Guide: Search Between a Bench, Ice Cream Truck, and a Helicopter Tue, 22 May 2018 07:00:16 -0400 Sergey_3847

Every week brings new challenges to Fortnite's Battle Royale mode. One of the tougher challenges in Week 4 is to find a Battlestar between a Bench, Ice Cream Truck, and a Helicopter.

If you want to know how to locate the Battlestar before anyone else, then follow our quick guide below, which is complete with a handy map. Just be careful: there are sure to be other players landing nearby going for the same prize. 

Where to Find Week 4's Battlestar

Fortnite's Season 4, Week 4 Battlestar Location on the Game's Map

All three challenge objects can be found in Moisty Mire, located in the southeastern part of the island. The Bench resides on the bank of a small river under the lantern.

The Ice Cream Truck can be seen on one of the small islands to the east from the Bench. And the Helicopter is set against a green screen on the opposite side of the river from where you spotted the Bench earlier.

The Battlestar will appear on a small patch of land between those three spots (see the screenshot above for exact map location). It's right under a big tree on a patch of land with no grass.

In order to claim your prize, just walk up to the Battlestar and interact with it. As a result, the Search between a Bench, Ice Cream Truck, and a Helicopter challenge will be completed.


That's all for the Season 4, Week 4 search challenge, and for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, be sure to visit the links below:

Fortnite Map Guide: Wailing Woods Chest Locations Tue, 22 May 2018 07:00:08 -0400 Sergey_3847

Those looking to complete Season 4, Week 4 challenges in Fortnite must find seven chests within the Wailing Woods. This is a hard challenge, since Wailing Woods is not the most reliable zone for loot chest spawns.

However, you can use our quick guide below to find all the possible chest locations and get the 500 XP reward for completing this somewhat difficult challenge.

All Chest Locations in Wailing Woods

On the map above you can see the exact spawn locations of all possible chests in Wailing Woods. 

The most obvious spot for loot chests in Week 4 is in the maze located in the center of Wailing Woods. There you will find at least five chests spawning all around the construction. However, be careful, as many other players will want to land there and open chests for themselves.

This means that the best strategy would be to land somewhere on the outskirts of the region. For example, the eastern side of the woods has at least three other potential spots for loot chests. After landing there, you can carefully make your way through the woods to the center, slowly picking off enemies to nab the loot for yourself.

Another one can be located in the southwestern area, and one more can be found in the north of the woods. Even if you can't get all seven chests in the span of one game, don't worry -- you can always go back and find more chests in the following matches.


That's it for all loot chest locations in Wailing Woods for this Week 4 Challenge, and for other Fortnite guides here at GameSkinny, please visit the links below:

Elder Scrolls Online: Summerset Skyshard Locations Mon, 21 May 2018 13:29:28 -0400 Anthony Merklinger


Looming Over the Center of the Traitor's Vault



Summerset’s 18th and final Skyshard requires the most footwork, as players will need to complete the first quest, The Queen’s Decree, which begins by speaking to Razum-dar outside of Shimmerene.


Once the quest has been completed, travel to the third and largest island of Summerset Isle, Artaeum -- home to the Psijic Order -- by entering the newly unlocked portal located beneath the Keep of the Eleven Forces.


Follow the main road west on Artaeum until you discover the Traitor’s Vault. Advancing toward the Skyshard can be difficult as you navigate the corridors inside the Delve; however, the Skyshard is located on the highest level.




Following this guide will help you flex your muscles as you journey through Summerset Isle to acquire 18 new Skyshards. Be sure to check back with GameSkinny for more on The Elder Scrolls Online: Summerset, available May 21 on PC/Mac and June 5 on PlayStation 4 & Xbox One. 


Just getting started in ESO? Click through GameSkinny's ESO Guide here.


Near an Angler's Favorite Fishing Spot in Wasten Coraldale



From the Cey-Tarn Keep Wayshrine, located north of Alinor, travel west toward the coastline and take the boat across to Wasten Coraldale.


Once inside the Delve, fight your way along the pathway and turn north to the shore; then go left to locate the Skyshard near a gathering of trees.


In the Caverns of Tor-Hame-Khard



Head south across the grass field from Shimmerene toward Tor-Hame. Enter the Delve and proceed to the back of the stronghold and fight your way to the second floor. Advance into the caves and fight several Yaghra enemy NPCs guarding the Skyshard.


At the Mouth of the Falls in Archon's Grove



Located in Archon’s Grove Delve, south of the Shimmerene Wayshrine, travel the pathway west until you reach the stream. The Skyshard can be obtained by heading south toward the waterfall. Note: several Dire Wolfs block the way.


Overlooking a Sun Kissed Path in Eton Nir Grotto



Travel north from the Eldbur Ruins Wayshrine and enter the Eton Nir Grotto. Simply move toward the back of the Delve to locate the 14th Skyshard.


Stuffed in a Barrel by Goblins in King Haven's Pass



Upon entering King Haven’s Pass Delve, locate the door along the right of the pathway to descend into the Coal-Splitter Caves. Head west to locate the Skyshard, using the beacon as a guide.


High Above the Heart of Sunhold




Sunhold’s Skyshard can be difficult to get to, so consider venturing into the public dungeon with other players or bringing plenty of gemstones.


Head west from the Sunhold Wayshrine and make your way through the dungeon’s city by following the road until you reach the upper levels. Two enemy NPCs guard the bridge, but they can be avoided.  


Among the Shanties in Karnwasten's Cove




Located in the public dungeon Karnwasten, the eleventh Skyshard can be found near a derelict ship in the lower grotto. If you're entering from the west, use the pathways to descend toward the docks; however, players may find accessing the Skyshard easier if they enter from the east via the Veyond Wyte Wayshrine.


Under Sea Keep's Towering Fortifications



Travel east from Lillandril until you reach Sea Keep. As you venture up the pathway to the stronghold entrance, break from the road and head left into the ravine. The Skyshard can be found underneath the Sea Keep bridge.


South of Russafeld, Where the Mossy Archer's Aim Flies True



From the Russafeld Heights Wayshrine, head southeast through the flower field until you reach the waterfall. Use the Skyshard’s beacon to guide you at the stream.


 Along the Sun's Path Toward Dusk



The eighth Skyshard can be obtained by following the shoreline south from Sil-Var-Woad, located in the southeast corner of Summerset. Ultimately, you can either swim or travel by land, which will give you the opportunity to loot Psijic Portals or engage the new Abyssal Geyser. Once you’ve acquired the Skyshard, head west to discover Dusk Keep.


At the Ruins of the Keep of the Eleven Forces



Perhaps one of the easier Skyshards to obtain in Summerset, follow the road south of Shimmerene and travel west before the road breaks to the southeast. You will come upon the Keep of the Eleven Forces. Simply walk up the stairs and advance to the end of the bridge.


In the Mouth of the Falls Overlooking Shimmerene




The sixth Skyshard can be found northwest of Shimmerene at the waterfall. Break from the main road and head to the body of water indicated on your map.


At a Camp Across a Narrow Plank Walkway



From King Haven’s Pass Wayshrine, travel north toward the coast. Follow the shoreline until you see the Skyshard, which you can access via a wooden plank jutting out from a cliff. There are several enemy Coral-Splitter NPCs in the way. If you keep moving toward the plank, they will drop aggro.  


Along the Beach North of Karnwasten



From the Crystal Tower Wayshrine, head north along the gravel pathway toward Karnwasten. There is a cliff overlooking the beach left of the dungeon’s entrance that you can follow until you locate the Skyshard. Be careful as you descend: a Reef Viper guards the prize.


On a Tiny Peninsula Beneath the Cathedral of Webs




Head north from Lillandril toward the Cathedral of Webs. When you approach the ruin stairs, head left along the pathway toward a tree with spiderwebs covering its base. (You may need to dispatch a few Skein Spiders along the way.) 


Use the rock abutting the tree to jump across the gap onto the grassy area. The Skyshard's beacon should be in view for guidance.


Among a Nest of Stone Eggs East of Cey-Tarn Keep



From the Russafeld Heights Wayshrine, take the stone pathway southwest to Rellenthil. When you reach the bridge, follow the stream south until you find the Skyshard located at the base of a large tree.


Overlooking the Oleander Coast Winery



The first Skyshard can be located by heading south from the Cey-Tarn Keep Wayshrine toward Alinor. Follow the hill left of the city entrance to a tree located behind the Oleander Winery. Two Alinor Ringtails seem to enjoy the Skyshard’s secluded overlook.


As you reunite with old allies in the ancient homeland of the High Elves in The Elder Scrolls Online: Summerset, you’ll discover 18 new Skyshards spread across ethereal landscapes, towering cities, and forgotten ruins. We’ve uncovered each riddle to show where you can unlock the Skyshards to obtain the Summerset Skyshard Hunter achievement.


Each slide includes the Skyshard’s general area, tips for reaching specific locations, and any obstacles, such as quests and portals, that must be overcome to complete your Skyshard adventure.   

Conan Exiles Razmas Quarters Key Guide Mon, 21 May 2018 13:22:50 -0400 Ty Arthur

Although Conan Exiles is now out of Early Access and technically in full release, there's still a slew of bugs and glitches plaguing players that have just come to be expected from survival games these days.

From thralls that won't heal to clipped animations when fighting on elevated hills to a door that just won't seem to open properly, battling the code is currently one of the biggest challenges in Conan Exiles.

If you can't quite manage to get inside Razma's Quarters after nabbing the key, we've got the skinny on how to beat this bugged door and find out what's waiting inside!

Finding the Razma's Quarters Key

To get the key, you need to head to the jungle on the eastern edge of the map, near the shoreline. Inside the temple ruins, you will fight the living statue animated by evil magic and then battle the Witch Queen boss herself.

Be sure to loot the Witch Queen's body after the fight to get the key (and then also head to the back of the room and examine the sculpture at the top of the stairs to learn a new recipe).

 Pilfering the key from the Witch Queen's body (thanks to smskcntr for the screenshot)

Razma's Quarters Door - How to Get Inside

With key in hand, you can now enter Razma's Quarters way on the other side of the map. Finding the key is only half the battle, though, because the door is terribly bugged. For some reason, only half the door opens, and there seems to be a second invisible doorway behind it blocking your entrance.

If you are one of the lucky few to just walk right in, then congratulations on having the gods smile on you! Otherwise, it will take a bit of effort to actually cross the threshold after unlocking the door.

One of the most surefire ways to get inside and speak to Razma of Shem is to stand directly at the inside of the door, turn around so you are facing away from it, then crouch down and roll backwards. If your character isn't too tall, usually you will roll straight inside the main room.

Some players have been able to force clip themselves inside by standing at the entrance and then forcing the door closed while you are inside the animation radius. When the door closes, it pushes you inside the building if you are standing at the right angle. This seems to be the only way to exit out the door at the moment (until a patch arrives), hanging onto the inside and then trying to move forward as the door pushes you out.

If you are playing on your own private server, you can also enter Ghost mode and use the teleport admin command to transfer another player directly inside or outside the house.

 Unlocking the door to Razma's Quarters with the key

Once inside, there oddly isn't that much to do besides getting a little extra lore on what was happening with the Witch Queen, so it's a lot of effort for very little reward. The roof of the building, however, contains an armor stand that provides a new crafting recipe.

Did you figure out another way to get inside Razma's Quarters using the Witch Queen's key? Let us know your method, and if you managed to find anything inside that was actually worth all that effort that we missed!

Need help with any other part of this survival sim set in the long-forgotten Hyborian Age? Be sure to check out our other Conan Exiles guides here to survive in the harsh wastelands:

State of Decay 2 Guide: Best Locations for Base Building Mon, 21 May 2018 10:52:20 -0400 Sergey_3847

State of Decay 2 offers three different maps with various home base locations, which you can move into and upgrade as you wish. Every base has its own advantages and disadvantages, so be sure to find the one that works best for you, as moving into a new base is not cheap.

If you want to know what locations are the best for building your home base on each of the three maps in State of Decay 2, then follow our guide below for all the information you need.

Best Cascade Hills Bases

Bridge Fort

If you go west from your starting base, you will come to a bridge with another potential home base. This one has three parking sites located on both sides of the bridge.

Bridge Fort has four open slots for building in total:

  • 1x Large Slot
  • 1x Small Indoor Slot
  • 2x Small Outdoor Slot

There is also a watchtower on the upper floor that overlooks the eastern side of the bridge. If you want to claim this base, you need to have 500 influence and 4 people -- a perfect location for a small community.

Lock & Keogh Self Storage

If you're looking for a huge storage room, then this is the base you need. It is located in the northwestern part of Cascade Hills.

There are several clearable lockers, which can be used for building or storing things. You also have one Secret Distillery -- a great source of Fuel, if you care about driving vehicles.

This base will cost you 1,500 influence and 6 people in total.

Container Fort

This is probably the best location in Cascade Hills. It is located in the southwestern part of the map. It has seven building slots, two of which are large slots.

The best feature of this base is that it already has a ready-to-use level 3 Workshop, which is a great thing to have. Of course, such luxury isn't cheap and will require you to have 3,500 influence and 8 people.

So, if you have a large community, this is the base for you.

Best Meagher Valley Bases

Whitney Field

This base is located in the southern part of the map. There are two large Fortified Bleachers that serve as the watchtowers on the opposite sides of the base.

There are five building slots in total. The large ones are located on the outer edges of the base, and the small ones are set closer to the middle.

This is a huge open area that requires a large community of at least 8 people and 3,500 influence.

Squelones Brewing Company

The best part about this base, which is located in the central part of the Valley, is the on-site water tank. This means that you will have a constant supply of water without having to build anything.

There is a lot of free space outdoors for building farms and other types of buildings that require a water supply. Inside the large warehouse, you will find a room where you can recycle food and make alcohol.

In order to claim this base, you will need 1,500 influence and 6 people.

Camp Kelenqua

On the western side of Meagher Valley, you will find a truly great base that looks like a campsite. The fencing may require some repair, but there is a lot of free space inside.

This base also has an on-site source of water, so you can start your farms from the get-go. There are lots of buildings around for chilling out and hiding from those pesky zombies.

Although the area of the base is huge, it will only take you 1,000 influence and 5 people to claim it.

Best Drucker County Bases

Barricaded Strip Mall

If you go to the north of the map, you will stumble upon an abandoned mall. However, it's not as useless as it seems. This base has an in-built Urgent Care facility, which is like your own personal infirmary.

On the other side of the base, you will find a High-End Kitchen, where your people can eat well, and which will grant them a nice morale boost. Overall, this is a really great place to have.

In order to claim the Strip Mall, you will need 3,500 influence and 8 people.

Mike's Concrete

This base is located in the middle of the map, which is perfect for those who want to drive vehicles and quickly get to any part of Drucker County. It is supported by a Huge Fuel Storage that will provide you with enough fuel for all your cars.

It is very similar in design to Wheelhouse Truckstop, but that base is located in a far less convenient place, on the ouskirts of the map. So if you enjoy driving a lot, then be sure to choose Mike's Concrete instead.

This base requires only 1,500 influence and 6 people.

Knight's Family Drive-In

This is probably the best designed base on the map. It looks like a castle with a tall fence surrounding it. The front part is protected by a gatewatch, which is great for general area surveillance.

The base covers a rather large territory, and in the back, you will see a Drive-In Theater, where you can repair and store your vehicles.

Claim this base for 1,500 influence and 6 people.


That is all for the best base locations in State of Decay 2, but be sure to come back soon for more guides here at GameSkinny!

Questland Beginner's Guide: Playing Smart Fri, 18 May 2018 15:56:36 -0400 Joseph Rowe

As everyone who has played Questland so far knows: this is a fun game! However, it is also a bit painfully straightforward. You kill monsters, you collect loot, you earn exp, etc. Since it's so easy, this Questland beginner's guide will skip all that and focus instead on maximizing your enjoyment of the game by giving you the ability to do well from the start.

Questland Gear Overview

First things first, let's talk what kind of gear there is in Questland and how to get it. There are 10 different gear slots (with the paw print one being unusable currently):

  1. Helmet
  2. Chest Armor
  3. Gauntlets
  4. Boots
  5. Pendant
  6. Ring
  7. Talisman
  8. Main Hand
  9. Shield

Gear comes in five different varieties: common, uncommon, rare, epic, and legendary.

As with any RPG, you will want to do your best to acquire as much epic and legendary gear as possible while converting your lesser items into either gold, via the shop, or eternium, via the smelt function found in the forge. Both resources are valuable for leveling up your equipment, though some argue that eternium is more valuable than gold as gold is easier to come by.

Remember that the better your gear, the better you'll do on your quests. The better you do on your quests, the more rewards you'll earn. So, investing in good gear is a necessity to perform well in Questland.

Upgrading Gear

You can use gold and eternium to upgrade your gear. Do not upgrade your gear unless you absolutely need to in order to clear a mission or, more importantly, if it's epic or above. You will come across epics and legendaries more quickly than you think, so be sure to avoid wasting your currency on lesser items as it's better to just convert them into currency in Questland.

Obtaining Gear

Getting gear in Questland is easier than you think. You just have to open up chests with keys or gems. You can also get gear from the shop or by completing certain missions with 3-stars (less than 20 turns taken to finish the mission), but you're much more likely to get better gear by opening up Eternal Gear Chests in the shop for 300 gems/Eternal Gear keys.

You will earn a surprising amount of gems, particularly at the start of the game, if you just follow the directions on the Earn Gems subsection of the Quest area and play the game in other ways. This will help you earn epic and legendary gear much earlier than you would if you didn't invest in these chests.

Some players think that it's not worth spending gems on Eternal Gear Chests. They think it's a better use of resources to only use them on event draws, like the one above. I had no regrets about using my gems on the Eternal Gear Chests as it made me powerful enough to breeze through the first few sets of quests, but other players might not feel comfortable with the RNG aspect of chest opening. If you're such a player, stick with the legendary parts that you obtain through event draws.

Obtaining Resources

Questland is one of the few mobile games that, at least at the start, seems to overload you with opportunities for resources. There are so many different ways to obtain resources that it's honestly hard to keep track of. You have the Docks, where you can earn gold, eternium, barrels (a form of currency), and event tickets within mere minutes by watching ads, but you also have the Quest section, which has three different ways to earn resources. Besides that, you have the ability to sell your armor for gold or smelt it for eternium. 

One of the only things that will ever get in the way of you earning more resources is when you run out of energy. This means that you can't complete more quests. In a game called Questland, that's pretty serious! If that is the case, hit up the tavern for a twice-daily free stew that will restore your energy. This will enable you to go on quests again. You can also watch a video to earn free gems while you're at it.

Another place you can watch videos for resources is at the bank. Instead of just getting the normal amount of money, you'll get a bonus 50% added to your total amount. It only takes a few seconds, but it's totally worth it!

Is the Cash Shop Worth it?

I normally would say no to this question if asked about almost any other game, but Questland has two amazing deals for $0.99 each that will hook you up with insane amounts of resources for the early game. The best resources you get from these deals are Eternal Chest Keys and loads of gems. You can use the keys to open up enough eternal chests to hook yourself up with some amazing gear early on. The better your gear early on, the more faces you will smash in your quests. The more quests you complete, the more rewards you unlock in the Quest section.


That does it for this Questland beginner's guide! If you have any tips that I missed, leave them in the comment section below. If there are any guides for Questland that you'd like to see made, let us know in the comments section as well.

Grandpa Mobile Game Guide: Tips for Getting Out Alive! Fri, 18 May 2018 15:36:42 -0400 Stephanie Tang

You wake up. You're in a creepy house that you don't recognize. A geriatric psycho is trying to murder you. You need to solve the puzzles of the locked house and get out. 

Sound familiar? 

If your first guess was DVloper's mobile horror game Granny that came out last month, then... well hey, you wouldn't be wrong. But brand-new to Google Play and Steam (Early Access) comes Pudding's Grandpa -- a game where you must unlock the puzzles in this creepy house and get out before a bloodthirsty Grandpa hears you and murders you to death. 

Here are some tips on how to stay alive long enough to do that!

1. It's okay to die. 

So staying alive may be the point of the plot, but it's not exactly integral to the point of the game. Every time you die, it just saves your progress and allows you to get a little bit further every time. 

(Also, if you're one to scare easily, it'll definitely take the edge off, since your death by bludgeoning is a little underwhelming. Plus, you'll probably see it a lot.)

There also isn't a great deal of information going in as to how to play, so a lot of it really is "learn by doing." Blindly walking into things makes enough noise to catch ol' Grandpa's attention and send him running after you. 

2. Don't be afraid to drop stuff.

Just remember where you left it. Since you can only carry one thing at a time, what you're holding onto may not be what you need to solve the current part of the escape puzzle. Did you find the Green Key right away in the first room? Great! But you haven't found the corresponding lock for that key yet, though, have you? 

There are other keys. Keep exploring. You're going to find some creepy things lying around (e.g. previous victims), and once you (and your character) gets over the fright, take a closer look, rifle through the bodies. You're going to find new stuff, new keys, that can unlock other rooms with new items. 

3. You can't kill Grandpa. 

That would defeat the purpose of the game. You should be able to find syringes hidden around the house that can disable him for a little while and let you run around a little without worrying about how much noise you're making, but he'll definitely wake up again eventually.

(Note: I didn't actually pick up/use syringes during my play.)

There will be items hidden around the house that look perfect for committing some geriatric murder of your own, particularly against that stubby rake of Grandpa's. They won't work. (I tried it for you.)

4. Hide! (But if you don't, that's okay too...)

This game is... uh... a little broken. In its defense, it's still new/in Early Access, so the devs promise a number of changes to the game. A large part of the gameplay is to avoid the murderous old man strolling around the rooms and hallways as much as possible while you go about your business. 

If you walk in on scary stuff, your character will stop and cover their eyes until they are brave enough to see again -- this essentially demobilizes you, sometimes long enough for Grandpa to storm up and rake you to death. Pay attention to the prompts near stuff like wardrobes and tables -- you'll be able to hide in/under them so that Grandpa will serenely pass you by. This would be the normal mechanics for dealing with Grandpa in the same room as you. 

As mentioned, the game is a little bugged, and Grandpa most of all. You can often catch him getting stuck on stairs and walking into walls so that your way is clear and you can go about doing your puzzle-solving in peace. He might not even notice you even if you're just across the table from him. Sometimes it's the other way around, and he'll teleport through doors, across rooms, etc. Sometimes he'll still find you even when you're hiding. 

There's nothing you can do to fix this, so it's probably a good thing the death/save mechanic is so forgiving. 

5. Other Stuff

Turn up the sound! It's important that you can hear every little creak and clink. If you're playing this on mobile, keep some headphones handy since the sound can get blown out a lot easier than on PC. The loud alert sounds might make you jump this way (the game relies a lot on the startle factor for its scares since the regular environment is pretty well lit), but since it's not always evident where Grandpa is, it'll help you locate him a lot easier. 

Turn down the sensitivity. You can access this on the menu. It's a single, simple slider, and it will make a lot of difference in navigating around the house. 


That's all for now! Just remember to keep looking for new stuff as you gain access to different rooms and to keep an eye out for lock and key colors. You'll make it out of there! Grandpa is a pretty short game, so even if you just poke around here and there, you'll probably finish within 30 minutes to an hour. 

Good luck!

Dragon Ball Legends Error Code CR900501 Fix (Android) Thu, 17 May 2018 13:56:20 -0400 Ashley Gill

Dragon Ball Legends has finally hit global. And with it come server and update errors because Dragon Ball is as popular as ever. Super's on hiatus, and if you're a fan you're probably tired of playing Dokkan Battle. You've got to get your fix somehow.

Amidst the server issues the game is having thanks to (what seems to be) a very successful launch is the error CR900501, which is hitting users who have downloaded the game directly from Google Play and those who used a VPN to download before it became available in their region.

It appears CR900501 is tied to whether the user's game is the same version as the server. This normally isn't an issue since games tend to update when opened or prompt you to go to Google Play to update, but in this case, it is. And it is manageable for most.

If you downloaded from Google Play

If Dragon Ball Legends is available in your region (meaning you did not have to download the APK elsewhere), your best bet to deal with this error is to:

  • Open the Play Store
  • Search for Dragon Ball Legends
  • Update the game if it says an update is available

This only works if you downloaded the APK via Google Play/Play Store. If you downloaded the game APK via another venue, things get trickier and a lot less certain.

If you used a VPN to access the Play Store and download the game that way, you should be able to follow the above steps if you use the same VPN you did to download the game initially.

If you downloaded the APK on its own

This is where things get tricky, because there are a lot of potential reasons you could be getting error CR900501 -- all of them tied to the version you have installed, and none of them easy to pinpoint. Chances are you just need to hop onto a VPN and update.

At least one of the APKs floating around in regions where the game is not out yet uses a different directory from the official download.

In these instances, when you go to Google Play to update as outlined in the above section, you'll be given an entirely separate download of the same game but slightly updated.

I'm not sure what the solution to this issue is other than to figure out the directories, find your save file, and move it over to the new (official) directory. But it's probably just easier to download the game again and use your same linked account or start all over.

What it all boils down to is that CR900501 means Dragon Ball Legends needs to be updated and it can't update itself. How hard that is to fix depends on how you downloaded it in the first place.

Conan Exiles PvE Guide: Best Weapons, Builds, Locations, and Servers Thu, 17 May 2018 11:46:05 -0400 Sergey_3847

Currently, there are three types of servers in Conan Exiles: PvP, PvE, and PvE Conflict. The PvE servers play differently in that you can't damage other players, so the choice of best PvE weapons and tactics changes significantly.

Tricks that work in PvP don't necessarily translate too well in Conan Exiles PvE or PvE Conflict. That's why you need to be well-aware of these differences before venturing out into the Exiled Lands.

Follow our guide below for all the Conan Exiles PvE tips and tricks you need.

PvE Rules and Strategies

The main differences between the three types of servers are the following:

  • PvE servers allow players to damage NPCs and creatures, but not other players, thralls, or their buildings.
  • PvP servers offer a complete player vs. player experience in which they can damage each other as much as they want. However, the building damage is active only at primetime (5-11 p.m.).
  • PvE Conflict is a combination of PvE and PvP in which players can damage each other, but only at primetime. The building damage is inactive at all times.

Most players will probably choose the PvP segment of the game, but the PvE experience can be just as satisfying, if not more.

Gather Resources

The survival element is prevalent in PvE. In the beginning, it is important to gather food and resources, such as wood and stone, to build your first shelter. You will be able to improve it as time goes by and turn it into a real private fortress.

Gain Experience

In Conan Exiles you get XP points for exploring the unknown territories, so don't be afraid to venture out. However, don't forget about your own safety, and craft at least the simplest axe to protect yourself.

Crafting and killing creatures also grants experience, which unlocks new recipes that you can use to craft even better weapons and gear.

Clans and Religion

Later on, you can create or join other players' clans. Together you can do a lot more, and this will make both you individually and your clan stronger. You can then take on harder enemies.

Following and making sacrifices for one of the gods in the game is also important. As a result, you will be able to get some unique weapons and armor.

Best PvE Weapons

Steel Trident
  • Damage: 32
  • Armor Penetration: 8.1%
  • Durability: 1260
  • Weight: 5.25

Steel Trident is an exceptionally effective weapon in PvE since it has great range, which gives you a massive advantage over any type of enemy.

However, the trident is mostly used against large creatures, where stopping power is more important than precision. In order to craft Steel Trident, you will need the following items:

  • 8x Branch
  • 30x Steel Bar
  • 8x Twine
  • Blacksmith's Bench
Ancient Warhammer
  • Damage: 36
  • Armor Penetration: 24.3%
  • Durability: 1440
  • Weight: 6.3

The Warhammer is a bit heavy, but its armor penetration is beyond anything you've ever seen. It's also a bit slow, but you can always switch weapons when you need it and use the hammer at more appropriate times.

For example, when you need to break through armor and smash some bones, all you need to do is to make sure that it connects. If you want to craft this thingy, then you will need:

  • 6x Shaped Wood
  • 50x Steel Bar
  • Blacksmith's Bench
Ancient Bow
  • Damage: 12
  • Armor Penetration: 8.1%
  • Durability: 800
  • Weight: 4.2

Melee weapons are great, but what do you do when you need to take out a target in the distance? That's when you really need a bow, and there is no better one than the Ancient Bow.

Craft it and use it with razor arrows, and you will understand why bows are so highly regarded in PvE. The crafting recipe is a bit expensive, but you should manage it nonetheless:

  • 6x Shaped Wood
  • 13x Thick Leather
  • 13x Silk
  • 5x Steel Bar
  • Carpenter's Bench

Best PvE Builds

Strength Build
  • Strength: 35
  • Vitality: 25
  • Grit: 20
  • Encumbrance: 30
  • Survival: 10

The central point of this build revolves around the Axe of the Lion -- a massive weapon with 53 points of damage that gives high bonus to your strength.

Another item that can add an incredible amount of strength to your build is the Hyperborean Slaver Armor. If you're going for the strength build, then this is the way to go.

Accuracy Build
  • Accuracy: 50
  • Vitality: 25
  • Grit: 30
  • Encumbrance: 15

This build is made for archers. There are a couple of amazing bows in Conan Exiles, so if you like this playstyle, be sure to invest your points into Accuracy. The higher it is, the more damage your bows will deal.

Some of the best bows in the game are Bessie's Bow and Eye of the Khan. You will also need the Shemite Armor, which gives bonus to your accuracy as well.

Grit Build
  • Vitality: 20
  • Grit: 50
  • Agility: 30
  • Encumbrance: 20

This build is highly mobile as it revolves around stamina that allows you to pursue creatures. That is also why you need a spear -- an excellent choice for grit build. The best choice of spear is Black Dragon Pike.

The best armor for this type of build is the Vanir Settler set, which gives bonus to your grit.

Best Base-Building Locations

Shattered Springs

If you're planning on settling in a place that's as well protected as possible, then there is probably no better place than Shattered Springs, located in the Desert biome.

It is almost entirely surrounded by mountains, which don't let anyone inside except through a few openings you can use to protect yourself. Another distinct feature of this area is that it constantly produces toxic fumes, which keep NPCs away from this place.

Of course, you can work around it and equip a Sandstorm Mask, which will protect you from the fumes.

Mounds of the Dead

Another great place to settle down is located in the western part of the Tundra biome. It's a pretty dark and uninviting place, but there's a lot of woods around, athough full of undead.

This place also has several unlockable recipes that can be found around the lake region.

Thugra's Stand

The Stand is located north of The Summoning Place and east of The Hand of the Maker. It has a pretty high plateau, which can be used for base-building. The fact that your base is located above the ground in a completely inaccessible place makes it a truly great spot.

Conan Exiles PvE Conflict Tips and Tricks

Base Defense Tips

Since PvE Conflict servers allow other players to attack you, there is a great need to properly defend your base. The first thing you need to do is enhance the resistance of your walls with the help of Sandstone Foundation.

Then, you need to make sure that you can survive raids. Build your base in a remote area and fortify it. You also need to leave as few things as possible before logging off. This means that you need to use most of your materials so that raiders are left with nothing to steal.

Lastly, if you still want to keep a few valuable things in safety, then create a hidden stash away from the base, and keep your stuff there.

Combat Tips

If you choose a weapon, whether it's an axe, a bow, or a sword, be sure to learn it as well as you can. You must know the exact range and damage it produces in various situations.

Never attack first, but let other players come at you. When you're in a protective position, you have a better understanding of your situation.

Always carry aloe potions, Yog meat, or ambrosia. These will keep you alive. Also, you can carry at least one good shield to protect yourself.

Conan Exiles PvE Fast Servers

Here are three of the best PvE servers in the U.S., which you can use to polish your skills:

"This is a PVE server where all are welcome to play in a neighborly, friendly, and respectful fashion. Learn, Build, Hunt, Gather, Trade, Go on adventures with friends and help other players succeed. Simple Common Sense Server Rules are implemented to keep it fun and fair to all players. Trolls and trouble makers are dealt with quickly to keep a positive, harmonious and friendly laid back atmosphere. This We Guarantee!"

"The Crossroads *RP/PVE/18+/Mods~Pippi and Age of Calamitous*

Mystery, Adventure and Treasure await for those who look for it


Our Steam Group



"The DirtySouth pve, we have 3x leveling,5x gather rates Kits for newcomers and vets and are currently using the Mod Pippi! We have a great core player base that are always helpful. Come give us a shot and explore the land of Hyboria."


That is all for our PvE and PvE Conflict tips, and for other Conan Exiles guides at GameSkinny, check out the links below:

Dragon's Crown Pro: Guide to Crushing the Enemy Thu, 17 May 2018 11:08:41 -0400 ElConquistadork

Originally released in 2013, Dragon's Crown has officially been released for the PS4 in a shiny remaster called Dragon's Crown Pro. This sexy and thrilling new adventure has got everyone at GameSkinny dusting off our gear and readying our thumbs for some classic hack & slash action, and this guide will help make sure you're the king of the mountain while everyone else is eating dust (and the occasional piece of wall chicken).

Leveling Up (and Doing It Fast!)

At first, leveling up seems to go at about the same rate as the adventures you find yourself on. As you progress, however, it becomes clear that in order to survive, you're going to need to do a little grinding here and there. 

So what are the best ways to level as fast as possible?

First and foremost: your difficulty level. Your final score at the end of every level has a direct influence on how much experience you get. Always make sure to play at the highest difficulty that you're comfortable with. Don't get too ambitious, though. After all, if you can't beat the level, you don't get any points at all!

Next, don't forget to visit your local clergy! That's more than just good advice on a Sunday: Your temple has a prayer that will net you bonuses on your final score, which is only going to help you beef up that much faster.

Finally, don't ignore the background! If you're paying attention as you cruise through the levels, you'll notice different sparkly bits. Use your touch screen to float over and select that sparkle, and BOOM! Loot galore! Well, sometimes. The key is to never ignore the opportunity to get more loot. Loot = score = a bigger, more powerful you.

Using Runes

This one might seem a little obvious to some of you, but with such a vague introduction to rune magic, it's pretty easy to go through the game ignoring runes if you don't pay attention to how they're used. 

In the backgrounds of many of the rooms you visit on your adventures, you'll be able to see runes carved into the rock, walls, or various items. There are usually two, and if you're unsure if you're looking at the right thing, put your cursor over the questionable rune. If you've got a rune, it should glow.

The key to using runes is buying up what runes you can from the wizard Lucain in town and experimenting with the different runes you find in your level's environments. You don't even necessarily need to get the runes in the right order to set off their abilities! So pay attention, and don't be afraid to sit and work out the runes like a puzzle. The right combo can net you treasure, weapons, and even unlock different places in the level!

Choosing Your Character

There are a variety of different characters to choose from in Dragon's Crown Pro, and making the right decision for your style of play is going to make a huge difference in your experience.

If you're a straightforward button-masher, consider starting with the Fighter, Dwarf, or the Amazon. These are solid, tough characters that can take and dish out a lot of damage while you learn the ropes with the combat.

If you're looking to work your way into a little more strategic fighting, consider the Elf as a starting point. She's fast, she's got really unique abilities, and she offers up some great missile attacks without completely sacrificing her melee combat.

It's only when you're totally comfortable with the game's style that you should use the Wizard or the Sorceress. While both have some awe-inspiring powers, they're true glass cannons if they're misused. This goes double if you're planning on soloing your way through the game.

While these are all some solid pieces of advice for newcomers to Dragon's Crown Pro, they're far from the only tips out there! What counsel would you offer a new player? What character are you leveling up this week? Let us know in the comments!

Wild West Online: A Beginner’s Guide to the Frontier Thu, 17 May 2018 10:26:24 -0400 Felicia Miranda

If you’re just getting started with Wild West Online, you may find yourself a tad bit overwhelmed with all that it has to offer. This is mostly due to the fact that it’s still pretty early in its development stages, and if you’re at all unfamiliar with some of the game’s elements, it can be incredibly frustrating and confusing. Fear not! We’re here to make the process of settling into this new rugged Western frontier a whole lot easier with our beginner's guide.

Selecting a Faction

The first thing you’ll do when starting your journey into the Wild West is join a faction. There are two clans to choose from: the McFarlane Family or Steel Industries. For most players, your choice will be based on the outlined skills you can get for reaching various level milestones.

Though some rewards are the same, there are a few that make the decision somewhat impactful on gameplay. Overall, players will have to choose a side, but this doesn’t at all mean that you have to remain loyal to anyone. You’ll find out rather quickly that there are plenty of outlaws in Wild West Online that prefer to play by their own rules, despite their clan affiliation.

Finding and Completing Events and Missions


You’ll find events happen rather frequently in Wild West Online, and you’ll be alerted of them with a banner displayed at the top of your screen. Finding where the event is happening is as simple as pressing the "M" key. This opens up the Wild West Online map, and icons will reveal where you can go to participate. Events include retrieving relics, finding gold, and capturing towns.

As for errands and other missions, scattered throughout the map are various farms, towns, and places of interest where you can typically find NPCs looking for help with tasks. These characters are indicated with a speech bubble, and upon speaking to them, you will be prompted with a mission that’s usually something along the lines of helping out on the farm or running an errand.

Keeping track of everything can be done by pressing the escape key and selecting the Journal tab, which will reveal any ongoing Exploration, Errands, Events, and Story missions you currently have. These quests are all great ways to earn experience, gold, and more.

Trapping Animals and Getting Pelts/Meat

If you’re assigned a mission where you must collect animal pelts or something of that sort, mission-givers will provide you with an animal trap, or you can also buy a trap yourself by simply heading to a town and purchasing one at the General Store. If you’re on an errand, the NPC will usually specify where you’ll need to go to find the pelt or meat they’re looking for. Otherwise, you’ll want to set your traps around campsites and farms.

To set the trap, press the "CTRL" key and select the Deployables tab. The trap will appear, and you’ll know you can set it down once it’s highlighted in blue (red means it can’t be placed). You’ll have to wait for the time to lapse on the trap, and then you can interact with it to collect whatever pelt or meat it’s picked up. If you’re looking for specific types of pelt or meat, it’ll take plenty of tries. If this is a task you plan to do a lot of, it may work to your benefit to spend skill points on the Rancher ability under the Settler skill tree to make the process faster.

Finding and Collecting Plants

There are plenty of shrubs, trees, and other plants in Wild West Online, but you’ll quickly find that not all of them can be harvested. Plants such as Black Sage, Echinacea, Matilija, Willow, and Yarrow can be found along edges of grassy hills and the sides of small houses. You can also use the Survivalist map that you’re initially given, or purchase one at the General Store.

You’ll know when a plant can be picked when you hover your cursor over the herb and it reveals its name. All you have to do is use your left mouse button to collect it. Spend skill points on the Herbalist ability under the Explorer skill tree to reveal herbs in the surrounding area.

Mining and Finding Gold

When beginning your quest for gold in Wild West Online, you'll find that the game conveniently starts you with one pickaxe that you can use for mining. You can also buy pickaxes in towns at the General Store. Press tab to equip the pickaxe, and look around mountainous terrain for black rocks with yellow streaks running through them. When you hover your cursor over them, they will indicate that this is gold. Hold down on the left mouse button to mine the ore.

To make finding gold and other minable resources easier, take a look at a Gold Map or Mining Map (also available in your inventory at the start or through the General Store), and it’ll reveal where to find them. Unlock abilities under the Settler skill tree to improve your mining.

We hope this beginner's guide has answered some of your most burning questions about getting started in Wild West Online! Now go on, cowboy! Ride across this new uncharted frontier with confidence, and make sure to check out our Wild West Online hub for more guides.

MachiaVillain Beginner's Starting Guide - From First Tree to Kill! Wed, 16 May 2018 16:51:27 -0400 Ashley Gill

MachiaVillain's building-and-managing gameplay should be familiar to Prison Architect and Rimworld players, but there are a number of intricacies here that differ from the games it takes cues from. It's similar, but killing victims and chowing down on their corpses is a MachiaVillain exclusive.

A player's first steps in any strategy game can be a little wobbly. I hope to help you gain your footing more quickly and grasp the basics of the game before you end up restarting time and time again due to trial and error.

This guide is going to go over things you should know as you get started with the game. We are going to go over:

  • What to look for in minions when you start
  • How to use the jobs menu to manage your minions
  • What rooms you should build first
  • How to lure victims to your mansion
  • How to kill victims in the beginning

Of course, there's a ton more to know and learn about the game if you want to go from a meager murder-house with only a few rooms to a sprawling mansion with murder rooms and an efficient layout. Much of that comes down to experience and trial and error.

What to Look for in a Minion at the Start of the Game

When you start a new save, you'll be prompted to choose which minions you want to add to your team. The screen will look as it does below.

You are able to choose from the minions listed at the top of the screen and can shuffle the pool if you don't like any of the ones that are available.

At the far left, you can see a minion's daily food consumption, total life, and traits. The type and amount of food a minion will eat per day depends based on its traits and the type of monster it is. Be sure to read their traits.

The middle panel goes over the minion's base job skill levels. In the above image, the zombie is Level 2 for building, extinguishing fires, and storing resources but is a Level 1 at everything else. It's worth noting that a minion can perform any job even if their skill level in that task is 1.

You can also see a minion's walking speed and max number of job assignments in the middle panel. The faster they walk and the more jobs they can handle, the better. But don't stress about how many jobs a minion can handle right at the start.

The right panel goes over a minion's stats, resistances, the types of equipment it's able to wield, and skills it can learn. This information is more important later, but do be mindful of what you see here.

Job Priorities & Doing the Job Dance

The job priority feature is one aspect of Machiavillain any Rimworld player will be familiar with, though the two handle it a little differently. You need to work the system to make it work for you and you have to get started with it as soon as you load into a game.

In Machiavillain, your minions all have a limit to the number of jobs they can be assigned to at a time. The limit itself varies based on their traits and species, but it can be worked around. In addition, there's no way to adjust a minion's individual priorities.

The image below shows my priorities for one of my game saves.

Let's go over this with bullet points so there's no confusion:

  • You can click on the six dots under the job icon (chef hat, envelope, saw, hammer, etc.) and drag it left or right to adjust that job's priority among the rest

  • A minion's priorities cannot be adjusted individually

  • Because minions can only do a certain number of jobs, you will be in the Jobs menu often to adjust an individual minions' jobs to make sure something gets done


  • In order for minions to actually do the work, such as chopping trees or working in the home office, you must manually initiate the tasks first -- so at the start click on the Resources tab, then on chop wood, then select the trees you want to chop down

But that's not all you need to know, no siree! Let's talk about some priority strategies.

You are not going to want to stick to the default priority order for very long. Below are the default priority orders.

These are by no means ideal, for a number of reasons.

Priority arrangement tips

Let's go over some arrangement ideas, but don't take these as set rules. Arrange your priorities to your tastes.

You're going to get to a point where you'll need to have minions working at your factory workstations almost perpetually, so factory work should be one of the highest priorities.

Extinguishing fires should be at the top -- it doesn't happen often, but it's in your best interest to get them stomped out as quickly as possible.

Working in the home office should be a high priority as well, as incoming victims are your primary source of food.

Once you have traps that need to be refilled, the refilling job needs to be set at the higher end of the priority list.

These are just some tips, and it all gets much easier once you have more minions and those with more work slots. You should try to balance an individual minion's jobs so they have one "primary" task that will take up most of their time (factory, laboratory, home office, building, mining) with the others (chop wood, maintenance, refill, training) being less urgent.

How to manually hire new minions later

Sometimes merchants will come by with minions you can hire for cash, but you can also use the Crypt menu at the bottom to unlock new monster types and put out ads to draw in applications.

As a last note, because you need to get your first rooms built quickly, I do recommend setting 3 minions to build and 1 to chop wood for a while to get your mansion ready for your first victims. After that, figure out what you really want them to do.

What Should you Build First?

When you first start a new game, you need wood and to get your mansion up and running. Getting the wood is easy, and you should set more minions to chop wood than you usually would to get it done faster.

You want to start your mansion off in a spot that doesn't have any or much stone nearby so you can expand easily.

You don't want to have to do this early on.

You'll be expanding sooner than you think. If you can't find a good spot and are all right with restarting with a different set of minions, just restart until you get a good map.

You only start with enough food for 10 days, so you need to get prepared for your first set of victims ASAP. Those days just fly by.

I personally build these rooms first and in this order:

  1. Victim room, with at least one lamp found in the 'victims' tab of the construction menu; this is generally the entrance to the mansion
  2. Home office with a writing desk to get the first ad campaign started
  3. A kitchen with a butcher's table (you can build a table and chairs later)

With these three rooms in place, you are ready to receive your first victims.

Past these, your first priorities should be some bedrooms, a laboratory, and a factory.

How to Lure and Kill Your First Victims

Let's go over the very basics of luring and killing your first victims. If you followed the above building order, you should be ready to start your killing career.

Step 1. Choose an advertising campaign

This can be done via the 'Ad campaign' menu you see at the bottom of the screen. You'll later choose one of these based on your food needs and what your minions and traps are capable of, but it's best to start slow. Choose either the 2 victim or 3 victim ads to get started.

Step 2. Write and send the advertisements

To get started writing ads, click on the writing desk you built and select letters. Look to the right and specify the quantity you want to make, then click the 'Make' button.

A minion must be assigned to working in the home office in order to write letters, so be sure to assign accordingly.

Once you've written the amount of letters the day's advertising campaign calls for, a minion who is assigned to store resources (I believe) will take the letters to the mailbox for sending.

Step 3. Get in position and strike

Victims will start making their way to your mansion after you've sent the letters -- don't worry, the game will let you know when they're on the way. Once the timer is down to 00:00, they will spawn on your map and begin walking to your mansion.

Take this time to set the minions you want to attack to attack mode via the button at the top of the screen, the key you have it set to, or via the jobs menu.

You need to have your minions out of sight to get your victims to come inside. Move all of your minions indoors and behind a door leading to the victim room you made earlier. You want your victims to walk into your house, but if they see your minions they may not even come through the front door.

Once they are inside, select your minions and right click on a victim to send your minions to attack. Do this to however many are in your house until they're all dead.

With all that done, you've gotten your mansion established and your first kills under your belt! But you're not done yet. You have slews more victims to lure to your mansion and a load of work to do before you can say your mansion is truly the most evil and efficient of them all.

Conan Exiles Stat Builds Guide Wed, 16 May 2018 15:06:14 -0400 Ty Arthur

With so many stats and so few points to distribute, building the perfect Conan Exiles character requires a careful stat build focus if you want to survive in either solo single player or a full PvP server.

While choosing your stat build, keep in mind that you can actually respec at any time by brewing a yellow lotus potion with 10 yellow lotus blossoms, so trying out different builds isn't all that difficult.

Below we cover all the worst and best stats to focus on for a killer build. For the TL:DR version, here's the basics of what you need to know:

No matter what your particular build focus is, in general, it should have Vitality highest, then decide if your next-best stat should be Encumbrance, Strength, or Grit; then focus on the other two. Any remaining points can be spread across the rest of the stats (except for Survival, which you don't need).


More than just a dump stat, Survival is pretty actively pointless in nearly all scenarios. Picture a one-legged man in an ass-kicking contest, and you are almost at the utter uselessness that is the Survival skill.

Sources of food and water are plentiful, and you can craft items like berry pulp that are much more efficient than water skins, so it's just an all-around worthless stat.

Presumably, the developers will change how this stat works in a future patch to make it worthwhile, but for now, put your points elsewhere instead of lighting them on fire and watching them burn with Survival.


At the moment, ranged combat just flat-out isn't as damaging or efficient as melee combat. In other words, this is dump stat number two, and it's best avoided.

If you put a ton of points in here and really focus on bows, you can get something halfway decent going with your Conan Exiles build, but frankly, it's a better idea to go with Strength and a melee weapon.

This remains true in either a solo private server of a PvP scenario, as the many obstacles in the terrain and the stamina system mean that you can pretty much always chase an opponent down and eventually force a confrontation instead of having to hit them from afar with a bow.


With a direct impact on your armor's effectiveness, Agility seems really useful at first, but in most cases, you really only need to put 10 points in here to get reduced stamina loss from sprinting.

If you tend to get hit a lot, then it can be a better stat to focus on, but for the most part, it's better to avoid getting hit in the first place by staying out of harm's way or simply having more health from the Vitality stat.


There are ways to game the system and handle your stamina based on skill rather than raw stats, but in general, it's a bad idea to have a low pool of stamina in combat situations (especially in PvP).

At the very least, getting to 20 in Grit for the bonus stamina regeneration is a good idea in most builds. If you manage your sprinting and combat properly through lots of practice, however, you can keep Grit to a minimum and place those points elsewhere.

 You want to be able to keep sprinting away when things go badly


Whether you want to put a focus on points here depends largely on how you play, but for many players, the ability to carry more in a survival game is always welcome.

Yes, food spoils and needs to be consumed rather than hoarded, but when carrying other materials around for building, you generally want more available inventory space. Pack Mule in particular is a pretty hefty perk to aim for. The lower-tier perks also make you more resistant to crippling slow effects and knockdown.

Keep in mind that a full set of light armor gives you a big bonus to Encumbrance, so you can artificially inflate this stat without actually putting points here.


Ironically, the polar opposite of Survival, you want a hefty Vitality score to actually survive. In particular, you want to get to 30 Vitality quickly for the passive health regeneration perk. That easily makes Vitality the best stat at the moment -- and the one you most want to focus on with your build.


Points in Strength don't scale quite as well as the other stats, which give you bigger boosts to their various areas of influence, but you still want to put points here. Since ranged weapons aren't as useful, you want to be able to land strong blows more often with a melee weapon.

Particularly at the lower levels, during which you're focusing on Strength, using two daggers can keep you alive due to the bleed effect and ability to cartwheel backwards out of harm's way. Combining dagger attacks with the Salting the Wound perk acquired at the second Strength tier can be very effective.

Going to the full 40 points for the Brutal Strikes perk can be useful, but it means losing out on a lot of other stat boosts, so if you want that perk, be sure to use items and potions that give you a Strength boost.

 Bleeding an enemy with daggers (thanks to The Vaniverse Gaming for the screenshot)

What's your favorite Conan Exiles stat build, and do you have any tips for a great stat breakdown and perk scheme for us to try out? Let us know in the comments, and be sure to check out our other Conan Exiles guides here:

Dungeon Hunter Champions Beginner’s Guide Wed, 16 May 2018 14:50:09 -0400 A. Weber

Dungeon Hunter Champions is a pretty standard hero’s tale in which you, as the Invoker, have been tasked with assembling champions to fight against the Corruption, an unidentified dark magic overtaking people and creatures alike and turning them evil. And to do this, all you have to do is plow your way through monsters, fairies, golems, and more, over and over again.

The game will walk you through a mini-tutorial once you start playing, but it might leave you with some questions. So let’s start this guide to Dungeon Hunter Champions with the basics!

Dungeon Hunter Champions Controls & Gameplay  

The controls for Dungeon Hunter Champions are pretty straightforward. Players can move their champions by using the circular navigation bar on the bottom-left of the screen and can attack by clicking on one of the four skill circles on the right (some characters have five). Each champion will normally have one base skill and 3 specialized skills with cooldowns. While it’s only possible to control one character at a time, it is possible to switch between champions mid-battle. Or, if you’re unsure about what to do or are just looking to grind through levels, you can set your party to autoplay and intervene when necessary.

However, during higher levels and boss fights, autoplay likely won’t do the trick. And for those extra difficult battles, Dungeon Hunter Champions has a nifty slow-down mode where both your party and any mobs or bosses are brought down to half-speed so you can take some extra time to strategize your attacks -- which is great for those who are prone to panicked button smashing, like me.

Most mobs and bosses also have red lines indicating where their attacks will hit, so make sure you’re watching the ground to get out of the way. They also tend to follow set patterns, especially bosses, so if you’re struggling to defeat one, just play through it a few times until you learn their moves.

It’s also important to note when and how often you’re using your champions' cooldown skills. While in the beginning it doesn’t matter quite as much if you’re spamming specialized attacks, you may regret having everything on cooldown when you run into a boss. So be careful about not having all your specialized skills on cooldown all at once.

If you have popped all of your CDs though and are taking damage, there are potion and health packs scattered throughout each scenario to help you out!

To PVE or PVP?

There are two main types of gameplay in Dungeon Hunter Champions -- Adventure (PVE) and Battlefields (PVP). Adventure (PVE) has a story that progresses as you move through all 7 boards (or worlds) and defeat bosses -- each board has 11 scenarios, some of which are just treasure chests, and a final boss. Each new scenario also contains a chunk of the story told through champion and villain discussions (as well as consistent fourth wall breaking). Though the conversation interludes can be pretty entertaining, you do have the option to skip them and the storyline completely if you’re just looking to get to the action.

As you push through each scenario, you will be rewarded with gear, gems, gold, and more. You can also repeat scenarios to farm rewards or get more experience before moving on. And if that’s not enough, you can double your rewards by watching ads after each scenario is completed (you can turn this pop-up off for an hour and a half at a time).

While board progression is big, especially as a beginner, it isn’t the only part of Adventure (PVE) mode. As you complete boards and level up, you’ll be able to unlock the Boss Raid mode, where you can get rarer awards, as well as the Ultimate Blitz Mode, Events, and Co-Op play.

After defeating the final boss on Board 1, Battlefields (PVP) mode unlocks with Arena. However, don’t expect Dungeon Hunter Champions to be quite the full-on MOBA experience when it comes to PVP. In arena battles, you aren’t actually playing against another player and their team of 5 -- instead, you’re playing against a bot that is controlling another player’s team.

For the real PVP experience, you will want to try 5v5, where you play as ONE of your characters, along with 4 other players, in matches ranging between 8-20 minutes. This mode offers towers, jungle monsters, and more to work against. However, it doesn’t offer any items, like most of the PVE mode does. So you may want to stick with PVE for a while until your champions are geared up.

Which brings us to the most important part of Dungeon Hunter Champions.

The Champions

They say a true champion will fight through anything ….

And in Dungeon Hunter Champions, there are 250-275 of them willing to do it. Like the name insinuates, the champions are the most important part of Dungeon Hunter Champions -- which ones you get, how you level them, and who you put in your party makes all the difference in trying to get through each board, battleground, and boss fight.

As a beginner, you will start with the first champion, Fire Bounty Hunter, Rogrim. He’s a tank character that will help you burn through the first board with his high health, hard hits, and defense-up skill. You will also pick up a Water Boon Sister, Celestine, on the first board. This will be your main healer for pretty much the entirety of the first board until you can unlock more team members and summon new champions.

Once you are able to start summoning champions, there are a couple of things you should take note of -- the first of which is their elemental attributes. There are five elements in the game, including:

  • Fire (Red)
  • Water (Blue)
  • Nature (Green)
  • Dark (Black)
  • Light (Gold)

And like any other elemental strategy game, they all have their strengths and weaknesses, depending on what they’re matched against. In Dungeon Hunter Champions it goes as follows:

  • Water is best against Fire
  • Fire is best against Nature
  • Nature is best against Water
  • Dark and Light are on equal footing

Outside of their elemental traits, each champion also has a star rank between 1 and 6, with 1 being the lowest and 6 being the highest. The stars are important because they indicate how high the level cap is for that champion. For example, if you have a 1-star champion, the highest level they can train to is 10. With a 6-star champion, though, they can train to level 60.

Don’t worry if you feel like you’re getting stuck with a lot of 1-2 star champions in the beginning. It’ll change. And, if you end up falling in love with a 1-2 star champion, you can “train” them by sacrificing or “feeding” other champions of the same star rating. This will give the chosen character an extra star, while dropping them back down to level 1. You can also use this method to help level up your main champions. Just be sure before clicking “train” in the character tab, because there’s no undo button.

Summoning New Champions

So how can you get new champions? Sometimes you’ll acquire new champions as you move through the boards. However, most of the time, you’ll have to “summon” them. To do this, go to the Summon button on the home screen, and click on one of the 3 listed options - Common (1-3 star), Rare (3-5 star), and Legendary (5 star). While Legendary obviously has the best champions, you will likely find yourself pulling champions from Common Summons more than anything else as a beginner.

When summoning a champion, you will also need specific items called discs, along with gold or gems. For Common Summons, it’s a Common Disc, for Rare Summons, it’s a Rare Disc, and for Legendary Summons, you guessed it, it’s a Legendary Disc.

You can get these discs through normal board progression, boss fights, and other PVE modes.

If you have your heart set on a specific champion, try checking the champions tab. In there you can find the Collection Option on the bottom-right side. This will allow you to sort through champions by star rank and elemental trait, it also gives you their location so you can farm for them!

Finding the Right Team Comp

So now that you’ve got a roster, it’s time to build out your battle-hardened crew. Like any other MOBA or dungeon crawler, team composition in Dungeon Hunter Champions is very important. In the beginning, you will be stuck as a 2-3 man group until you pass Board 1. Then you’ll build up to a 4-man team before ending up with 5.

With this in mind, it’s best to keep to the basics -- tank, healer, DPS. One of each is pretty mandatory, but the rest is up to you. Since each champion comes equipped with their own unique skills and a set elemental trait, your party composition may vary depending on the boss fight, board you’re working through (final bosses tend to have their own elements), or simply your own play style.

Once you’ve gotten a few more champions on your side outside of the starter Bounty Hunter and Boon Sister, you can REALLY start looking at team composition. Because while it’s up to you as to how you want to build your team, there are definitely some standout champions that are preferred community-wide. These champions can also be some of the best for beginners looking to push towards end-game.

  • Light Boon Sister, Xenia (Support/Healer)
  • Crystal Water Priest, Zircon (Support/Healer)
  • Nature Valkyrie, Rota (Support/Healer)
  • Nature Grublin Shaman, Mojo (Support)
  • Nature Candy Munchkin, Peppermint Fighter)
  • Nature Candy Crow Hag, Vorona (Fighter)
  • Water Spearman, Fen Xian (Fighter)

If you’re having a hard time choosing between characters, take a close look at what all of their skills do, and weigh them against each other in overall team comp. A great way to help with this is by checking the Battle Report after each scenario or match. These will show you how each champion performed and whether or not they’re working well together.

Overall, though, your tanks should have some type of defensive move -- like the Fire Bounty Hunter Rogrim’s EPIC LEAP, which raises his defense. Your Fighters should be able to hit hard, and your support characters, like your healers, should be able to not only buff the other champions in your party but also debuff mobs and bosses.

When considering debuffs, one of the best skills to get as a beginner is “disorient.” This skill disrupts boss or mob attacks and can be found on a variety of champions, like the Nature Grublin Shaman, Mojo. It’s also a skill that should continue to be useful as you progress towards end game!

As for buffs, the first thing you may want to look for is something that decreases the party’s cooldown timers or increases the party’s attack speed with haste.

There are also passive skills, like the Water Spearman, Fen Xian’s Synergy Trait, that increases the attack power of ally champions by 25%. So as you level your champions, make sure to look out for any Synergy Traits that might benefit your team.

To check out each of your champions skills, go to their separate character tabs -- Dungeon Hunter Champions does a pretty great job in explaining each.

You can also level up the skill of a champion by training them with a small fluffy-ball tutor called a fuzzlepuff -- you get these through using battle points from PVP.

Now that you have a team focus, it’s time to think about gear.

Gearing Up for Success

Getting new gear in Dungeon Hunter Champions is pretty simple, especially in the beginning; all you have to do is complete scenarios. Each board is themed around a different gear set, and as you progress through, you will have different pieces drop, along with gems and gold.

All of the gear in Dungeon Hunter Champions is star-ranked, similar to the champions and separated by rarity.

  • White = Common
  • Green = Uncommon
  • Mint = Rare
  • Purple = Epic
  • Orange = Legendary

All gear can be upgraded through spending gold, which, while great at lower levels as it’s relatively cheap, can become more difficult and costly as you level. You should also note that any gear you level on one character will lose its level if you transfer it to someone else.

When you first start, completing gear sets should be your main priority. You’ll also want to work on stacking HP gear or Vital pieces (the first of which you can find on Board 1). These are especially important on your support champions as you’ll be in a bit of trouble if they go down mid-fight. Outside of Vital gear, try looking for accuracy and crit stats.

Equipping champions with gear sets you get through Board completion can also give you Active Set Bonuses. For example, 2 pieces of Vital gear can give your champion +15% Max HP.

As you complete boards and level up, you can get even higher-level gear (Epic and Legendary) through Boss Raids!

So You've Got the Hang of It. Now What? Find your Farmer.

Once you’ve got the main parts of the game down, you’ll want to start really focusing on leveling up and gearing out your champions. This is where a “farmer” champion comes in. Typically, these “farmer” champions are a tank or fighter that can carry lower-level champions -- Water Spearman, Fen Xian is a great (and popular) example of this. The “farmer” will run low-level “food” champions through boards over and over to level them up before they’re sacrificed to level the champions in your main roster.

As you get to later boards in the game, farming earlier boards will become incredibly important. It’s nearly impossible to complete every board without leveling up and gearing out all your champions. So get to grinding!

Still unsure? Here are some other quick tips to keep in mind:

  • You can check the Guide Tab under Missions for some in-depth information on how the game works.
  • Check Missions, Daily Quests, and Achievements every day for rewards.
  • There are guilds in-game that you can join or start. However, beware that currently there are no restrictions on joining guilds, which means you can join whichever one you want, and you can’t prevent anyone from joining yours.
  • The Crystal Water Priest is considered one of the best healers in the game at present, but he starts as a level 2 - DON’T eat him! To acquire him, try frequently checking the Black Market or start farming for him on Board 3)


Let us know if you have any additional tips or tricks for beginners in Dungeon Hunter Champions, and as always, stick with GameSkinny for all your gaming news, tips, and guides!

Shin Megami Tensei: Strange Journey Redux Guide -- Bonding With Demons Tue, 15 May 2018 13:57:54 -0400 TMSingle

Probably one of the biggest features of Shin Megami Tensei: Strange Journey Redux, outside of the choices your protagonist makes, are the demons. Actually, the demons might be a tad more important. They are, after all, the sidekicks you would die without. In the realm of Schwarzwelt, demons are the majority, and they hold most of the power, so it only makes sense to use some of that power for yourself.

In the beginning of the game, you are given a series of questions to help figure out your alignment. At the time, the questions might not seem to be important, but your alignment affects your interactions with demons. Keep that in mind.

Let’s talk about how to get demons to be our friends and, ultimately, our weapons of mass destruction.

My Best Friend Pixie

In the first sector, Antlia, after you are given brief knowledge on basic game functions from a fellow Strike member, head north through the door. You will immediately enter a battle. Don’t panic! This battle is where you get the opportunity to meet your first demon companion, the Fairy Pixie.

Image courtesy of Megami Tensei Wiki

The Fairy Pixie finds you interesting and takes it upon herself to explain how you can get other demons to join your party. She tells you a little about alignments, what things demons may ask for when you’re negotiating, and the uncertainty that lies in negotiating with unknown demons. Pay attention!

Once she gives you the rundown, she’ll ask to be your demon. Honestly, you’re not going to lose anything by accepting her offer, and you need the extra help. This will be one of the easiest demon exchanges within the game.

Demon Talk: Time of Conversation and Negotiation  

As Fairy Pixie explained, when you enter a battle, you will notice the option to Talk pops up. Instead of choosing Combat, click on Talk. This opens the lines of communication between you and a potential party member. Once you’ve begun talking, you cannot back out, so be sure you’re chatting with a demon you really want.

If you’ve never spoken to that species of demon before, there will be a small note to let you know that you’ve never heard that demon talk. It’s nothing to worry about, so you don’t have to pay too much attention to it -- other than to realize you’ve never tried to negotiate with that demon species and will likely not know what questions will be asked.

Immediately, alignment will be mentioned as the conversation starts. If your alignments match with the demon, they will let you know. They’ll be interested in you and willing to chat. However, if your alignments don’t match, the demon will show hesitation and reluctance.

Why does it matter if your alignments match or don't match?

Well, if you’re talking to a demon with the same alignments, the conversation is more likely to go well, and you can successfully keep from offending a demon. However, if the alignments don’t match, you have a higher chance of offending the demon, which will result in the demon simply getting angry or suddenly attacking you.

There are a few demons that don’t care about alignments, but you still have to be careful of the choices you make. If you come across a demon that doesn’t speak and only grunts or growls, you have the option to make random noises or keep quiet -- and both options can lead to an attack, depending on the creature. Also, where some demons don’t mind you saying you’re not afraid of them, others might find you reckless and stupid.

Depending on the demon, some being more generous and forgiving than others, even if you offend the demon, they may decide to forgive you and keep the conversation going.

If you successfully manage to get past the questioning, you will find yourself faced with two choices. You can either try negotiating, or you can stay quiet. If you choose the latter, the demon will either randomly do a nice thing, such as heal you, give you an item, or give you Macca (the currency), or the demon may insist on negotiating.

If the demon is agreeable to negotiating, you get the options to ask the demon to join your party, ask the demon for an item, ask the demon for Macca, or say you want nothing. Now, if you choose an item or Macca, you have no control over what the demon gives or how much the demon gives.

Having a demon join your party is costly. It’s worth it, but it’s still costly. Sometimes, the demon may ask for your life (bye bye, HP), your energy (there goes the MP), an item (hope it’s not your last heal item), Macca (your poor funds), or an outrageous item they know you won’t have. Some demons are more considerate than others, so it doesn’t take them long to decide they’ve gotten enough from you, and they will join your party. Other demons might suck you dry if they can.

You are able to refuse the demons’ requests, but if you refuse them too many times, they’re going to get angry.

If you manage to successfully complete negotiations with the demon of choice, you have yourself a new party member!

But beware, if your level isn’t higher than the demon you’ve been negotiating with, the demon will switch up on you, tell you thanks but no thanks, and leave without returning all of the wonderful things you’ve given.

Now, occasionally, you might come across a demon that forces its way into your party. There’s no way to stop this demon from barging into your party. Just be glad you didn’t have to spend resources, and consider it a freebie.

Leveling Up and Fusing Demons

With 350 fusable demons, it’s important to level up. As the game progresses, the number of demons you can get will also increase, but you only fight with three at a time. Of course, you can switch them out during the battle. Even the demons who aren’t active in the fight still get experience, so the game wants you to level up those demons.

As you level up, sometimes the demons will give you an item. These items can include expendable items -- like medicine or chakra drops -- or forma, pieces of this and that which help you make expendable items, sub apps, or weapons. One of the most important things the demon may give you, however, is a demon source.

Demon sources are valuable when it comes to fusion. When you use fusion, you pick several demons to fuse together to make a stronger demon. You cannot make a demon that will surpass your own level. If successful, you'll have a stronger demon to help you win battles!

Now, the demon source takes skills from the parent demon and gives you the option to add those elements to your new demon.

For instance, if you use the Slime Source, you have the option to allow your new demon to use Poison Claw. So, sometimes, if you’re worried about losing specific attacks, check out the sources and see what skills come with them. Not all the skills you like will be able to transfer over, and there is no getting back a demon you’ve used for fusing. So, make sure you are using demons you’re willing to part with, skills and all!

The demons are such an essential part of the game. As you progress, more demons become available to choose from, you receive the choice of using special fusion, and you ideally become a step closer to having an unstoppable team!


Did this Shin Megami Tensei: Strange Journey Redux guide help you better deal with demons? Drop a comment below to talk about some of the challenges you've faced, and check out our other Shin Megami Tensei: Strange Journey Redux guides for even more helpful information.

How to Heal Thralls in Conan Exiles Tue, 15 May 2018 12:59:17 -0400 Ty Arthur

Life tends to be nasty, brutish, and short in Conan Exiles after your would-be survivor gets cut down from the corpse tree by the dark-haired Cimmerian himself. To get a leg up over the competition, you want to tame an army of thralls to perform tasks for you and defend your base.

Unfortunately, thralls are much squisher than they should be due to a series of Conan Exiles bugs currently plaguing servers, and in one particularly glaring glitch, they can even be killed in PvE by other players when they are supposed to be immune to player death.

At this point, there doesn't seem to be a reliable way to consistently recover a thrall's health after you spend the time to tame them, although there are several options to attempt while waiting for patches.

Capturing Thralls

The act of capturing and taming thralls causes them damage, since people don't typically volunteer to be your slaves without a little prompting.

If you haven't figured out how to capture a thrall yet, you need to knock the potential thrall out with the Truncheon, then drag them back to your base with Fiber Bindings. Place the thrall on the Wheel of Pain to break them, and be sure to have some Gruel on hand so they don't starve while being tortured.

Up to four thralls can be placed on a standard Wheel of Pain at a time (note that there are also lesser and greater versions in your recipes), although they are simply queued for torture down the line and don't all get broken simultaneously. If you have a Taskmaster assigned to the Wheel, thralls will be tamed faster.

 Nothing says "vacation in Hyboria" like a trip to the Wheel of Pain!

Passive Thrall Healing Over Time

Since they will typically be damaged when you are done bludgeoning, binding, and torturing a thrall, they are supposed to return to full health automatically through the passage of time.

Obviously, they don't, and this is a known bug currently being worked on with an upcoming patch. Stay tuned for details on when it will arrive!

Using Food/Potions for Health

Although only working intermittently for a handful of players, it seems like placing a healing potion such as Aloe Extract or even putting food in the thrall's inventory should get them to use the item and recover health every time.

Right now, they mostly just ignore the items, or occasionally consume them with no obvious effect.

Thrall Health Regen With Entertainers

Placing an Entertainer near a damaged thrall is occasionally working for PC players at this point, but it's not a completely surefire healing mechanism at the moment.

Both the Dancer and Musician thrall types are supposed to create a heath regen buff on any other nearby thralls, but guess what? It's not working at all for console players.

Up to 10 stacks of health regen are supposed to apply while standing near a Dancer/Musician, and those stacks should remain in effect for up to half an hour after leaving the aura around the Entertainer, but at the moment, that doesn't seem to be working on thralls as intended. 

 Dancer thralls busting out their sweet moves

Sadly, at the moment, there doesn't seem to be much to do but wait for a patch or an announcement from the developer on a workaround, as thrall healing in Conan Exiles just isn't working properly. 

Have you managed to actually heal any of your tamed servants? Let us know what worked for you, and we'll get this article updated! In the meantime, be sure to check out our other Conan Exiles guides for those aspects of the game that aren't bugged:

How to Get Seraph Weapons in Destiny 2 Tue, 15 May 2018 12:24:31 -0400 Sergey_3847

The "Warmind" DLC for Destiny 2 has introduced the new Seraph weapons, one of which -- the Hand Cannon -- you can get by completing the main campaign. However, there are three more weapons you can get: the SMG, Sniper Rifle, and Shotgun.

If you want to know how to get the rest of the Seraph weapons in Destiny 2, then follow our step-by-step guide below for all the info you need.

Step 1: Get Rasputin Key Fragments

After you've completed all the story missions in the "Warmind" DLC, you need to start playing either Heroic Strikes or Heroic Adventures. Both of these PvE modes are rather easy, so you should have no trouble there.

As a reward for completing each of these modes, you will earn one Rasputin Key Fragment. The PvE modes are available daily, and in total, you need seven of these key fragments.

Then, you need to turn in those seven key fragments to Ana Bray, who resides on Mars. In exchange, she will provide you with one Encrypted Cache Key.

Step 2: Start Escalation Protocol

When you have the Encrypted Cache Key, you can join the Escalation Protocol public event on Mars. This is a new horde mode that requires players to survive seven consecutive waves of enemies and one last boss fight in the end.

The boss fight is especially difficult, so it would be good to enter the event with a power level of at least 370. If you can't beat the boss, don't worry; the boss rotates every week, so you can do it again after the rotation.

Step 3: Open the Loot Box

Once you've managed to beat the final boss of the Escalation Protocol event, you will get the Decrypted Cache Key and a special loot box as a reward, which can be opened only with the help of this decrypted key.

The loot box includes legendary and exotic items, such as unique armor, and of course, the much-desired Seraph weapons.


That is all you need to know in order to get the Seraph weapons in the "Warmind" DLC, and for other Destiny 2 guides at GameSkinny, please visit the links below:

Pillars of Eternity 2: Best Multiclass Guide Tue, 15 May 2018 11:57:35 -0400 Ty Arthur

Further reinforcing the Baldur's Gate 2 nods, multiclassing has been thrown into the mix with Obsidian's Pillars of Eternity 2, which radically expands your potential class options.

Between pure classes, sub-classes, and now multiclassing, the number of combinations is astronomical, which probably has you asking -- what's the best Pillars Of Eternity 2 multiclass available?

Below we cover two of the most monstrous combos that can deal insane amounts of damage or withstand devastating punishment in any combat situation! These two builds can even potentially solo the game.

Monk/Ranger (Wanderer) With the Kitchen Stove

This is a very, very specific build revolving entirely around a single weapon that makes the Monk's Swift Flurry ability continuously activate.

To make this build work, you need to go one-handed with a single blunderbuss -- in this case, a specific enchantable blunderbuss called the Kitchen Stove.

The weapon is picked up from Dereo the Lean, who is located by exploring the Gullet Narrows and killing some guards. Trade some relic found in the under-city beneath the Gullet for the Kitchen Stove, which can be enchanted with Wild Barrage to bounce multiple shots between enemies.

What you want to do is have the Monk ability Swift Flurry increase your attack speed, and then launch extra free attacks each time you crit. Combined with the weapon's enchantment, you will get an absurd number of shots from one single attack. Groups of enemies will go down nearly instantly, and you don't even need party members to help in the fight.

When combined with the Ranger's Driving Flight ability, which causes each attack to hit other targets, the numbers get astounding. Any given attack will likely end up bouncing dozens of times, utterly annihilating all enemies in its path. Combining with any ability that reduces reload speed, like Gunner or the Frantic Reload enchantment, will just further increase the carnage.

This particular combo is so effective and bounces so often that if you come across an enemy resistant to the damage who doesn't quickly die, the bullet will keep going so long that it can actually crash the game! Keep a secondary weapon or ability in-hand for bosses that are immune to damage so you can keep playing.

Note that it is entirely possible this was an unintended usage of the Swift Flurry ability with this particular weapon, so try out the build now before it ends up getting patched out!

 The Kitchen Stove Blunderbuss (thanks to MONST3R for the screenshot)

Chanter/Melee Class (Herald or Howler)

Your Chanter side will take on the role of summoner, bringing out tons of allies to fight for you. Your secondary focus should be on anything that heals you while hampering the enemy to work well with the various abilities of either the Paladin or Barbarian.

Picking the Beckoner sub-class for Chanter gives you even more minions, although each will be more squishy. With how many you will have out, however, they don't need to last very long. If you want to focus on survival and using your Chanter abilities more often while wading into combat, go with Skald. Your summons cost more because they count as non-offensive chants, but that is offset because you get extra phrases to use when landing crits.

Either way, the automatic chants offered with the Chanter class is where things get overpowered. Pick anything that hurts the enemy, heals you, or gives you huge defensive bonuses and you won't need to worry about most combats.

For your secondary class, you want either Paladin to keep yourself alive, or Barbarian for the frenzies to increase your damage and shouts for crowd control.

On the Paladin side, picking an order that grants Lay On Hands immediately is an excellent idea, and Shieldbearer in particular can make you nearly invincible since your Lay On Hands will prevent you from dying for several seconds. Focus on upgrading your Lay On Hands and picking any auras that give you boosts to armor, regenerate health, or hinder enemies with blindness.

No matter what your starting skill, be sure to pick Deep Faith at second level. So long as you roleplay the character in accordance with the Paladin order's beliefs, you get absolutely massive defensive bonuses.

Whether you pick Barbarian or Paladin, be sure to load up your character's inventory with further creature summoning items, like the Laughing Imp Cameo or the Dragon Pendant. Between your army of monsters and your constant ability to heal damage while wading into melee combat, you will be an absolute powerhouse!

 Even from level 1, the Chanter can bring out a horde of skeleton allies

Have you found any other killer Pillars of Eternity 2 multiclass combos we should try out? Let us know your favorite class combination in the comments below!

Be sure to check out our other Pillars of Eternity 2 guides below as you get started exploring the Deadfire Archipelago:

Conan Exiles Legendary Weapons Guide Tue, 15 May 2018 10:58:24 -0400 Sergey_3847

There are 40 legendary weapons in Conan Exiles. They include axes, swords, daggers, spears, and many others. These weapons are highly efficient and have their own specialties.

You can get these weapons only from legendary loot chests, which can be found all over the Exiled Lands. But in order to open them, you need to be at level 60 and have skeleton keys.

If you want to know what legendary weapons are currently available in Conan Exiles, as well as their stats, then follow our guide below.

Legendary Axes

Title  Damage Durability Weight Perks
Reaver's Axe 51 1350 4.03 Shieldsmash
Strangely Familiar Axe 53 1350 4.03 Shieldsmash, Bonus Grit
Axe of the Lion 53 1350 4.03 Shieldsmash, Bonus Strength
Battle-axe of the Berserkers 53 1350 4.03 Shieldsmash, Bonus Health
Glimmermoon 56 1350 4.03 Shieldsmash


Legendary Swords 

Title Damage Armor Penetration Durability Weight Perks
Tulwar of Amir Khurum 48 9.9% 1350 3.5 Cripple
Dueling Blade of the Hawk 50 9.45% 1350 3.5 Cripple, Bonus Agility
The Wightblade 50 9.45% 1350 3.5 Cripple, Bonus Vitality
The Bane of Khostral Khel 50 9.45% 1350 3.5 Cripple, Bonus Strength
El's Drinker 52 9% 1350 3.5 Cripple


Legendary Greatswords

Title Damage Armor Penetration Durability Weight Perks
The Watchblade 60 13.5% 7200 5.25 Cripple
The Papyrus Blade 60 14.85% 1800 5.25 Cripple
Jedias Greatsaber 63 14.18% 1800 5.25 Cripple
Baal-pteor's Razor 63 14.18% 1800 5.25 Cripple, Bonus Encumberance
Blade of the Adventurer 66 13.5% 1800 5.25 Cripple


Legendary Maces

Title Damage Armor Penetration Durability Weight Perks
Lovetap 1 -- 3300 4.55 Shieldsmash
Aja's Bane 50 18.9% 1650 4.55 Shieldsmash, Bonus Strength
The Unintelligible 50 18.9% 1650 4.55 Shieldsmash, Bonus Survival and Encumberance
Momentum 52 18.0% 1650 4.55 Shieldsmash
The Brittle Bastard 55 16.2% 400 4.55 Shieldsmash


Legendary Hammers

Title Damage Armor Penetration Durability Weight Perks
Sledge of Tsotha-lanti 54 27% 4800 5.25 Sunder
Bec-de-Corbin 54 29.7% 2400 5.25 Sunder
Forgelight 56 28.35% 2400 5.25 Sunder
Baal-pteor's Lodestone 56 28.35% 2400 5.25 Sunder, Bonus Strength
Hanuman's Gada 59 27% 2400 50.0 Sunder


Legendary Daggers

Title Damage Armor Penetration Durability Weight Perks
Akbitanan Blades 39 13.5% 1800 2.45 Bleed
Heartsblood 39 14.85% 900 2.45 Bleed
Daggers of Nameless Days 41 14.18% 1800 2.45 Bleed
Zhaibar Knives 41 14.18% 900 2.45 Bleed, Bonus Agility
The Grim 43 13.5% 900 2.45 Bleed


Legendary Spears

Title Damage Armor Penetration Durability Weight Perks
Warspear of the Black Circle 43 8.1% 2100 4.38 --
Gavain's Rusty Pike 48 9.9% 2100 4.38 --
The Impaler 50 9.45% 400 4.38 --
Vaulting Pole 50 9.45% 2100 4.38 Bonus Agility
Black Dragon Pike 55 8.1% 1120 4.38 Bonus Stamina


Legendary Bows

Title Damage Armor Penetration Durability Weight Perks
Frostshot 18 9.9% 1500 3.5 --
Bessie's Bow 18 9.45% 1500 3.5 Bonus Grit
The Huntress 18 9.45% 1500 3.5 Bonus Survival
Eye of the Khan 18 9.45% 1500 3.5 Bonus Accuracy
Splinter 21 -- 1500 3.5 --



That is all for the legendary weapons and their stats, and for other Conan Exiles guides at GameSkinny, please check out the links below:

Fortnite Rubber Duckies & Salty Springs Map Guide Tue, 15 May 2018 10:42:07 -0400 Ty Arthur

How are we in Week 3 of Season 4 already? I guess time flies when you're fragging your friends in Fortnite Battle Royale! As expected, new challenges are here this week, so let's get to 'em!

There are two main new challenges you will want to jump on as quickly as you can, before other players discover their locations and use them to snipe:

  • Traveling to all the rubber duckies found floating in various water locations
  • Finding where the Salty Springs treasure map leads!

Fortnite Week 3 Rubber Duckies

Apparently pining for that simpler time when you played in the tub as a kid, the developers have dropped a bunch of rubber duckies across the map in watery locations, and it's your job to find them all.

Like with the gnome hunt from a few weeks back, an audio cue will occur whenever you are near a ducky -- this time a quacking. Since they are all found in water, you can mostly ignore the buildings and stay looking in outdoor areas (although there are two that can spawn in Retail Row, and one in a house pool).

These may spawn in other location as well, just like the gnomes, so if you found your rubber duckies in other spots, be sure to let us know so we can update the list! Here's where they have been discovered by players so far:

  • In a bathroom at the northwest end of Retail Row
  • Beneath the water tower on the east side of Retail Row
  • The northeast corner of Loot Lake, by the docks
  • The rocks near the waterfall at the south end of Loot Lake
  • The river's end at the very far north end of the map, above Anarchy Acres
  • In the pool to the west of Anarchy Acres
  • In a pool east of Lonely Lodge
  • Northwest of the Moisty Mire crab statue
  • The pool in Snobby Shores
  • The toilet sculpture at Flush Factory
  • The bridge near Lucky Landing
  • The south end of Fatal Fields

 Fortnite Week 3 Rubber Ducky Locations

Fortnite Week 3 Salty Springs Treasure Map

While the treasure map itself is found in Salty Springs, you don't actually have to find it first to get to the treasure, and you can skip that step altogether to go straight to the Battle Star. Landing at Salty Springs isn't a terrible idea this time around, though, as the Battle Star location is just off to the east of that location.

 Easiest Fortnite Treasure Hunt Ever?

The treasure hunt location this week should be really obvious to anyone familiar with the Battle Royale map. You don't have to turn it sideways or figure out any landmarks or anything this time.

The location is clearly the end of the curly area on the far east side of the map (northwest of Moisty Mire, east of Salty Springs, and southeast of Retail Row). As usual, when you get close enough to the actual spawn location, the Battle Star will wink into existence, and this time it's right by a tree on a hill.

Your only real competitor here will be the storm if you didn't land close enough to the edge of the map before it starts closing in. As always, be on the lookout for chicken dance-emoting players hiding at the Battle Star location and looking for an early-game fight!

 Week 3 Salty Springs Treasure Map Battle Star Location

That's all you need to know to get started on the Week 3 challenges! Still getting a handle on all the Season 4 changes to the Battle Royale map? Check out our other latest Fortnite guides here and earn all those Battle Stars:

Craft Warriors Beginner's Guide: Play Without Paying! Mon, 14 May 2018 11:01:46 -0400 Stephanie Tang

Hot off the press from Translimit Inc., the brains behind mobile brain teaser Brain Dots, comes a brand-new strategy game on both Google Play and the Apple App Store: Craft Warriors.

If Clash of Clans had a one-night stand with Minecraft, this is probably what that baby would look like. Build your town the way you want it, defend it from all attackers, and conduct looting missions on other towns for riches, plunder, and precious resources ... all in a cutesy, isometric-view universe of cubes.

Strategy games on mobile all share fairly similar elements to each other in that "build 'em up, break other people's stuff down" method of madness, and Craft Warriors is no exception. Gameplay aside, Craft Warriors also gives you the power to create your own unique units yourself, block by block, and even share those designs with other players as well.

(Look familiar?)

The game is already a hit on the mobile marketplace -- but who really wants the same "hit" on their wallet? Check below for some tips on getting started that won't break the bank!

1. Constant Vigilance! (And Improvement)

The big boss baddie of this game is everyone else, and to keep playing, you're going to have to plan for the eventuality that someone is going to try and pillage you for all you're worth.

So keep this in mind when you're setting your small staff in motion. 

After you finish the tutorial, you will have a basic town set up, and what you have you'll want to make the strongest you can make 'em -- dedicate your builders to this task (you'll start with one, but you'll get another one fairly quickly). If you get caught in a Battle, the destruction of your castle means an insta-win for your enemy. Keep it upgraded! Doing so will also allow other upgrades for more buildings around your base.

Meanwhile, blacksmiths tend to and upgrade your fighting units -- which you'll also want to keep in business when your units aren't busy in battle. This is how you make sure you win the battles you pit your units against.

Similarly, you'll also want to keep your airship upgraded to increase attack slots, increase how much loot you can carry off, etc.

(Note: The airship is off to the right of your base, and not always easily visible.) 

Always queue these guys up to work when you're not actively playing. Since most of the stuff in the game is level-locked, you will need to up your EXP in order to unlock most of it. Upgrades are the key to doing just that! For efficiency's sake, I find it good practice to start them on the longest upgrades possible during your downtime.

Use the game recommendations! Since the entire game focuses around upgrading everything, let the game take out some of the guesswork of which to focus on first. 

Lastly, constantly fine-tune your defenses. Add traps, rearrange defense units, and plan out your town layout in new ways to keep the other player scrambling. 

2. Manage Your Resources

While some of the most rewarding ways you get your hands on loot is through the Battle system, you may not want to get started in this way, particularly if you've only just begun to build up your (very basic) army. 

This means a bit of unit and facility management. 

Waiting to build and upgrade storage units like the Mythril Tank and Gold Storage is not nearly as exciting as storming the gates of an enemy town, but it will mean that you won't be wasting the resources that you mine out of your own property using the Mythril Pump, Gold Mine, and Gem Mine (this last one is important because these are super valuable in your upgrading efforts; plus, there is no separate storage building for them). 

Note: If you want to avoid spending money, you're going to invest a lot of empty time -- which is usually fine, who doesn't have other things to do in-between mobile games? -- but this means saving your resources and gems for the stuff that matters. Use your gems to buy more builders and blacksmiths, which will continually benefit your productivity.

These are also especially important with regard to how you design your town defense in case of invasion. While the destruction of your castle means a win for the enemy team, most people are far more interested in your loot -- and that's what's sitting in your storage reserves waiting to be used. Keep these behind your walls.

I also like to scatter them around a bit throughout the layout so enemies don't just find a motherlode of resources all at once, but others may prefer a more straightforward, single defense-point strategy. 

3. Duke It Out in Battles!

When you feel ready to take on your fellow man, it's time to explore the Battle system. Craft Warriors uses an energy system (i.e., running a battle mission uses up a certain amount of energy that regenerates over time), so you'll want to choose those battles wisely. 

In this game, pick on the lowest denominator for the best rewards (yes, prey on the weak) and the highest chance of success -- check out the mission's battle stats before you choose which one to attack. Do some recon -- check out the loot (gold, mythril, etc.) and also the layout of the town to plan your opening move.

Use this to choose what units you will bring to the battlefield in order to counter what you can see. You'll have more and more new types of units open to you as you level up -- use them to your advantage, and always try to have a mix of different unit types to deal with coming conflicts! 

4. Collect Your Bonuses

Particularly important for those of us who really don't enjoy the nickel-and-diming experience of microtransactions, the game offers a number of different bonus rewards.

  • Daily login rewards are a must as these will drop extra gold and mythril for almost zero effort, and you'll get more if you have multiple daily logins in a row. A separate login bonus will also net you between 3-7 red gems. Keep that streak going!

  • Daily missions are great once you get your army up and running because these usually involve initiating and completing a certain number of battles a day. But not always! So even right from the get-go, check out what missions are available -- they could relate to stuff that you're doing already, like building/upgrading certain facilities. Chest rewards make this a tidy way to earn something extra for regular gameplay.

  • Other actions, such as watching an ad video whenever the option pops up, can get you some more gems, too. Tutorial-like, the game also offers one-time gem rewards for changing your emblem and making a profile icon. 

Other Things to Know:

  • Pages promising cheats and hacks exist (e.g., unlimited gems, ridiculous combat incentives, etc.) -- don't trust them. They're bad for you.
  • Your customized units are cosmetic skins. You can either make them yourself or download them from the marketplace.
  • Join a clan! Get together with your friends and join forces against the other clans. You can use this to ask for reinforcements.
  • Take advantage of other players' oversights in your defense makeup. Place stuff like Ballistas up high so they can provide high support defense but punish any invading army that hasn't got enough ranged attackers.


That's all for now! Stay tuned to GameSkinny for any new tips, tricks, and ways to win in Craft Warriors.

Conan Exiles Exclusive Recipe Locations Guide Mon, 14 May 2018 10:37:04 -0400 Sergey_3847

There are two ways you can get recipes for crafting weapons, gear, and other items in Conan Exiles. You can either spend knowledge points or find recipes in Exiled Lands and other biomes.

Some recipes are exclusive and can't be obtained through knowledge points, so the only way to get them is to find them on the map. If you are looking for these kinds of unlockable recipes in Conan Exiles, then follow our guide below.

All Unlockable Recipe Locations in Conan Exiles

  • Totems. Located in the Frozen North part of the map, near The Temple of Frost.
    • Teaches Vanir Totem
    • Crafted at Artisan's Worktable
  • Specialist Cooking I. Located in the central part of the Exiled Lands, near The Summoning Place.
    • Teaches Darfari Bug Soup, Spiced Soup, Corrupting Brew, Flavored Gruel
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking II. Located on the border of Scrubland and Forest biomes, between Skyholme Ruins and Stormwatch.
    • Teaches Aloe Soup, Spiced Oysters, Cooked Oysters, Berry Juice
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking III. Located in the central part of Scrublands, near Stargazer's Crest.
    • Teaches Meaty Mashup, Enhanced Gruel, Cleansing Brew, Spiced Tea, Herbal Tea, Seed Soup
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking IV. Located in the central part of Scrublands, near Mounds of the Dead.
    • Teaches Trail Jerky, Steak and Eggs, Exquisite Stew, Savory Jerky
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking V. Located in the central part of the Forest biome, at the Trapper's Cabin.
    • Teaches Hearty Stew, Demon Blood-Sausage, Rhino Head Soup, Lasting Meal, Spiced Slivers
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking VI. Located in the central part of the Exiled Lands, near The Summoning Place.
    • Teaches Hearty Meal, Bone Broth, Spiced and Shredded Roast, Bug Kabob, Spiced Egg
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking VII. Located in the northwestern part of Exiled Lands, at Muriela's Hope.
    • Teaches Chili Desert Style, Yellow Lotus Soup, Egg Surprise, Salted Berries
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking VIII. Located in the western part of Exiled Lands, at the Tower of Bats.
    • Teaches Feral Feast, Century Egg, Bush Jerky, Oyster Omelette
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking IX. Located in the northern part of the Forest, at the Lian's Watch.
    • Teaches Mushroom Stew, Roasted Mushrooms, Mulled Brew, Cimmerian Meal, Mushroom Tea
    • Crafted at Stove
  • Specialist Cooking X. Located in the southwestern part of the Jungle biome, at the Drifter's Rest.
    • Teaches Cooked Pork, Cooked Pork Dinner, Lumpy Soup, Mixed Meat Scraps, Potion of Endowment
    • Crafted at Firebowl Cauldron
  • Specialist Brewing I. Located in the northwestern part of Exiled Lands, near the Den.
    • Teaches Phykos Rum, Honeyed Wine, Absinthe
    • Crafted at Fermentation Barrel
  • Specialist Brewing II. Located in the central part of Scrublands, near the Cursed Mound.
    • Teaches Resin Wine, Firewater, Shroom Beer
    • Crafted at Fermentation Barrel
  • Relic Hunter Banners. Located in the central part of the Savanna Grass biome, at the Waterside.
    • Teaches Relic Hunter Banner
    • Crafted at Artisan's Worktable
  • Relic Hunter Armor (Epic). Located in the central part of the Savanna Grass biome, at the Southlake.
    • Teaches Relic Hunter Shirt, Relic Hunter Turban, Relic Hunter Gloves, Relic Hunter Trousers, Relic Hunter Boots
    • Crafted at Armorer's Bench
  • Dogs of the Desert Banners. Located in the northwestern part of Exiled Lands, at the Den.
    • Teaches Dogs of the Desert Banner
    • Crafted at Artisan's Worktable
  • Black Hand Banners. Located in the northeastern part of Exiled Lands, at the Black Galleon.
    • Teaches Black Hand Banner
    • Crafted at Artisan's Worktable
  • Hyena-Fur Armor (Epic). Located in the northeastern part of Exiled Lands, at the Scoundrel's Gateway.
    • Teaches Hyena-fur Chestpiece, Hyena Skull Helmet, Hyena-fur Gloves, Hyena-fur Wrap, Hyena-fur Boots
    • Crafted at Improved Armorer's Bench
  • Skulltaker. Located in the central part of the Exiled Lands, near The Summoning Place.
    • Teaches Impaled Skull
    • Crafted at Artisan's Worktable
  • Darfari Banners. Located in the south of the Savanna Grass, near the Skulker's End.
    • Teaches Darfari Banner
    • Crafted at Artisan's Worktable
  • Buccaneer. Located in the northeastern part of the Jungle, at the Buccaneer Bay.
    • Teaches Buccaneer Peg Leg (Left Fitting), Black Hand Boots, Eye Patch, Black Hand Earrings, Buccaneer Peg Leg (Right Fitting)
    • Crafted at Carpenter's Bench


That's it for all the exclusive unlockable recipe locations, and for other Conan Exiles guides at GameSkinny, check out the links below:

Rake Monster Hunter Guide for Beginners Fri, 11 May 2018 14:48:10 -0400 Ty Arthur

It's man versus beast out in the backwoods -- but without having to leave the comfort of your phone screen with Rake Monster Hunter! Think you have what it takes to kill the beast before he tears you to shreds? As many new players are discovering, that's easier said than done.

Once you have the basics down and figure out how to navigate the woods and use your inventory, there's a surprisingly simple method that always works for finding and taking down Rake with minimum effort. Read on if you want to be a successful monster hunter and not a midnight snack!

Rake Monster Hunter Beginner's Tips

First and foremost, given where the shoot button is positioned on the screen, it is unbelievably easy to accidentally fire the shotgun as you turn to look around.

Your hunter only gets two shots before having to reload his gun -- so you always want both shots available whenever Rake appears. To avoid this issue, keep your right thumb a bit higher or over to the side than normal. 

When the game starts, make sure to pick up all the tent freebies in the corners to max out your held traps, ammo, lights, and cameras. These are pretty hard to see in the tent, so turn on your flashlight with the button in the lower-right corner of the screen.

After leaving the tent to begin the search, set up cameras to check different areas so you don't have to always trudge back and forth, and be wary of a roar off in the distance, indicating Rake is approaching.

 Make sure to grab the traps before leaving the tent!

Finding and Hunting Rake (The Easy Way)

If you just want to see Rake and not spend forever tromping through the forest to unlock the higher difficulties (with ads going off every two minutes along the way), your best bet is to find a defensible position with your back to an obstacle (like a tree, cliff face, or the lake).

Laying down 4-5 meat guarantees Rake will come roaring through the woods at you very quickly, so you can use this mechanic to your advantage by taking up a defensible position and then laying down all your bear traps at once.

There's a hitch here, though -- the game has a minimum distance to the tent before traps can be deployed, so you can't use the side of the tent as your defensive wall. Instead, your best bet is to head forward from the tent a couple hundred yards, then turn left to see the lake.

The water acts as a natural barrier, and Rake never approaches from the water, so this giant body of water can actually work better as your barrier than trying to use trees that Rake might move around.

With your back to the water, drop down all five traps in a semicircle around you, then lay all five meat in-between the dropped traps. Now you just play the waiting game. Assuming Rake hasn't glitched out and gotten stuck in the ground, he normally appears within 10 to 90 seconds after all five meat have been placed on the ground.

With your shotgun aimed out and the traps between you and Rake, taking him down isn't that hard. Reposition as necessary to get him to hit all five traps while you reload your shotgun, and voilà -- one dead monster. Be careful when you move out of range of his claws, though, as you can actually damage yourself walking on your own traps!

 With your back to the lake, arrange the traps and meat in a ring around you

Have you found any other Rake Monster Hunter strategies that work well? Let us know how you brought down the beast in the comments section below!

The Complete PUBG Sanhok Guide Fri, 11 May 2018 10:59:02 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest new map for PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds is the same Savage map you could try out on the Test Server, but the new and upgraded one has been renamed to Sanhok, and it is now available on the dedicated Experimental Server.

Every owner of PUBG has the chance to play the new map, which has been significantly remodeled with several new locations, upgrades to old locations, and new names for many of them.

Follow the guide below for all the information on the newest 4x4 map in PUBG -- Sanhok.

Four New Locations


Located in the southern part of the larger island, the new cave system has a giant crater that's wide open for parachute landing, with a pool of water on the bottom and two corridors that serve as left and right exits out of the cave. The loot isn't particularly good in the cave, but the possibilities for sneak attacks are limitless.


Tambang is located in the westernmost part of the map and is a great landing spot if you want to get safely into the Ruins (formerly known as Swamp Temple). It is the closest spot that has loot inside the houses, which you can use before venturing into more dangerous territories.


This location can be found on the easternmost part of the map, not far away from Camp Bravo. Lakawi, just like Tambang, mainly serves to give players a good landing spot and time to gather some loot before going into the hotter spots.

Na Kham

If you played on the Savage map, then you should be familiar with Na Kham, which is basically a remodeled Logging Camp. Previously located on the southern island, it is now found in the southwestern part of the Sanhok map, right next to Sahmee (formerly known as Commerce).

Locations With Changed Names

Bluehole Studios also changed the names of most locations on the new Sanhok map. If you played the Savage map before, you will find that the locations are the same, but they are now called something else.

Below you will find the complete list of these changed names: 

Abandoned Resort Paradise Resort
Manufacturing Ha Tinh
Logging Camp Tat Mok
Coastal Khao
Coconut Farm Mongnai
Training Center Bootcamp
Bootcamp Alpha Camp Alpha
Bootcamp Charlie Camp Charlie
Bootcamp Bravo Camp Bravo
Swamp Temple Ruins
River Town Pai Nan
Commerce Sahmee
Beach Ban Tai
Dock Docks
Rice Farming Town Kampong
Banyan Grove Bhan


Here is the complete list of old locations that have been redesigned and upgraded:

  • Bhan (formerly known as Banyan Grove) -- located in the middle of the island
  • Ruins (formerly known as Swamp Temple) -- located on the west side of the island
  • Quarry -- located near the middle of the island
  • Docks -- located on the southeast side of the island
  • Mongnai (formerly known as Coconut Farm) -- located at the northeast side of the island
  • Bootcamp (formerly known as Training Center) -- located in the middle of the island
  • Paradise Resort (formerly known as Abandoned Resort) -- located on the northeast side of the island

All these locations looked completely unfinished on the Savage map, but now you can see them in their full glory on the Sanhok map.

Other Changes

Assault Rifles

ARs have quickly become the most sought-out weapons in PUBG. Unsurprisingly, they are extremely effective on almost all types of ranges, which is why Bluehole changed the AR spawn algorithm and locations.

Specifically, the developers increased the spawn ratio of the M16A4 and AKM. Both are highly reliable types of ARs.


Holographic scopes are now more precise. The changes were made to the size of the reticle, which is now equal to the size of a full human body from a distance of 100 meters. You can now headshot other players with real precision.

Red zones

Red zones will now appear more often inside the play zone, which automatically makes things a lot more dangerous. This change was made to completely remove the chance of red zones appearing inside the safe zone.


With the introduction of the new Cave location on the Sanhok map, you can now be sure to grab a vehicle nearby. Cave has become the hotspot for Aquarails and Motorbikes, so keep an eye out on this specific location.


These are all the changes that have been implemented on the new Sanhok map, and for other PUBG guides at GameSkinny, please visit the links below:

Pillars of Eternity 2 Console Commands Cheat Sheet Thu, 10 May 2018 14:49:16 -0400 Ty Arthur

If you recall the days of inputting endless console commands into the Baldur's Gate series to find every last weapon and item in the game, then prepare yourself for a major rush of nostalgia with the classic Infinity Engine style on display with Pillars of Eternity 2.

Besides the same iconic visual style and real-time-with-pause combat you've come to expect, this sequel to the Kickstarter smash hit also includes a host of console command cheats to lower the difficulty, acquire items without spending any coins, or increase your skills to pass dialogue checks.

Below we cover how to turn on the console command feature, along with all commands currently known.

IMPORTANT: Turning on the Pillars of Eternity 2 cheat engine will disable achievements for that playthrough! Even if you turn cheats off again, achievements will remain disabled for that save game. Sure, you will be able to cheese your way through all the combat scenarios, have infinite money, and craft any object without materials, but you won't actually unlock any Steam achievements along the way, so it's a major trade-off.

Pillars of Eternity 2 Console Commands Cheat Engine List

The console commands this time around are very similar in structure to both of Obsidian's previous RPGs -- Tyranny and the first Pillars of Eternity -- so you may recognize a lot of these commands if you've played the developer's other games.

To access the command console section to enter debug mode, hit the ~ key (the tilde key next to the 1 on U.S. keyboards) and then type iroll20s. Hit enter to start the Pillars 2 cheat engine.

From there, enter any of these commands below, and hit enter again to get the desired cheat:

  • UnlockAll: Unlocks all locked chests and doors in the area (note that it still counts as stealing to take from them, so go into stealth mode if you don't want to get attacked)
  • UnlockBestiary: Gives you all entries in your bestiary without having to fight the corresponding monsters
  • Cosmic Bird: places the secret Cosmic Bird pet into the player's inventory
  • Cosmic Cat: places the secret Cosmic Cat pet into the player's inventory
  • Cosmic Dog: places the secret Cosmic Dog pet into the player's inventory
  • CraftingDebug: Gives the player a large quantity of crafting material for making most recipes
  • Comapnion AddRelationship sourceGuid targetGuid axis strengthGuid onlyInParty: This long, complicated string changes the relationship status between two party members, but we're still working out the exact syntax on how it functions
  • FreeRecipesToggle: Allows you to craft any recipe without needing the ingredients
  • GiveItem (Item Name): Places the item specified directly in the player's inventory
  • GivePlayerMoney #: Gives you the specified amount of money
  • AddExperience #: Adds the amount of experience input to each party member
  • AddExperienceToLevel #: Raises each party member's level to the number input
  • AttributeScore (Player Name) (Attribute Name) #: Raises the attribute specified for the player specified by the number input
  • God: Turns invincible God mode on and off
  • HealParty: Heals the entire party and replenishes their stamina
  • Invisible: Makes the party invisible to enemies for ultimate stealth
  • NoFog: Removes the fog that obscures unexplored locations
  • Rest: Forces rest instantly in any area
  • Skill (Player Name) (Skill Name) #: Increases the specified skill for the specified player by the amount in the number slot
  • ToggleSpellLimit: Allows characters to cast spells without any limit

If you are going to face a giant god made out of living adra, you probably want a few cheats to help out first

It's possible there are other console commands that haven't been discovered by players yet to get more pets or access more cheats. Have you found any other Pillars 2 console commands that work? Let us know, and we'll get them added to the list!

Be sure to check out our other Pillars of Eternity 2 guides below as you get started exploring the Deadfire Archipelago with or without cheats:

Sdorica Beginner's Tips Guide - From Resonating to Combat! Thu, 10 May 2018 14:23:35 -0400 Ashley Gill

I like to think of Sdorica as a gacha game for people burned out on gacha games, but better. I'm just going to assume you know what that means, and chances are you do if you're a fan of Japanese-style mobile RPGs. Gachas are pretty cancerous.

Sdorica's gacha system is beyond fair, but that isn't the draw of the game. The real draws lie in its wombo combo of great music, beautiful aesthetics (not A E S T H E T I C S, this isn't vaporwave), surprisingly deep battle system, and team building. It's a fairly effective combo. I've been having a lot of trouble putting it down.

There's no need for me to gush about the game, this isn't a review. It's great, an easy A+ on the mobile market. But you're here for a guide, and dang it, I'll give you one.

We're going to go over a number of pieces of advice for newer Sdorica players. It's certainly not everything that should be touched on, but it should stand as a good groundwork for your blossoming orb-matching and party building skills.

General Tips and Advice

We're going to start a little simple here and work our way up!

Keep an eye on your limited missions

Though most limited missions are event-tied and give you ample time to complete them, a handful are only available for a single day and can be completed daily until they are rotated for a different set.

At the time of writing, the daily limited quests can grant a large chunk of Soul Energy, Currens, Bequeather Scrolls, and even a Region Material Chest. These are all worth the short effort it takes to complete these quests.

What is 9 p.m. UTC in your timezone?

Events, missions, and a few other things reset at 9 p.m. UTC each day. It's helpful to know what time that is in your timezone:

  • 9 p.m. UTC = 5 p.m. EST (North America)
  • 9 p.m. UTC = 2 p.m. PST (North America)
  • 9 p.m. UTC = 9 p.m. GMT (UK)
  • 9 p.m. UTC = 10 p.m. CET (Europe)
When should you infuse (pull)?

It's still weird saying "infuse" instead of "pull," but a pull is a pull no matter how the developers want to label it.

If you've played any other gacha game and have any semblance of self-control, then you saved the currency you used to pull until a special banner (pull event) came up. The same applies here in Sdorica.

There are two big pieces of advice I can give you on pulling:

  • Only do full 10 pulls for 500 Crystals to get at least one SR
  • Only pull during special banners

Rarities and their corresponding colors

Why? Because you need SRs (super rare) and SSRs (super super rare). You are guaranteed one SR with a 10 pull, and special banners have a higher SR/SSR pull rate. There are also characters exclusive to special banners.

It's hard to hold off, but crystals are hard to come by. It's better to wait.

Can you be competitive without rerolling?

If you look around the Sdorica community, it's hard to get an answer out of it on which characters are the best. But if you ask whether you should reroll, a fair number will say yes. Why is that? Wonderland Trials.

The current "endgame" lies in the Wonderland Trials, where players are ranked based on how well they handled the stage. Some characters are definitely better for this than others, and many players will tell you to reroll until you get a Sharice or Lisa or what have you.

Do you have to reroll? No, you certainly do not. If you're looking to be competitive in Wonderland Trials later on and you know what you've gotten so far is sub-par for that task, you may want to consider it.

The fact is, every character is viable in its own way (except Sherlock -- who even knows about that guy?). A character's strength lies in its ability to play well with the others in the party and counter the enemies within the stage you're on.

It's not the rank, it's the character

Being able to pull the same character in different rarities is getting more common in mobile RPGs, and it is one facet of Sdorica that can easily be said to be a double-edged sword.

You can pull a character you've been wanting for a long time, but if they pop out as R (rare), you may find yourself wishing you'd gotten something else. It can take a lot of time to get a character from those low ranks up to even SR if you don't get lucky with further pulls and get their Minerals.

This makes it so there is no actual indication for which characters are actually common and which are rare. You can assume some are common if you get them repeatedly (Hestia, please go), but there is no other way to tell what a character's true rarity is in-game.

This is why it's so important to only do 10 pulls, and to only do them on special banners. You want strong characters, but they need to come out at a rarity at which they are actually useful to save you a headache and a whole lot of grind.

Don't resonate randomly

Lio's SSR resonation materialsYes, getting some characters to SR and SSR is important, but not every one of your characters is prime for it. Materials for SR and SSR resonation require luck or once-a-week grinding to get, making them rare and valuable.

You have to think about the synergies of the characters you currently have when they are at SSR -- and that may be thinking far ahead.

How your parties do in battle doesn't have as much to do with their level and rarity as it does their synergy with one another.

As characters get up to SR and SSR, their skills get amped up with additional effects, which ideally will synergize with at least one of the other characters in your party or have significant negative impact (damage reduction, enhance removal, heavy damage) on enemies.

Here are how many materials you need to resonate a character at every tier:

  • N to R: 1 Tear of Valiant Warrior, 2 miscellaneous materials of the same tier, 6 Soul Energy of the same tier and color, 4 Minerals
  • R to SR: 1 Tear of Dragon Slayer, 6 miscellaneous materials of the same tier, 12 Soul Energy of the same tier and color, 15 Minerals
  • SR to SSR: 1 Tear of Ancient Dragon, 6 miscellaneous materials of the same tier, 24 Soul Energy of the same tier and color, and 30 Minerals

"Miscellaneous materials" are those like the tree branches and candelabrums you get from daily material quests.

With this in mind, you should plan your material use carefully. Don't resonate to SSR willy-nilly, so you don't find yourself in a position where you can't resonate someone you actually want to just because you got impatient and wanted any SSR you could get.

One free SSR: Tica

You may want to take the time to finish the Training Venture Quests if you want a strong SSR sooner rather than later.

These quests take some time as a whole, but they teach you how to "git gud" and have the added benefit of granting you the materials to get Pang, Tica, and Naya up to SR. But you want an SSR, right?

Hoisting Tica up from SR to SSR is actually very easy, comparative to every other character.

  • Complete every Training Venture Quest
  • Resonate Tica to SR
  • Go to the Progress tab of the Mission menu
  • Find the mission that grants you a Tica Mineral for completing stage R3-5
  • Complete it and the following missions for the remaining Tica Minerals

As an added note, Pang, Tica, and Naya are all strong characters. Tica herself is quite nice and worth going through the effort of resonating, but Pang is considered one of the best characters in the game at the time of writing. This is due to his durability and extreme damage at SSR.

How to get some characters' Minerals

You primarily get a character's Minerals via getting them in infusions, but there is one option some characters have that others don't. That option? Character Storyline quests.

Not every character has Storyline quests, but those that do can get up to 11 Minerals for that character.

As of right now (May 10, 2018), you can get Minerals for the following characters via following quests. Do keep in mind, though, a number of them do not open until you complete prerequisite Story (not Storyline) quests:

  • Dagger: 10 Minerals
  • Crushfang: 10 Minerals
  • Golemwalt: 11 Minerals
  • Naya: 10 Minerals
  • Angelia: 10 Minerals
  • Theodore: 10 Minerals
  • Jahan: 11 Minerals

You probably won't be able to get all of these at once, but it's good to know these are available.

In order to access these quests, you must have the character in question and then tap on the "Character Storyline" button at the top of their info screen.

Combat Tips & Advice

Whew, we're finally out of the "general" section! I don't have much to say in the way of full-on combat advice because I mostly run Jahan-oriented parties. No one cares about Jahan. Heck, you probably don't run Jahan, and I don't know if I'd even recommend it.

The above said, there are a few pieces of new player-oriented advice that may help you if you find yourself having trouble with combat.

Always check enemy parameters when a fight starts

Starting with the simplest here. Enemy parameters, both their HP/armor and their passive abilities, are must-have information to navigate a fight properly.

This is the shortest mini-section in this section, but it is important enough to highlight. Ignoring enemy passives in particular will get you killed, and checking enemy HP and your skill damage will let you use the appropriate skills for the situation.

Buffs/debuffs are absolutely killer

In my first week playing Sdorica, I really didn't pay as much attention to status effects as much as I should have. But once it all clicked, they may as well have become the name of the game. "Status Effects: The RPG" isn't a very catchy title, though.

I really cannot stress enough how powerful three stacks of any buff or debuff can be. Enhance, Vulnerability, Exhaust, Tear, Vigilance, Regen, Poison, you name it. Three stacks of any of these statuses is an immense help or detractor to whatever character, friend or foe, they are on.

Yan-Bo's 2o

Typical effects, like Enhance, Vulnerability, Exhaust, Tear, and Vigilance, stack up to 90% with three stacks. That's right: 90%. That's crazy.

Effects that deal directly with HP, like Regen and Poison, stack up to 30% of total HP per turn, which is also significant.

Making good use of these effects, in particular those listed as typical, is absolutely critical to both surviving and dealing as much damage as possible. It becomes necessary at a certain point and is a huge part of party building.

Usually health > armor, but ...

... not always.

As you well know, true damage pierces armor and goes straight for your health. Some stages have enemies that do true damage, some don't. There's no shame in entering a stage, seeing what types of enemies you're up against, and then leaving to come back in with more suitable characters.

There are some characters that have passives or skills that rely on armor rather than health, there are some stages where you need AoE protection, and there are other stages where enemies will attack more often if their target isn't armored. These are examples of instances where armor is preferable over health.

Of course, it really boils down to the way you want to play. There is no harm in running an armor support over a health support most of the time, and the poster child for armor-granting supports, Angelia, is absolutely crucial to certain compositions.

The importance of target selection

The game tries to teach you how important target selection is via the Training Venture Quests, but it's easy to forget. Choosing targets manually is heckin' important.

There are a lot of situations where there are simply enemies you don't want to attack or enemies you want to target over the others. If you're struggling with a lot of stages, it's either because your party composition isn't up to par or you're not making the right targeting selections.

Each character can only use skills on enemies in certain positions -- though some can hit the selected target. It's imperative that you pay attention to which enemies a character can hit when building your party.

Most gold-slot characters have at least one skill that can only hit the front enemy and that's it, but black-slot characters tend to have more variety in that regard.

For instance, Fatima has skills to attack enemies in the front, back, at the lowest health, or even the selected target. For comparison, Ned's damage is highest when he's under Rant Rave and attacks a random target; and Yan-Bo's 2 orb is tied to either attacking the front enemy or all non-front enemies, depending on his stance.

Ned's 2o

It's not hard to figure out why targeting is so important. Figuring it all out is simple, even. Building a team to cope with it -- not so much.

Past all of the above, choosing a target enemy has one other function:

Tank characters who counterattack will attack the enemy you have selected, rather than the one in the frontline.

This can be a little tricky at times, but if you're running a gold-slot who retaliates, like Karnulla or Jahan, you can make optimal use of their counterattacks by choosing who they whomp on.

You must choose your target before you make your turn and the enemies attack to make this work, but you can change your target between counterattacks if you're quick about it. That's right: You can make multiple counterattacks hit different enemies in a single turn. There are definitely some stages where this is warranted.

Enemy turn order and you

This is one thing that seems important, but newer players don't seem to put as much emphasis on it as necessary.

Enemy turn order will dictate when you use pretty much any skill past the first couple of turns. You have to balance mitigating, healing, and dealing damage throughout a fight, and your opportunities to do so are tied to enemy turns.

There are also a number of skills where it's best to use them right before an enemy attacks. These can be taunts, damage reduction, dodge chance, or what have you. Stuns, such as Yan-Bo's 4 orb skill, are also best done on the turn an enemy is set to attack so their turn counter is reset.

Much of Sdorica's combat boils down to proper targeting and using skills at appropriate times, which makes watching enemy turn timers tick down a key component to doing well in harder stages and characters like Puggi (who increases enemy CDs) actually viable.

A large portion of the advice given in this guide is geared towards newer players and doesn't touch on many of the game's intricacies, of which there are more than you may think. Currently I am working on a character synergies and party composition guide to help those struggling with building reliable teams.

My last bit of advice here is to make sure you are flexible. The game is developed with players using multiple parties in mind, and you have to do it. You have no choice but to work up multiple parties for different situations, and that's a good thing. We'll get into all that in the next guide. For now, thank you for reading. I hope this has been helpful to some degree and that you are having fun plowing through the challenges Sdorica has to offer!

MTG Arena Dominaria Drafting Guide: Best Limited Archetypes Thu, 10 May 2018 10:47:08 -0400 Sergey_3847

MTG Arena, a new digital product based on Magic: The Gathering, has recently launched Dominaria as its latest set of cards, and players will be able to test it out in Drafting Leagues starting on May 11. You will get the chance to draft a deck of 40 cards and win various rewards depending on your win rate.

Dominaria includes 269 new cards that offer a lot of maneuverability in terms of archetypes that you choose to play. This guide will cover the most effective color pairs that you should be looking for when drafting in Dominaria limited events.

Blue-Red Wizards


The most exciting color pairing in the current set is blue-red. The synergy that Wizards create together can easily dominate almost any kind of match-up. The power of counter spells, such as Wizard's Retort, and burn spells, such as Wizard's Lightning, will leave no chance for your opponents.

Here are the main blue and red Wizards you need to draft for this pairing to work:

  • Naban, Dean of Iteration
  • Naru Meha, Master Wizard
  • Adeliz, the Cinder Wind
  • Academy Journeymage
  • Merfolk Trickster
  • Firefist Adept
  • Ghitu Journeymage

Combine your non-creature spells with Naban to deal twice as much damage, and then push Naru Meha and Adeliz to buff up your other Wizards. Also, don't neglect simpler cards like Tolarian Scholar. Although it may not do much on its own, in this type of deck, it will work like a charm.

White-Black Knights


White-black is another pair that has a huge potential. History of Benalia, a new Saga card, is especially interesting in this type of deck. If you can draft it, then you will surely win, especially if you have Call the Cavalry, which summons two more knights. As a result, you will have 16 points of damage just from these two cards.

The rest of your deck should contain the following knight creatures:

  • Aryel, Knight of Windgrace
  • Danitha Capashen, Paragon
  • Benalish Marshal
  • Knight of Grace
  • Knight of Malice

The last two white and black knights work especially well together. They give each other +1 attack and First Strike. If you can add Kwende, Pride of Femeref to the combination, then they will also have Double Strike, and that's a sure win.

Red-Green Elves


Since the return of Llanovar Elves and the introduction of Song of Freyalise, you can start churning out big creatures with great ease. For example, such beasts as Steel Leaf Champion or Thorn Elemental can be pushed a couple of turns earlier. But there's a lot more when it comes to ramp archetypes in Dominaria drafts, which synergize with the old Kicker mechanic pretty well.

Here are the main spells you need to have in order to push your big threats early on:

  • Elfhame Druid
  • Llanowar Elves
  • Llanowar Scout
  • Marwyn, the Nurturer
  • Hallar, the Firefletcher
  • Song of Freyalise

When you have your ramp ready, you can start churning out your kicked red and green creatures, such as:

  • Baloth Gorger
  • Grunn, the Lonely King
  • Untamed Kavu
  • Keldon Overseer
  • Skizzik
  • Verix Bladewing

White-Blue Flash


Currently, white-blue pair is probably the strongest archetype, considering all the neat things you can do with it. However, if you have very few historic spells in your deck, it may be a bit hard to accomplish anything.

So here is a list of white and blue historic spells you ought to have in your white-blue deck:

  • Raff Capashen, Ship's Mage
  • Teferi, Hero of Dominaria
  • Lyra Dawnbringer
  • On Serra's Wings
  • Shalai, Voice of Plenty
  • In Bolas's Clutches
  • Karn's Temporal Sundering
  • Time of Ice
  • Zahid, Djinn of the Lamp

On the other hand, it can be hard to draft so many rare cards, so you can focus on drawing artifacts instead, and combine them with more common white and blue spells, such as these:

  • D'Avenant Trapper
  • Serra Disciple
  • Artificer's Assistant
  • Relic Runner
  • Sage of Lat-Nam

Black-Green Tokens


Saprolings are everywhere! These little green tokens can take over any game in the blink of an eye. The best way to spawn these little creatures is to draft black and green Fungus creatures that create and buff Saproling tokens.

Here are the cards that will provide you with the best synergies for black-green token decks:

  • Slimefoot, the Stowaway
  • Sporecrown Thallid
  • Deathbloom Thallid
  • Thallid Omnivore
  • Yavimaya Sapherd
  • Thallid Soothsayer

But this list is not limited by Fungus creatures only. There are also a few really good spells that will fit the bill just right:

  • Fungal Infection
  • Vicious Offering
  • Fungal Plots
  • Saproling Migration
  • Spore Swarm


With the help of these five deck archetypes, you will be able to consistently win one game after another and earn high rewards. For other Magic: The Gathering guides at GameSkinny, visit the links below:

Total War Saga: Thrones of Britannia Beginner Tips and Tricks Wed, 09 May 2018 10:45:19 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest addition to the Total War series of games is out on Steam. Total War Saga: Thrones of Britannia throws you right into the heart of the events taking place in the 9th century AD during the war between Vikings and British kingdoms.

The game offers no tutorials, so it will be really hard for new players to understand all the ins and outs of this complex strategy game. The veteran players may have a few questions as well, since Creative Assembly changed some of the mechanics.

In any case, follow the beginner's guide below for all the essential tips and tricks on Total War Saga: Thrones of Britannia.

Keep Your Food Supply in Check

One of the new mechanics added to Thrones of Britannia is the Abundant Food mechanic. It basically stacks up food for your army and population. Each unit has a food upkeep that serves as the food provider. The more units you have, the more food you will have to supply.

This means that you need to constantly check your Abundant Food indicator on the top menu. If your food supply goes into negative numbers, your army will get significantly weaker. Apart from units, some of your buildings will also need a food upkeep, such as Royal Court, for example.

If you have trouble replenishing your food supplies with your own farms, then you can send a few units to capture enemy farms and fisheries. Those are usually located in small villages, so there should be no trouble with this whatsoever.

Think Twice Before Recruiting Units

A number of huge changes can be seen in the recruitment mechanic as well. Now you can't just recruit units and disband them as you wish. A careless attitude towards your units will decrease your pool and make your game insufferable.

This means that when you disband units, they don't simply return to the pool anymore. However, unit replenishment is possible, but it depends on the buildings in your settlement. The chance of replenishment depends on the technologies you have.

Additionally, there is a replenishment cap, meaning that you can't have units stack up as much as possible. This number is very much limited, so you need to be very careful when recruiting new units.

Unlock Civic and Military Technologies

Technologies play a huge role in Thrones of Brittania. There are two types of tech trees in the game: Civic and Military. The Civic tree improves and unlocks new types of buildings and gives various bonuses, while the Military tree upgrades your units, recruitment, replenishment, etc.

You need to develop both of these trees to be able to sustain both public order and a strong army. Here are the necessary prerequisites to unlocking the technologies in Thrones of Brittania.

Civic Technologies

In order to unlock any of the Civic technologies, you need to build, upgrade, or conquer the highest-level buildings in the following chains:

  • Agriculture: Granary or Souterrain
  • Industry: Forge or Stadfordscir Blacksmith
  • Military Support: Garrison
  • Leadership: Moot Hill or Law or Thing
  • Trade: Market Hall
  • Community: Monastery
Military Technologies
  • Melee Units: Recruit 10 sword and/or axe infantry units.
  • Spearmen Units: Recruit 10 spearmen units.
  • Missile Units: Recruit 10 bow, crossbow, and/or skirmisher units.
  • Siege Warfare: Win 5 siege battles.
  • Cavalry Units: Recruit 10 cavalry units.
  • Military Prestige: Raise a General to Rank 10.
  • Bodyguards & Companions: Attack another army 10 times.
  • Recruitment:
    • Infantry Logistics: Research Warrior Society
    • Spearband Logistics: Research Traditions of the Spear
    • Bowmen & Javelinmen Logistics: Research Hunter Society
    • Cavalrymen Logistics: Research Horse-Warrior Traditions

How to Deal With Loyalty

You need to regularly check the loyalty index of your governors and generals. If you see that the loyalty counter is approaching zero, then you need to take measures immediately. The best way is to use the Secure Loyalty action, which costs some money. If you don't have enough, then you need to get rid of that character.

If you do so, the rebellious general/governor will spawn a small army, which you can easily subdue. This will automatically increase the loyalty of your other governors and generals. If you want to prevent this from happening, then you can simply assassinate the rebellious character.

Also, don't underestimate the influence of the wife on your small rulers. They can decrease the levels of loyalty just as much as increase them. In this case, you can pay money and force them to divorce.

How to Transfer Estates

One more thing you can do to increase loyalty is to give your vassals estates. This will not only increase their level of loyalty to you but also make them more jealous. So if you've assigned new estates, don't take them back.

Follow these steps if you want to transfer an estate to one of your vassals:

  1. Go to the Faction tab.
  2. On the upper right, go to Governors and Generals.
  3. On the left, choose the Estates tab.
  4. Click on it to open up a map of your current estates.
  5. Some of the estates have a golden crown icon above them. These crowns indicate estates that you can gift.
  6. Drag the golden crown to one of your governor's or general's portraits.
  7. Confirm the transfer.

How to Win With the Help of Fame

If you like to work with Diplomacy and gain a significant amount of influence, you can win the game through fame. Fame can be increased throughout a game by constructing buildings and unlocking technologies (see above).

The higher the level your buildings are and the more technologies you unlock, the higher your chance of winning through Fame. However, choosing the right faction is especially important.

For example, the Welsh factions are especially well suited for taking advantage of the Fame victory condition. They possess a special faction mechanic -- Heroism, which can provide bonuses to their faction leader’s influence.

Below you will find the list of buildings that can significantly increase your fame:

  • Bard building chain (Gwined and Strat Clut)
  • Hogback building chain (Guvan)
  • St Dewi chain and other Saints (Menevia)

As for technologies, the most important ones in this case are the Civic technologies, so focus on them.

Military Tactics for All Types of Battles

There are five types of battles in Thrones of Brittania: Field Battle, Minor Settlement Battle, Siege Battle, Amphibious Battle, and Naval Battle. Below you will find optimal suggestions for each of these types of battles.

Field Battle

Battles on the open fields or forests are the most common types of battles in Thrones of Brittania. Here, the best tactic would be to pin down the enemy units with your heavily armored and well-armed melee units. When the enemy tries to leave the battlefield, you send in your cavalry from the rear and finish them off.

Minor Settlement Battle

If you don't protect your villages and farms, then they will become an easy target for enemy units. This means that you simply ought to put at least a couple of melee and ranged units inside your minor settlements. Position yourself inside the houses, which will serve as a perfect defense and shooting range for your archers.

Siege Battle

This type of battle revolves around besieging a major settlement. Depending on which side you are on, you need to take into account two points. First, if you want to attack the settlement, you must always and under all circumstances deal with the defense towers, as they will keep hammering your units. Secondly, if you find yourself on the defensive side, then bring out some of your units outside the settlement and attack your enemies from the rear.

Amphibious Battle

Here you will try to besiege a major port. You need to land your ships on the beach and attack the walls of the port. But the rest of the battle plays out in practically the same way as the Besiege Battle.

Naval Battle

In this case, you can try and capture or sink an enemy's ship. The best way to sink an enemy's ship is to use archers with fire arrows that can easily take another ship down from a distance. Otherwise, you will need to get really close to each other and fight using melee units.

Diplomacy Is Your Ultimate Tool

Taking into consideration everything that was mentioned above, even with all the best units, technologies, and governors, if you have no idea how to maintain your diplomatic relations, the game will go nowhere for you.

You need to be fully aware of the status of your kingdom in the given campaign, such as Trustworthiness, Strength ranking, and Fame. If you have too many enemies and no significant alliances, then you will probably have trouble winning.

So learn as much as you can about your position, and start making necessary changes.

Military Alliances

Alliances can be very useful, especially with strong factions. However, this can also turn out to be rather risky. For example, one of your allies can drag you in a completely unwanted war and create more enemies. This can decrease the level of your Fame and Trustworthiness.

On the other hand, if you get into trouble and one of your allies decides to help you, there is a big chance that your stats will only grow stronger. So it's a double-edged sword, and you should decide how to invest your time and resources.

Pacts and Declarations

Friendship declarations can be sent to you by other factions, and you can actually make money by doing so. In the end, if they want to have you as their ally, they will have to comply and give up that precious gold.

Of course, they can reject your demand, but on the other hand, if they pay, it's a win-win situation. The best way to find good allies and sign common pacts is through factions that have common friends and enemies.

And if you really want to make a lot of money through declarations, then find a ruler who has a lot of enemies, and offer them a friendship in exchange for a lot of gold. They will most likely agree, as the situation is desperate.

Best Factions for Beginners

There are 10 different factions in Thrones of Brittania as of now. Each faction has its own unique mechanics, so it's good to know which ones will fit your playstyle the best. Here are the three strongest factions to begin with:


This faction belongs to Gaels, and your main job here is to unite Ireland. This faction's unique mechanic is Legitimacy, which allows you to annex other factions and protect your vassals from foreign attacks.

The higher your Legitimacy level is, the more chance you have to annex other factions and thus unite all on one Irish land.

West Seaxe

The unique mechanic of this faction is called Witan. It refers to the amount of levies you can field, meaning that you will have great bonuses to your food production, taxes, and overall happiness of the populace.

At one point, you will have to choose which way you want to go with this faction: either get a good army, or sustain economical growth. In any case, the more settlements you have, the better it will be for your governors and generals alike.

If you manage to balance your economy with military needs, you will have an upper hand in all aspects of the game.


Hoards is the mechanic of the Mierce faction that lets you deal with treasury. You can share its abundance with your army or the nobles in order to maintain order in the upper echelons of the society.

Otherwise, you could share it among townspeople and bring social order on that level. In any case, when you have so much money, you can do whatever fits your bill.


That is all you need to know to start playing Total War Saga: Thrones of Britannia, but be sure to come back soon for more guides here at GameSkinny!

Fortnite Challenge Guide: Search between a Scarecrow, Pink Hotrod, and a Big Screen Tue, 08 May 2018 14:40:44 -0400 Ty Arthur

Following last week's Fortnite challenge to search for a Tomato Town treasure map, we're again off on a scavenger hunt. This time, we're looking for a map location found between a scarecrow, a pink hotrod, and a big screen.

Scratching your head wondering just where that odd spot is supposed to be on the Battle Royale map? Don't worry, we've already discovered the exact location for you.

Read on for the exact locations.  

A player glides toward trees near the drive-in theater  Finding the Scarecrow Big Screen search location
(thanks to HarryNinetyFour for the screenshot)

Where to Find the Week 2 Battle Star

The "big screen" mentioned in the challenge notes is clearly a reference to the new destroyed drive-in movie theater over at Risky Reels (which just happens to be the best new Fortnite landing zone around).

The pink hot rod is north of the screen, while the scarecrow is to the east at a rocky outcrop area. Your best landing spot is on the hill just to the side and below the Risky Reels walled-out off section. 

When you get close enough to the exact "search between a scarecrow" location (marked on the map below), the battle star will spawn on the hilltop.

Be careful landing here, though, as it's likely dozens of other players will also be completing the challenge at the same time you are.

It can be a much better strategy to land either east or west of Risky Reels, wait for everyone to kill each other, then swoop in for the battle star and the loot left behind.

 Search between a Scarecrow Week 2 landing location

Still getting a handle on all the Season 4 changes to the Battle Royale map? Check out our other latest Fortnite guides here:

Fortnite Season 4 Week 2 Camera Locations Guide Tue, 08 May 2018 14:31:08 -0400 Ty Arthur

Season 4, Week 2 of Fortnite rolls out with the epic, limited-time Thanos Mode event that allows one lucky player to take on the role of the cosmic villain himself! For the rest of us Battle Pass plebs who aren't busy searching for that gauntlet's landing location, there are, of course, plenty of new challenges for Week 2.

One of them tasks you with finding a few locations around the map -- and when you get there, dance in front of the camera(s) you find there. You'll need to do this seven times to wrap everything up. 

As always, some are easy to find while others are not. Let's take a look.

Where To Find All The Camera Locations

Every location discovered so far can be seen in the map below or found by landing at these locations:

  • Junk Junction: In the film studio to the east 
  • Moisty Mire: One near the helicopter and one by the boxed-in set
  • Snobby Shores: Right by the dinosaur footprint to the south 
  • Tilted Towers: The indoor Soccer field to the west
  • Haunted Hills: Inside the big building 
  • Risky Reels: Inside a green-screen room 
  • West of Shifty Shafts
  • The Western edge of the racetrack
  • North of Moisty Mire at the broken bridge

 Fortnite Camera Locations Map

This is just one of the new challenges for Season 4, Week 2! Here's the full list of new Battle Pass challenges now available:

  • Search Chests in Greasy Grove (7)
  • Consume Hop Rocks (7)
  • Deal damage with Suppressed Weapons to opponents (500)
  • Dance in front of different film cameras (7)
  • Search between a Scarecrow, Pink Hotrod, and a Big Screen (Hard)
  • Explosive Weapon Eliminations (3) (Hard)
  • Eliminate opponents in Tomato Town (3) (Hard)

 Dancing in front of the film studio camera
(thanks to Starlord for the screenshot)

Still getting a handle on all the Season 4 changes to the Battle Royale map? Check out our other latest Fortnite guides here:

Pillars of Eternity 2 -- Finding All Companions and Ship Crew Tue, 08 May 2018 13:15:01 -0400 Ty Arthur

What's a classic cRPG without a party of interesting personalities to travel alongside the main character? Pillars of Eternity 2 doesn't skimp on those party options, including full companions with their own stories, recruitable sidekicks, and extra crew members to staff the Defiant.

Besides the obvious story line quests based around each character, picking companions based on the Watcher's class and skill set is a critical part of your combat strategy.

Read on for a full breakdown of where every companion can be found while exploring the Deadfire Archipelago.

Pillars of Eternity 2 Companions

Relationships play a huge role in the Pillars sequel, as companions react to each other and to the actions of the Watcher.

Each companion has specific ideas and character traits that they like and dislike, which will change their opinion of the Watcher when you choose dialogue and event choices based around those traits.

Every companion can also be customized when recruited by picking from three class options -- either pure classes or multi-classing for a broader range of abilities.


  • Location: Vilario's Rest
  • Class Option: Fighter, Rogue, or Swashbuckler
  • Likes: Anti-Leaden Key, animal kindness, pro-Eothasian, light hearted, traditional
  • Dislikes: Animal cruelty, pro-Leaden Key, anti-Eothasian

Eder automatically joins the party as your main frontline fighter as soon as the game starts with the shipwreck at Vilario's Rest.

If you decide to play through as antagonistic towards Eothas and the other gods or opposed to rigid adherence to tradition, then you may want to go with a melee-focused class for the Watcher, as Eder won't want to stick around.

Whether you go with fighter or rogue for his class, Eder is all about battlefield positioning and quickly dashing around to take on threats. Keep him mobile and in the thick of the action.


  • Location: Port Maje
  • Class Option: Priest, Monk, or Contemplative
  • Likes: Pro-Eothas, lighthearted, impassioned, wordly 
  • Dislikes: Anti-religious, irresponsibility, skullduggery 

After leaving Vilario's Rest, you can find Xoti in the center of Port Maje with the Children of the Dawnstars gathered to follow after Eothas.

Xoti is the game's primary healer, so unless you focus on healing abilities from Tekehu or Pallegina, she's basically a requirement.

Sadly, she's not going to be happy if you play a rogue or go full throttle into evil pirate mode, and she doesn't appreciate anyone who is opposed to Eothas.


  • Location: The Defiant
  • Class Option: Barbarian, Cipher, or Witch
  • Likes: Skullduggery, lighthearted, impassioned, worldly
  • Dislikes: Anti-Principi, racism

When you fix the Defiant and start sailing towards Neketaka, a Principi ship will approach you with information about the pirate who first attacked at the beginning of the game.

During this dialogue, you can choose to have the psychic pirate Serafen join your crew.

Serafen can take the role of frontline fighter if you go pure barbarian, but frankly, his cipher abilities are more useful since he can charm enemies to fight for you during battle.


  • Location: Engwithan Digsite
  • Class Option: Wizard, Battlemage, or Spellmage
  • Likes: Autonomy, dutiful, stewardship
  • Dislikes: Irresponsibility, pride, traditional

If you open the doors at the bottom end of the Engwithan Digsite area before getting the Defiant fixed at Port Maje, Aloth is clearly visible among the people hiding from Eothas.

On his quest to follow the Leaden Key, he's been hiding his identity to fit in with the digging crew.

If you don't pick the wizard class for the Watcher, Aloth is your best bet for a pure damage spellcaster.

Maia Rua

  • Location: Neketaka (Serpent's Palace)
  • Class Option: Ranger, Scout, or Geomancer
  • Likes: Dutiful, lighthearted, provincial, resourcefulness, pro-Rautai
  • Dislikes: Animal cruelty, pro-Huana

After visiting the luminous adra pillar in Hosonga, you will be prompted to return to visit the queen in Neketaka.

During the dialogue segment with the queen, the two major trading companies in the area will try to send their spies onto your ship to watch the situation directly.

Maia is the Rautaian spy who works for the Royal Deadfire Company. Her long-range gun attacks and animal companion can be quite useful in combat, and she offers a romance option for the Watcher (if you can find some shark meat to feed her bird first).


  • Location: Neketaka (Serpent's Palace)
  • Class Option: Paladin, Crusader, or Herald
  • Likes: Anti-religious, pro-Animancy, dutiful, pro-Vailian Republic
  • Dislikes: Pro-godlike, piety, racism

During the same segment in which Maia is recruited, the Vailian Trading Company will try to send Pallegina as their spy onto your boat. 

You can choose to take one, either, or both of them. This second option results in some inter-party conflict if you have Pallegina and Maia in your group at the same time, as they are working at directly cross purposes. 

As an anti-religious paladin, Pallegina can lead to all sorts of interesting party combos if you picked the godlike race and choose to be opposed to the gods. Pallegina can pick up the frontline fighter or back healer positions as needed.


  • Location: Neketaka (Periki's Overlook)
  • Class Option: Druid, Chanter, or Theurge
  • Likes: Progressive, pro-godlike, piety, pro-Huana, lighthearted, pride
  • Dislikes: Anti-Huana, pro-Rautai

This druid water godlike is found arguing with his mother in the watershaper's guild building found in Periki's Overlook.

Another romance option, Tekehu will be particularly interested in the Watcher if you picked the godlike race.

Tekehu can potentially take the role of frontline fighter when he switches to his shark form, but that's really best left to Eder or Pallegina. His crowd control druid abilities make him an excellent combatant who can pick up the slack if you don't have Aloth or cipher-focused Serafen in the party.

Pillars of Eternity 2 Sidekicks

Besides the main companions, four sidekicks who don't have personal quests or inter-party dialogue are also available. These sidekicks round out the party with different class abilities if you don't like the storylines or personalities of the full companions who take up those class roles.

  • Location: Neketaka (The Sacred Stair)
  • Class Option: Mindstalker, Cipher, or Rogue

Sadly, Obsidian didn't make the stretch goal to turn Ydwin into a full companion during the game's crowdfunding campaign, which is a shame, as she's clearly supposed to be some sort of animancer vampire performing insane experiments! Ydwin is found by traveling to the top of the Spire Of The Soul-Seers in the Sacred Stair area of Neketaka.

  • Location: Neketaka (The Queen's Berth)
  • Class Option: Chanter, Barbarian, or Howler

This masseuse, who is tired of rubbing down every traveler in Neketaka, is found by going to the upper floor of the Wild Mare in the Queen's Berth area.

  • Location: Neketaka (Perika's Outlook)
  • Class Option: Wizard, Loremaster, or Sorcerer

Fassina can be found in the Dark Cupboard shop in Perika's Outlook. If you don't bring Tekehu with you, taking the Sorcerer option gives you access to some druid abilities.

  • Location: Flotsam Event
  • Class Option: Fighter, Brawler, or Brute

Rekke is found during an event while sailing over on the far east side of the Archipelago map.

Pillars of Eternity 2 Ship Crew Members

While you can pay to recruit replacement crew members at any of the various city dockyards, plenty of shipmates can be found just by exploring the world. 

Rum-Dumb Riggere
  • Location: Port Maje (Jail)
  • Role: Deckhand
  • Traits: Ocean folk, old Vailia, drunkard

You can pick up Rum-Dumb in the jail at Port Maje (after leaving the first area) by either paying his debt, picking the lock, or stealing the key. 

  • Location: Oathbinder's Sanctum
  • Role: Navigator
  • Traits: Wood elf, Aedyr, chatty, drunkard, helmsman

Oswald is currently on trial for a centuries-old crime inside the Oathbinder's Sanctum (found on the island southwest of Neketaka). The Lost Dues in Good Faith quest given by Kahn in the Wild Mare takes you directly to Oswald. 

Giordu Red-Handed
  • Location: Temple Of Tangaloa Ruins (unnamed island south of Port Maje)
  • Role: Cook
  • Traits: Mountain dwarf, deckhand

Inside the temple filled with stranded sailors who turned to cannibalism, look for this dwarf tied to a bloody pillar on the west side of the largest chamber.

Handsome Eliam
  • Location: Crookspur
  • Role: Helmsman
  • Traits: Death godlike, Dyrwood, enigmatic, loyal, cook

When you reach the slaver city Crookspur, you can either buy Handsome Eliam for 1,200 coins, or offer him a place on your crew after you kill all the slavers.

Mother Sharp-Rock
  • Location: Caverns of Xaur Tuk-Tuk
  • Role: Deckhand
  • Traits: Xaurip, Deadfire Archipelago, religious, wilder, cook

Opening the cage at the northwest side of the Caverns of Xaur Tuk-Tuk provides the option to recruit this xaurip to your crew. The Caverns can be found by sailing northwest of Port Maje, and you have to explore this area during the Mapping The Achiepelago quest line granted by Sanza in the Queen's Berth.

  • Location: Neketaka (The Gullet)
  • Role: Helmsman
  • Traits: Ogre, Deadfire Archipelago, fearless, impulsive, wilder, cook

Head to the back room on the main floor of The Hole (the tavern at the east side of The Gullet in Neketaka), and talk to the ogre cook. For 400 coins she will join your crew. You can also pick up a pig pet in this same room.

  • Location: Tikiwara
  • Role: Cook
  • Traits: Mountain dwarf, Vailian Republic, chatty, loyal

After exploring the ancient ruins and completing the Storms of Poko Kahara quest, return to Tikiwara and talk to Vektor again to recruit him to your crew.

  • Location: Neketaka (The Brass Citadel)
  • Role: Cannoneer
  • Traits: Coastal amuana, impulsive, irreverent, helmsan, deckhand

After completing several quests, Emeini will eventually be found standing outside the Fleet Master's Office in The Brass Citadel. She's being punished after assaulting her captain, but if you have a reputation of 2 or higher with Neketaka, she will join your crew as a free expert cannoneer.

Worthless Idiot
  • Location: Neketaka (Periki's Overlook)
  • Role: Navigator
  • Traits: Imp, greedy, primordial

Yes, this imp's name is literally Worthless Idiot. His archmage master, Arkemyr, is kind of an ass, if you couldn't tell. Worthless Idiot is found just to the west of the watershaper's guild in Periki's Overlook.

If you recruit Worthless Idiot, random people in Neketaka will chide you for bringing a gross, smelly imp aboard your ship.

Have you found any other crew members we missed? Let us know in the comments below!

Now that you've got all the companions and ship crew, be sure to check out our other Pillars of Eternity 2 guides below as you get started exploring the Deadfire Archipelago:

Pillars of Eternity II Complete Skill Trainer Locations Guide Tue, 08 May 2018 13:15:01 -0400 Ty Arthur

Whether exploring the endless tunnels beneath The Gullet or attempting to identify a forgotten shrine on some uncharted island, your Pillars of Eternity 2 character will need to have a solid skill loadout to survive.

If you've been busy sinking ships and looting their cargo like a proper pirate, the Watcher's skills can be increased significantly by spending money at hidden skill trainers.

Heading straight to all these skill trainer locations when you have extra cash on hand will give you an edge in scripted events and help round out the Watcher's abilities if you only focused on a small number of skills at character creation.

Pillars of Eternity 2 Deadfire Trainer Locations

Each trainer charges 3,000 coins to raise one active and one passive skill. Note that there are several other ways to boost your skills without spending money at the hidden trainers scattered across the game, which can be quite expensive if you visit all of them.

A party-wide bonus is applied to skill checks based on how many party members have points in that skill. By adding a few points in specific skills to all party members, you can effectively bump up the Watcher's skill sets in any given event or dialogue.

Most of the pets found across the Archipelago also provide some sort of skill or attribute bonus, so if you want to bump up a specific stat further without spending money at a trainer, check out our full guide on every single Pillars of Eternity 2 pet location here.

If you've got the coins to burn though, let's get started finding all the trainers found from Neketaka to Sayuka!

History/Arcana Trainer
  • Location: Neketaka (Serpent's Crown)

Geirvard Calder is found at the palace in Serpent's Crown. To reach him, go up to the roof (the stairs on the northwest side of the second floor), then take one of the two southern staircases labeled Serpent's Crown. While they seem like they are exits out of the palace, they actually both take you out onto the palace terrace to a small map with a pet and a trainer. 

 Serpent's Crown first  trainer location

Survival/Athletics Trainer
  • Location: Neketaka (Serpent's Crown)

The next trainer is also found in the palace in Serpent's Crown, so you can grab him right before or after talking to Geirvard. If you enter through the palace's lower floor doorway, you will find shieldbearer Granis Yirgar in the Hall Of Remembrance on the east side.

If you chose the Paladin of St. Elgca class option at the beginning of the game, he also has some extra surprise dialogue for you about his distinctive armor.

 Serpent's Crown second trainer location

Alchemy/Religion Trainer
  • Location: Neketaka (Sacred Stair)

The trainer named Mark van der Bij is found sitting on the stairs at the east side of Magran's Temple in the Sacred Stair area of Neketaka (near the cat pet). 

 Sacred Stair trainer location

Stealth/Metaphysics Trainer
  • Location: Dunnage

To find this trainer, sail to the far west side of the map to the free city of Dunnage. Kae Polzech is found on the northwest side of the Lifter's Refuge map area (the docks where you first land in Dunnage).

 First Dunnage trainer location

Sleight Of Hand/Diplomacy Trainer
  • Location: Dunnage

Carlo Fortuni is standing directly next to the previous trainer in the Lifter's Refuge section of the free city of Dunnage.

 Second Dunnage trainer location

Explosives/Mechanics Trainer
  • Location: Dunnage

Elias Zellen is found at the western side of The King's Coffin tavern in the free city of Dunnage.

 Third Dunnage trainer location

Bluff/Streetwise Trainer
  • Location: Dunnage

After finding the three previous trainers in Dunnage, head over to the Radiant Court map section. You will find Co'el Marcellus on the far east side, near the stairs.

 Fourth Dunnage trainer location

Insight/Intimidate Trainer
  • Location: Sayuka

To find this trainer, sail northwest of Neketaka to a small island with the port town of Sayuka. The old sea dog Morofeto Liano can be found on the docks at the southwest side.

Ironically, you can then use your increased Intimidate skill to force him to give you the magic amulet Claim And Refusal, which can either increase or decrease your damage dealt and received (depending on which half of the amulet's ability is active).

 Sayuka trainer location

The open world of the Deadfire Archipelago is absolutely huge, so there may be more trainers to be found in hidden locations. Check back soon as we update this list with other trainers, and be sure to leave a comment below if you found any Pillars 2 skill trainers that we missed!

Pillars of Eternity 2: Deadfire Pet Locations and All Pet Bonuses Tue, 08 May 2018 13:15:01 -0400 Ty Arthur

Plenty of wizard, rogue, and barbarian companions can be found throughout the classic Infinity Engine-style RPG Pillars of Eternity 2, but there's an extra type of furry friend to recruit for even more customization options.

Pillars of Eternity 2 pets help to define your character build by shoring up skills you lack in, reinforcing your best skills to higher levels, and offering bonuses to the whole party just for following you around.

Most of these pets are found by exploring side rooms and rooftops across the the main city of Neketaka, but a few are much more difficult to track down as you sail across the Deadfire Archipelago.

Pillars of Eternity 2 Pet Locations

Screeching birds of prey, feisty kitty cats, faithful hounds, and even baby dragons can be discovered and added to your collection if you know where to look.

While your inventory can be filled to the brim with pets, the bonuses listed below only apply when the pet is in the actual pet slot on the main character (located below the belt slot on the right side of the character rag doll). If you want a place to house your extra pets on board the Defiant, you can buy the Menagerie ship upgrade at the Neketaka shipyard shop.

Besides the specific pets found across the game world listed below, you can also buy pets directly by talking to Ereti in the west of Kahonga Palace in the Serpent's Crown area of Neketaka.

  • Player Effect: +1 Might
  • Party Wide Effect: Bonus Deflection against attacks
  • Location: Console Command

Hit the ~ key and type cosmic dog and then tap Enter to put Comet in your inventory. Unlike the other Pillars 2 console cheats, the commands to create cosmic pets won't turn off achievements.

 Comet Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Dexterity
  • Party Wide Effect: Enemy weapon attacks will Graze instead of Hit more often
  • Location: Console Command

Hit the ~ key and type cosmic cat and then tap Enter to put Luna in your inventory. Unlike the other Pillars 2 console cheats, the commands to create cosmic pets won't turn off achievements.

 Luna Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Perception
  • Party Wide Effect: Party members move faster during combat
  • Location: Console Command

Hit the ~ key and type cosmic bird and then tap Enter to put Orbit in your inventory. Unlike the other Pillars 2 console cheats, the commands to create cosmic pets won't turn off achievements.

 Orbit Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Perception
  • Party Wide Effect: Enemies less likely to land crits with weapon attacks
  • Location: Engwithan Digsite

Gosha is found in the Engiwthan Digsite east of Port Maje (before you get your ship fixed). The cat is located just to the east of the upper entrance to the ancient training hall in the area that looks like a stone a mphitheater filled with broken seating.

 Gosha Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +2 Insight, +1 Metaphysics
  • Party Wide Effect: Slight bonus to Will
  • Location: Neketaka (Queen's Berth)

To find this forsaken dog, you need to head to the unmarked, brownish-red home found between Robero's Fine Fashion and the Back Alley at the northern end of the Queen's Berth area.

 Xopn'aua Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Perception
  • Party Wide Effect: Slight bonus to max Health
  • Location: Neketaka (Queen's Berth)

To find Toby, head inside the Vailian Trading Company Headquarters in the Queen's Berth Area, and take the exit to the rooftop terrace that looks out over the Berth. The lost dog is standing there near a barrel and a chair.

 Toby Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Intellect
  • Party Wide Effect: Enemy weapon attacks against the party score Criticals less frequently
  • Location: Tikiwara

You will travel to Tikiwara on the eastern side of the Archipelago during the Storms of Poko Kahara quest (or you can just sail there from the get-go if you want). When you reach Tikiwara, this abandoned kitty is found on the beach at the southwest side, by the rock arch.

 Mirri Pet Location

Desert Wurm Hatchling
  • Player Effect: +5 to all Defenses against ground-based attacks
  • Party Wide Effect: Some Misses with ranged weapons convert to Grazes
  • Location: Poko Kohara Ruins

When you travel east from Tikiwara to find the lost expedition, eventually you will explore the Poko Kohara Ruins.

Before fighting the titan and going inside the ruins themselves, check the southern area of this map near the oasis to fight some desert monsters. If you search the two white rocks south of the tree, you will find the desert wurm hatchling as an inventory item.

 Desert Wurm Hatchling Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Stealth, +1 Survival
  • Party Wide Effect: Some enemy Hits against the party are converted to Grazes
  • Location: Hasongo

You will travel to Hasongo during the Distant Light quest as you look for the luminous adra pillars visited by Eothas. While exploring this area filled with Naga, you have to move between sections of the map by swimming through flooded areas inside buildings.

When you get to the far left side of the map, head into the Fleet Master's Office to find Kaz whimpering in the corner.

 Kaz Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +5% damage to area effect attacks
  • Party Wide Effect: Healing potions and spells are slightly more effective
  • Location: Hasongo

After grabbing Kaz in the Fleet Master's Office, head inside the tower with the glowing green light at the far left side of the map. After dealing with the Naga, you can travel up to the top of the tower into a new map section to find this lonely cat.

 Corlagon Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +15% effectiveness for healing potions and spells
  • Party Wide Effect: Party members regain a small amount of health when landing a killing blow
  • Location: Neketaka (Serpent's Crown)

Head inside the palace in the Serpent's Crown area, then travel through the stairs to the Kahanga Palace Rooftop map. From there, you can see an exit that leads out onto the terrace that looks over the Serpent's Crown area but is still technically part of the palace map. The stray cat is between the two doors by the History/Arcana trainer.

Prissy Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +2 Resolve and resistance to Resolve afflictions
  • Party Wide Effect: Resolve afflictions on party members have reduced duration
  • Location: Neketaka (Serpent's Crown)

Eviee is found in the side room inside Muhai's Estate in the Serpent's Crown section of Neketaka.

 Eviee Pet Location

Frau Nils
  • Player Effect: +3 Accuracy with Melee attacks
  • Party Wide Effect: Small bonuses to all party member Health
  • Location: Neketaka (The Sacred Stair)

In the Sacred Stair area with all the temples, head to the southeast side and enter the flooded Temple of Gaun. This abandoned cat is standing between High Priestess Saewyn and the giant tree.

 Frau Nils Pet Location

Animancy Cat
  • Player Effect: +2 Metaphysics, +1 Arcana
  • Party Wide Effect: Summoned creatures gain bonus Might and Penetration
  • Location: Neketaka (The Sacred Stair)

Animancy Cat is available to buy for 8,500 coins from the merchant named Tiabo standing outside the animancy headquarters in The Sacred Stair.

  • Player Effect: +1 Constitution
  • Party Wide Effect: Party members regain some health when landing a killing blow
  • Location: Neketaka (The Gullet)

When you travel to the slum area of Neketaka called The Gullet, you can actually see Deus up on the broken-down terrace of the pirate bar called The Hole just by walking to the eastern side of the area.

To reach the dog, go inside The Hole, take the stairs up to the second floor with the locked rooms, and then go south through the door that reaches the terrace.

 Deus Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Perception
  • Party Wide Effect: Party members gain bonus defense against any attack that causes disease
  • Location: Neketaka (The Gullet)

After grabbing Deus on the terrace, go back down to the main floor of The Hole and head through the hallway behind the bartender. In the far back room, you can find this worried pig near Birta the cook.

 Onyx Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +3 to defense against body and mind afflictions
  • Party Wide Effect: Bonus defense against poison and disease attacks
  • Location: Neketaka (The Gullet)

This forsaken cat is found in front of Pitli's Sanctuary at the far southwest end of The Gullet.

 Ickis Pet Location

  • Player Effect: -20% Constitution affliction durations
  • Party Wide Effect: Party members regain health when landing a killing blow
  • Location: Neketaka (Delver's Row)

To reach Delver's Row, head through the Narrows exit at the west side of the Gullet. If you've already taken the lift in the Gullet down to the undercity dungeon area, instead travel west and then south to reach the map with the rogue watershapers and the docks on the river. At the far northwest edge of that map is another lift that goes up to Delver's Row. Algol is found in the tunnel at the west side on the way to the Spindle Man's chamber.

 Algol Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Perception
  • Party Wide Effect: Healing spells and potions are more effective
  • Location: Neketaka (Periki's Overlook)

This stray cat can be found just outside the entrance to the Watershaper's Guild at the northern end of the the Periki's Overlook area.

 Jules Pet Location

  • Player Effect: 5% of incoming Hits converted to Grazes
  • Party Wide Effect: Healing spells and potions slightly more effective
  • Location: Neketaka (Periki's Overlook)

If you enter from the eastern side, Rasper is found just to the side of the entrance to Iolfr's Raiments.

 Rasper Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 to all fire key word power levels
  • Party Wide Effect: Small bonus to Reflex defense
  • Location: Neketaka (Sacred Stair)

This forsaken cat is found at the east side of the Temple to Magran in the Sacred Stair area.

 Pozzi Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +15% damage to area effect attacks
  • Party Wide Effect: Area effect attacks of all party members are slightly increased in radius
  • Location: Oathbinder's Sanctum

You can find the Oathbinder's Sanctum island by heading north of Port Maje and northwest of the island with the Cavern of Xaur Tuk-Tuk. This area is typically found during the Lost Dues in Good Faith quest given by Kahn.

Peter is hiding in a hallway on the north end of the third floor of the Oathbinder's Sanctum. If you are all about fireballs and thrown stun grenades, this is the pet to get for his area effect increases. 

 Peter Pet Location

  • Player Effect: Reduces the Recovery penalty for wearing armor
  • Party Wide Effect: Party members regain a small amount of health when landing a killing blow
  • Location: Neketaka (Queen's Berth)

In the Queen's Berth area, head inside the Luminous Adra Mill, then go through the Rooftop Balcony exit to find the area where Abraham is sitting like a good boy.

 Abraham Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Resolve
  • Party Wide Effect: Bonus to weapon damage
  • Location: Hall of the Unseen (The Black Isles)

To reach this area, head south of Tikiwara until you come across the big black island with the lava at the center. Eliel is standing inside an inner hallway on the western side.

Eliel Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Dexterity
  • Party Wide Effect: Enemy weapon attacks sometimes converted from Hits to Grazes
  • Location: Dunnage (Lifter's Refuge)

Dunnage is found on the far west side of the map, and this pig is located up the stairs in the Lifter's Refuge docks area you first sail into.

 Chauncey Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Constitution
  • Party Wide Effect: Bonus to Fortitude defense
  • Location: Dunnage (Radiant Court)

Hemp is found at the far south end of the Radiant Court section of Dunnage, just below Ramaso's stalls.

 Hemp Pet Location

Bear Cub
  • Player Effect: +8 Fortitude
  • Party Wide Effect: Bonus to melee damage
  • Location: Bentbranch Bog 

For melee-focused parties, this is a killer pet! You can find him hiding in Bentbranch Bog, north of the port city Sayuka.

 Bear Cub Pet

  • Player Effect: +15 max Health
  • Party Wide Effect: Recover some Health when landing a killing blow
  • Location: Bentbranch Bog 

This cat is also found in the same general location as the bear cub pet listed above.

 Twix Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Resolve
  • Party Wide Effect: Party cannot engage and is immune to engagement, party members will also die automatically if knocked unconscious
  • Location: Ashen Maw

This tiny wild troll pet is found just north of the docks at Ashen Maw (the fiery location at the north end of the map  where you chase Eothas after facing him at the second luminous adra pillars).

 Grog Pet Location

  • Player Effect: +1 Resolve
  • Party Wide Effect: Reduced penalty to armor Recovery
  • Location: Junvik Village

Nalvi is on the east side of this village, which is found all the way in the upper-left corner of the Archipelago (to the northwest of Ori o Koiki).

 Nalvi Pet Location

Lil' Babs
  • Player Effect: +1 Dexterity
  • Party Wide Effect: Deflection bonus to enemy weapon attacks
  • Location: Motare o Kozi

Lil' Babs is found in the Motare o Kozi swamp on an island far north of Tikiwara and forth northwest of Neketaka. When you first arrive on this island, you will have to either fight the locals or talk your way past them to gain entrance to the swamp.

 Lil' Babs Pet Location

Concelhaut's Skull
  • Player Effect: Summon a ghostly visage of Concelhaut 1/rest
  • Party Wide Effect: Bonus to all Corrode damage dealt
  • Location: Bekarna's Observatory

Arkemyr will give you a quest to retrieve Bekarna's research at her observatory after you burgle his mansion. At the end of the quest, kill the lich Concelhaut and loot his body to take the still-living skull as a pet!

 Concelhaut's Skull Pet Location

Nemnok The Petite
  • Player Effect: +1 maximum Empower points
  • Party Wide Effect: +1 level spell cast for wizards, druids, and priests
  • Location: Drowned Barrows

If you've been paying attention to all the books about imp summoning throughout the game, it shouldn't come as much of a surprise that new "god" Nemnok is just an imp run amok on magic energy. When you defeat Nemnok in the Drowned Barrows (north of Junvik village), select the option to recruit him as a companion. He's not stoked about going from god to pet, but he'll do it. Nemnok will also loudly berate the party when in the pet slot, so there's a trade off for his bonuses!

 Nemnok Pet Location

There are almost certainly more pets found across the Deadfire Archipelago, and we may have missed a few -- let us know if you've come across any other pets, and we'll get them added to the list! You can also check out the rest of our Pillars of Eternity 2 Deadfire guides here.

Pillars of Eternity 2 Ship Combat Guide Tue, 08 May 2018 13:00:01 -0400 Ty Arthur

Shifting away from the forests of the Dyrwood to the island chain of the Deadfire Archipelago, Pillars Of Eternity 2 includes a mechanic entirely new to the series: ship-to-ship combat!

While there are tutorial screens for the major concepts, some of the finer points of the system are glossed over, and that's where we come in with this full guide to all things nautical in Pillars 2.

Maintaining the Ship and Crew Morale

To start your pirate adventures, open up the ship menu by clicking the boat icon at the bottom of the screen (this is available even while on land when you aren't on the open sea).

Keep an eye on the numbers at the top of the screen, and always maintain a full supply of repair tools, medical supplies, and cannon ammunition by stocking up at any port. These items are also frequently found by searching wrecks at sea or checking containers in land maps. Don't ever run low on these supplies, as frequent events on the water will result in injured crew and damaged hulls.

After any encounter where crew members are injured (marked by a red icon),  be sure to move the injured crew to the three reserve slots on the lower-right side of the ship menu. Leaving them at their posts while injured results in large morale losses every day.

While you can pay to recruit new crew at a port, always talk to any NPCs you come across. Many of the quest NPCs, like Oswald, Vektor, Mother-Sharp-Rock, and Birta the cook, can be recruited directly to your crew through dialog.

 Repositioning injured crew

Managing Food and Water

This isn't clear at first, but you have to move food and water out of the party stash to the appropriate slots in the boat management screen to keep your crew fed -- just having it in your inventory doesn't make it available to the crew.

Place the higher-morale food and drink options to the left, and the lower-morale options (like water and hardtack) to the right if you want to keep morale up.

Search every container you come across and make use of crafting regularly, and you won't often run out of the higher-morale food and drink. With higher morale comes bonus experience and no chance of mutiny.

 Moving food and drink from your inventory to the ship's stores

Ship Upgrades and Avoiding Damage

Although it's quite expensive for an early-game item at a cost of 5,000 coins, buying the spyglass at Sanza's Map Emporium in Neketaka will give you an edge in ship encounters. Many of the events on the sea have an option to scout first with the spyglass for bonuses or to avoid hazards altogether.

If the Defiant isn't big and bad enough for your crew, you can buy whole new ships at the Neketaka port, or pay for expensive upgrades to your existing hull and sails to get an edge in combat.

Don't drop too much money right at the start, however. A set of upgraded Valera Sails is available for free by completing a quest for Martino Valera in the Queen's Berth section of Neketaka.

Finally, while out at sea, avoid the large, grey storm clouds that randomly generate across the Archipelago. These clouds initiate a storm event that usually isn't worth the trouble. You can end up with some extra loot or interesting dialog, but they usually just cause expensive problems since you will take ship damage and get injured (or even killed) crew members during the event. If you want to level up your crew, however, they can be valuable sources of shipmate experience.

 Buying the spyglass

Winning Ship Battles

At the start of combat, your first decision is whether to ram the opposite ship and board them for a straight fight or to shift into the new ship combat screen. When dealing with a much stronger ship, boarding may be your best option.

While the Defiant is guaranteed to take damage and most likely suffer multiple crew injuries, boarding can be a better choice when you are outgunned and the enemy ship has a stronger hull and sails.

During ship combat, your goal is to get into optimal range for your cannons and to fire while staying out of your enemy's optimal range, repositioning away from enemy cannon fire by turning to starboard and port.

Performing Ship Manuevers

The big question mark for anyone not intimately familiar with nautical terms will be the "prepare to jibe" option. The jibe maneuver swings you around to the opposite position you are currently in. This is incredibly useful in combat to quickly fire off multiple volleys.

For instance, if you spent a few rounds turning to starboard or port repeatedly while your cannons are reloaded on one side, you can fire those cannons, then on the next turn, perform a jibe to get to the other side of the enemy ship instantly and fire off your secondary cannons on the next turn (rather than waiting a full three turns to repeatedly turn to starboard or port and get your other cannons in line for the shot).

By repeating this process, you will get more shots off more frequently while waiting for the cannons on the starboard and port sides to be reloaded. If you know the enemy cannons are going to fire this round, it can be better to perform the Brace For Impact action than to try to turn away or jibe, as you will get fewer crew injuries.

If your goal is to sink the ship, plunder its loot, and steal its flag, then aim for the hull. That's not the only possible outcome, however. Sails obviously have less health than the hull, so if you just want to escape the encounter, repeatedly fire on their sails from a distance, then turn away from the ship and sail at full speed to leave.

 Engaging in ship-to-ship combat

That's all you need to know to get started sailing the high seas and fighting pirate captains! Have any other Pillars 2 ship combat tips we should try out? Let us know in the comments section.

For help on finding pets, balancing party relationships, and completing quests, check out the rest of our Pillars of Eternity 2 guides here.

Your Cheat Sheet for Fortnite's Thanos Mode Tue, 08 May 2018 12:58:37 -0400 Jonathan Moore

The time has come. Thanos is here. 

With its latest update, Fortnite's crossover with Avengers: Infinity War is live -- and it's brought The Mad Titan himself to Tilted Towers and beyond. 

If you've yet to jump into the game since the 4.1 Patch hit the game's servers this morning or you're looking for specific answers to all your event questions, this guide will tell you everything you need to know. 

Consider this your cheat sheet. 

What Is Fortnite's Infinity Gauntlet Limited Time Mashup? 

Essentially, this is Fortnite's first foray into licensed, tie-in content. Taking advantage of the popularity that is Marvel's latest smash-hit, the Infinity Gauntlet Limited Time Mashup puts players in the boots of Thanos. And then -- essentially -- the mode lets them destroy everything in sight using the Infinity Gauntlet. 

You can only participate in the event as a single player. You will not be able to play in the mashup as a team or in Duos.

Matches are set to last about 15 (frenetic) minutes each, down from the typical 20-minute match time. 

During matches, the storm will also do more damage than usual: 

  • First Circle: 5% health deduction
  • Anything After: 10% health deduction
How Long Will the Event Last? 

Currently, there's no specific end date for the event. The official notes for Patch 4.1 don't identify a time frame. 

How Do I Get Thanos in Fortnite

To become Thanos, you first need to get the Infinity Gauntlet. You can do this in two different ways: 

  1. At the Beginning of the Match: Each Mashup match begins with a meteor carrying the Infinity Gauntlet landing somewhere in the safe zone.

  2. When Another Player Dies: If another player is carrying the Infinity Gauntlet and dies, you can pick it up to become The Mad Titan. 

It's worthy to note that if the Infinity Gauntlet is not picked up within a certain time frame, it will disappear from the map. That includes its initial appearance, as well as any subsequent appearances from downed players or additional meteors.  

Pro Tip: According to a video floating around the interwebs, it is possible to nab the Infinity Gauntlet at the very beginning of the match if you time your fall from the Battle Bus at just the right moment -- and land right on the meteor as it falls. It's tricky, but it's possible. 

Thanos float above the Fortnite map holding the Infinity Gauntlet in front of his face

What Powers Does Thanos Have? 

Instead of using anything from Fortnite's extensive catalog or weapons, this Marvel villain has a pretty devastating moveset:

  • Ability 1: A powerful, structure-destroying punch that also knocks enemies back

  • Ability 2: An AoE ground-pound maneuver where Thanos flies into the air before smashing opponents for knock-back damage

  • Ability 3: Fire a blast of energy from the Power Stone to deal DPS damage

  • Ability 4: A super vault ability that allows him to jump over the tallest structures and hurdles

Thanos doesn't build structures, and he's so powerful that he does not take fall damage or use the game's typical potions or cozy campfires for regen. Instead, he has shields that regenerate from defeating other players and (huge amounts of) health from the get-go, making him a veritable tank on the battlefield. 

How Do I Get the Thanos Skin?

Unfortunately, you can't buy or purchase the Thanos skin from the in-game store -- and you can't get it from any super special challenges or by signing up for Twitch Prime, either.

The only way to "get" the skin is to become Thanos by picking up the Infinity Gauntlet in the Limited Time Mashup. 

Is There Any Gameplay of Thanos Completely Wrecking? 

Psht. Of course, there is. Check out the links below to find some of the best footage from the best Fortnite streamers and content creators. 

Are There Other Avengers Skins in Fortnite

As of now, no, there are no other Avenger characters or skins in either Save the World or Battle Royale modes. Epic released a statement on Reddit saying that "we [Epic] have no plans for Avengers outfits in the store."


And that's it. If you're looking for more tips and tricks for Epic's incredibly popular shooter, be sure to check out our other guides while you're here. 

Hearthstone Guide: Witchwood Monster Hunt (Levels 5-8) Sun, 06 May 2018 09:13:51 -0400 Sergey_3847

If you managed to beat the first four levels of the Monster Hunt adventure in Hearthstone, then you will be ready to encounter the other, more powerful bosses.

Some of the old bosses may come back and hit you again, but you will mostly meet new faces, some of which are quite difficult. But don't worry, and just follow our guide on how to beat the Monster Hunt bosses from level 5 to 8.

Level 5 Bosses

Brushwood Centurion

Centurion is an old Grim Patron Warrior with a new face and hero power that allows him to attack random enemy minions. This means that you need to play minions with at least 3 attack or more so that he doesn't create more Grim Patrons. If you stick to this rule, you will easily win.


Cragtorr is hard! His hero power reduces the cost of minions in his hand, which means that he will play a lot of big threats throughout the match. You need to be able to get the Potion of Vitality treasure and double up your health to be able to survive long enough.

Crooked Pete

Pete plays like a Rogue in the first half of the match, and then transforms into Beast Hunter after you put him below 20 HP. He will turn into Beastly Pete, gain 15 armor, and draw a lot of cards. However, the match is still easy, and if you manage to keep your board, there will be no problem beating him whatsoever.


This boss is very aggressive, and he will also steal your own minions. It's easy to beat Gnomenapper with Darius Crowley, but you may have trouble with other heroes. In any case, just let him put your minions in a sack, and don't touch those sacks. In time, he will have no space on board for his own minions, as it will be filled with 0/3 sacks. Then, you just go face!

Plaguemaster Rancel

Rancel's main advantage is Poisonous hero power. So unless he puts a Taunt on board, don't bother killing his minions. He will be busy killng yours instead, while you can focus on putting his HP down to zero.

Ratcatcher Hannigul

This boss is very similar to Beastly Pete -- he will play lots of beasts and buff them. You should opt for a control playstyle, and killing him will be no problem once all his minions are gone from the board.


Shudderwock may be a huge threat in Constructed, but in Monster Hunt, you can use his ability to trigger all Battlecries twice to your advantage. Just choose card bundles with minions that have Battlecries, and you should win in no time.

The Scarecrow

This will be a long match! Scarecrow will heal a lot, and you need to survive the fatigue. The best strategy against him is to go all in with the Jades. At one point, they will grow so big that his heals won't help him anymore.

Vitus the Exiled

Vitus is awfully aggressive, so if you can get the mana reduction before this match, you will be able to out-aggro him.

Level 6 Bosses

Azalina Soulthief

Azalina is dangerously aggressive, and you will need to use a lot of removal against her. That is why having a Double Time ability would be very useful. In this case, you will be able to cast your removals twice for the price of one, and that's how you basically win here.

Face Collector

The Collector plays like an Evolve Shaman. He will try to transform his minions, but as you know, the RNG may not be on his side. If you have enough minions with Entrenchment ability on board, then you will be able to kill all his threats and get him down to zero.

Forlorn Lovers

Lovers will take you on a joruney to fatigue. If you have no outs, then you will most likely lose. And your only out is to have Shadowstep/Gang Up card bundle for Tess with Jades. In this case, you will have no problem with fatigue, and your minions will only keep growing in size.

Gustave, the Gutripper

Gustave is the easiest boss to beat on this level. His deck isn't very good, and his hero power can only kill your weakest minions; at times, he will even kill some of his own.

Level 7 Bosses

Experiment 3C

Not a particularly hard boss to beat. He will usually have a lot of cards due to his hero power, but otherwise, it's a very straightforward match. He will use Amalgamation, so be sure to keep just enough minions on board, and don't overextend. Having Assassinate-like spells is also useful.

Lord Godfrey

Godfrey is the nemesis-boss of Daius Crowley. In order to beat him, you need to have two passive abilities: Dragonfire Ammo, which gives an additional point of damage to your cannon, and Tactical Reinforcements, which reduces the cost of cards in your hand every time you use a cannon.

Raeth Ghostsong

This could be an easy match if you have Entrenchment ability, which gives your minions an extra 2 HP. Raeth's hero power works like Defile, so even if you have a lot of 1-health minions with the Entrenchment ability, it will be practically impossible to lose to this boss.

Level 8 Bosses

Captain Shivers

Shivers will play Kingsbane as his main weapon and then keep drawing it from his deck. Additionally, he will play lots of big minions, including Fel Reaver. You need to use this opportunity to mill him. Just play lots of small cards, and don't kill his Fel Reaver untill it mills Captain's entire deck.

Glinda Crowskin

Shaw's nemesis boss must have no minions on board in order for you to be able to kill her. If she has at least one, she will be immune. This means that you obviously need to remove all of her minions before attacking her face. After some time, she just gives up and plays no minions at all -- that's when you can finish her off.

Infinite Toki

The best way to play aginst Infinite Toki is with your own Toki hero. You need to have two abilites: Khadgar's Scrying Orb, which makes your spells cost less, and Robe of the Magi, which gives all your spells +3 damage. If you have these two, you will kill Toki without a question.


That is all on how to defeat all the bosses in Monster Hunt adventure, and be sure to come back soon for more Hearthstone guides here at GameSkinny!

West Gunfighter Beginner's Guide and Tips Sat, 05 May 2018 08:06:26 -0400 Littoface

Welcome to the Wild West, where every day is an adventure and duels are commonplace. Sometimes, your opponent isn't even human -- or alive.

West Gunfighter by Candy Mobile is a stylish 3D game with smooth controls and a fun twist on what we've come to expect from mobile games.

Many of its elements are straightforward, and it's pretty easy to get into. Even more impressively, the game allows players an almost sandbox level of freedom, through many minigames, side-quests, and chances to explore the world (on horseback, even, as any good Wild West gunslinger does).

We rode into town and stirred up some trouble just to bring you a guide for absolute beginners to the game. Let's ride, pardner.

Learning the Controls

Mastering the controls is key to doing well in this game.

Move the character with the joystick on the left, and draw/fire your weapon with the trigger button on the right. Swipe a finger on the main screen to rotate the character (and, by extension, the camera).

There are also options to reload and summon your horse.

You can switch between weapons by scrolling through them in the top of the screen.

How to Master Combat in West Gunfighter

In combat, these controls all work together for a smooth and quick fight: Rotate the character, and use the joystick to position the crosshairs on the enemies. Once you lock onto an enemy with the crosshairs, you can move as you shoot, as long as you stay within range and don't turn around.

There are three main weapon types: shotgun, blade, and revolver, with the option to buy a pair of revolvers if you want to dual-wield guns, as well as a single rifle.

The main difference between weapons is their range. Revolvers can be used from far away and allow you to put some distance between you and your enemies. Blades are up-close-and-personal. Shotguns are a nice middle ground, packing a lot of power but requiring you to be fairly close to actually hit your target.

Although which weapon you use depends on your fighting style, we recommend starting with the revolver, as it's the safest.

In battle, you can position yourself behind cover, but this also means it will be harder for you to hit anyone through the cover as well. Use cover when you're getting shot at from different directions, to put a stop to the bullets coming from at least one side.

If there's no cover or if you're having trouble finding that sweet spot, try to constantly keep moving. A moving target is harder to hit!

Buy Your Way to the Top: Tips on Buying and Upgrading

There are two things you should always have on-hand when exploring: ammo and blood vials (aka potions). Luckily, both are fairly cheap, only costing 100 or 200 a pop. Don't worry about expanding the maximum capacity for these early on, since you can always open the Store menu mid-fight and grab what you need on the go.

You receive various rewards for completing quests, but the game doesn't guide you through what to do with them. Good thing you're reading this guide!

Most quest rewards and other found items are used for upgrading your weapons or expanding capacity on items. As we said above, beginners shouldn't worry about expanding (you won't be getting the items you need for a bit anyway). Instead, focus on upgrades.

To upgrade your weapon, just go to the weapons tab in the Store. Alternatively, you can get there via the inventory: Tap on the minimap and select the third tab down. This is where you'll find your materials, which are what you need for upgrading. Tap on "Use" for any material to bring up the upgrade menu.

Which gun should you get? There aren't actually that many options, so find the style of combat that works best for you and choose accordingly. Here are the current options that you can buy with coins, and their price:

  • Colt Revolver — your default revolver
  • Remington Revolver — 3,000
  • Peacemaker — 10,000
  • Semi-auto Shotgun — your default shotgun
  • Sawed-off Shotgun — 10,000
  • Riot Shotgun — 18,000
  • Thompson Rifle — 20,000
  • Double Peacemaker — 25,000
  • Double Schofield — 40,000
  • Wilson — your default blade
  • Clanton — 2,500
  • Valance — 5,000

Keep in mind that blades cannot be upgrades: what you buy is what you get.
And here are the premium weapons you can snag if you've gathered enough diamonds (more on this later):

  • Calvera — 15
  • Angel Eyes — 15
  • Hedley — 30
  • William — 50
  • Little Bill — 50
  • Derringer — 60
  • Double Remington — 80
  • Carved Revolver — 100
  • Frontier Revolver — 100
  • Deckard Revolver — 180
  • LeMat Revolver — 180
  • Schofield Revolver — 120
  • Triple-barrelled Shotgun — 200
  • Double Carved Revolver — 240
  • UTS-22 Shotgun — 250
  • Double Sawed-off Shotgun — 250
  • Double LeMat — 300

You'll get plenty of materials as you progress through the quests, but it's still a good idea to save these until you've bought a better weapon.

Once you have your weapon of choice, save up for a good set of clothes. Outfits don't just make you look awesome, they also increase your defense, and some offer special abilities like increased headshot damage. Check them out in the store, and find some threads that fit your playing style.

Bringing Home the Diamonds

There are a number of ways to get diamonds, the cash-shop currency. And, of course, having diamonds has plenty of advantages, from better weapons and horse options to nicer-looking (and more useful) outfits. Diamonds can also let you continue if you fail in a mission (though you can also opt to watch a free ad instead).

Here are some ways to increase your stockpile of the precious currency in West Gunfighter:

  • Buy them for real money. This is a no-brainer, as it's standard fare in today's mobile games. However, buying a pack of diamonds bigger than the 50-count one will also remove all ads (which can get pretty intrusive), so it might be worth a go if you plan to be a long-time player.
  • Complete quests. Some quests will reward you with diamonds, though how well you do will influence how much loot you earn.
  • Complete extra quest objectives. Each quest has a few objectives, like getting a certain amount of headshots or only using a certain kind of weapon, that you can complete for special rewards — often in the form of diamonds.
  • Claim achievements. As you go through the game, you will naturally complete achievements, including how many enemies you kill, how many coins you spend, minigame accomplishments, and more. Don't forget to claim your rewards, some of which are diamonds. You can claim these through the main menu before starting the game, or the pause menu in-game.
  • Try your luck with treasure boxes. Some treasure boxes give you a chance to draw some extra diamonds. Find these all the way in the right-hand tab of the Store menu.
  • Log in every day. And, lastly, just by logging in every day, you can claim daily rewards, and diamonds are featured fairly often.

If you choose to buy diamonds for cash, here are your options:

  • 50 for $1.99
  • 130 for $4.99
  • 300 for $9.99
  • 650 for $19.99
  • 1,700 for $49.99
  • 3,500 for $99.99

Making Money Through Minigames

Blue markers, shown as different icons on your minimap, are minigames — which are an excellent way to make some quick in-game cash once you get the hang of them.

When playing minigames, you can select the amount you want to bet. If you're just starting out, it's safer to bet low so you can get the feel for each game.

Here are a few of the minigames you'll encounter on your travels:

  • Test your reflexes with quickdraw — just make sure your crosshairs remain round and green the entire time so you're ready to tap and draw.
  • Play some blackjack at the saloon to double (or lose) your money.
  • Race your horse through markers and try to beat the time — although the controls on the horse during races feel a tad unresponsive compared to the regular horse riding controls.
  • Throw some darts in the darts game, but watch your aim or you'll go bust and lose out on money if you take too many rounds to reach your goal.
  • Work on your aim at the target practice.

Buying Coins with Cash

Finally, if you find yourself running short on cash, or you really want that one outfit right now, you can just click on the + sign next to your coin total to bring up the coin purchasing menu. Your options here are as follows:

  • 5,000 for $1.99
  • 13,000 for $4.99
  • 30,000 for $9.99
  • 65,000 for $19.99
  • 170,000 for $49.99
  • 350,000 for $99.99

As with the diamonds, buying anything larger than the first option also removes the ads.

Two for the Price of One

If you think you'll be purchasing a package at some point (at the very least to get rid of those ads), you might want to take advantage of the introductory offer: 27,000 gold coins and 300 diamonds for $4.99. Sweet deal, considering the individual prices of these items.


Sling 'em, cowboy, and get ridin' — those outlaws and zombies (and outlaw zombies?) won't defeat themselves. And stay tuned to GameSkinny for all your West Gunfighter news and tips.

Hearthstone Guide: Witchwood Monster Hunt (Levels 1-4) Fri, 04 May 2018 15:11:43 -0400 Sergey_3847

In the latest solo adventure for Hearthstone, titled "Monster Hunt," you will face many strong enemies. You will be given four different heroes to play with, such as Houndmaster Shaw, Darius Crowley, Toki Time-Tinker, and Tess Greymane.

You can start with any of the four heroes, and if you beat all bosses with all four characters, then you get to fight the very last one -- Hagatha the Witch. Every hero needs to pass through eight levels of bosses that are chosen randomly.

If you want to know how to beat all the bosses in the Monster Hunt adventure levels1-4, then check out the guide below.

Level 1 Bosses

A Mangy Wolf

All Level 1 bosses are super easy to beat. Mangy Wolf will be busy buffing his minions instead of playing them, so you can use this opportunity to hit face with your own creatures and kill him in just a few turns.


Gobbles' passive ability allows him to draw cards every time you kill his minions. This means that you should ignore them entirely and simply go face. Gobbles has only 10 HP, so you will get there soon.


This boss will play a lot of cheap minions with Taunt, so try to have enough creatures of your own on board to be able to both remove his defenses and at the same time go face with the rest.

Level 2 Bosses

Cultist S'thara

Cultist's hero power deals damage to you every time you draw a card. This means that if the match goes a bit longer than expected, then you may lose it by simply drawing cards. That is why you should try to choose the First Aid Kit ability before this match, since it will heal you and your minions for 2 HP each turn.

Cutthroat Willie

This boss will find every opportunity to use his hero power that deals 1 damage to one of your minions. This means that you have to be as aggressive as possible before he kills your creatures. You can mainly ignore his threats and focus on face, unless you're too low on life.

Doctor Sezavo

Doctor's hero ability heals him for 3 HP. This means that you have to opt for a control type of gameplay in this case. Focus on removing his threats from the board first, and then, when you're free to go, hit his face until he dies.


Just like Rottooth, Gnarlroot will defend himself with lots of Taunts. You will have no other choice but to deal with them first, and then kill him when the path is free.


This is one of the easiest bosses to beat on Level 2. Her hero power will turn a random minion into a 0/1 frog, so just play as many minions as you can, and you will have enough power to kill her very soon.

Ravencaller Cozzlewurt

Ravencaller will have access to lots of cheap minions due to his hero power. He will then buff them with the help of Hobgoblin, so try to take control over the board first, and then focus on his face. Definitely kill the Hobgoblin!

The Mute

The last boss is also super easy. The Mute does nothing but silences your minions, which isn't that big of a threat. You will be able to kill her pretty quickly.

Level 3 Bosses

Gravekeeper Damph

Damph relies solely on minions with Deathrattle that fortunately for you aren't always good. If you can get the Entrenchment ability that buffs the health of all your minions, then you sh ould be able to keep the board and kill Damph rather quickly.

Grubb the Swampdrinker

Grubb's hero power isn't very good either. It kills his own minions and deals damage equal to their power to your hero. The strategy is simple -- kill his minions before he uses his hero power, and you will have no problems in this match whatsoever.

Manhunter Ivan

Ivan will play a lot of secrets, but they're Hunter secrets, so they'll be easy to deal with. The only one you should look out for is the Rat Trap, which puts a 6/6 rat on board. Otherwise, the match should go pretty smoothly.

Niira the Trickster

With Niira, it's important to clear the board as quickly as possible. If you don't do this, then she will buff her minions and keep buffing them until they reach the point of "too big to deal with." If you can keep control of the board, then you will have an advantage.

Sazzmi Gentlehorn

Sazzmi likes to steal your minions, but she is capable of stealing only creatures with 1 or 2 attack, so you need to avoid playing those in the early game, if you can. In the late game it won't matter, since her own threats aren't as good, and you should have a solid board of your own by that time.

The Whisperer

You need to use Whisperer's passive ability for the effect of giving all cards Echo to your advantage. Try to get as many cheap buffs into your deck as you can, and you will have a huge advantage during the match.


This Murloc boss could be difficult since he will play a lot of Murlocs, and their synergies are quite aggressive. This means that you need to play a control game in the first half of the match. Then, when you see that you can't deal with his minions anymore, just go face. Hopefully you've put him low enough by that time.

Level 4 Bosses

Baran the Blind

Baran basically plays like a control warrior. The fastest way to kill him is to be either aggressive or to play your own control game. But the aggro approach is far more effective.

Blood Witch Gretta

Gretta is hard if you play a lot of spells in your decks, since her ability makes all spells cost health instead of mana. So try to focus on your minions instead, and use spells only in the most dire situations. Otherwise, you will die very quickly.


The rule of thumb for this match-up is to remove an opponent's minions first. If you don't do this, he will give them Lifesteal and heal up to full health. So get those minions off the board!

Garrow, the Rancorous

Garrow will try to put as many minions on your side of the board and then use his hero power to deal that much damage to you. Actually, it's not a very good strategy by him, because you can use those minions to kill him. Really an easy match!

Groddo the Bogwarden

This can be a very annoying match-up. Groddo will summon zombies for each of your dead minions, but the worst part is that when those zombies die, they deal 1 damage to all characters. The positive thing is that it slowly kills Groddo, too.

Inquisitor Hav'nixx

If you have the healing ability, then you will easily win this match. Inquisitor will use his hero power to halve your health each turn, but if you heal regularly, then you can't die.

Sephira Dusktalon

Sephira draws spells from her deck every time you play a spell. This means that you shouldn't be afraid to play spells. On the contrary, play as many as you can ... and mill her!


This is another easy boss that will make copies of your minions, but the problem is that they're only 2/2 copies, so you will kill them very quickly.

Winslow Tobtock

The last boss is also very simple. He will constantly change your hand by shuffling your cards into your deck and letting you draw the same amount. So just play on curve and don't plan anything.


These are all the bosses in the Monster Hunt levels 1-4, but be sure to come back soon for the rest of the Hearthstone bosses here at GameSkinny!

EVE Online Exploration Guide 2018 Thu, 03 May 2018 14:50:51 -0400 Sergey_3847

Exploration in EVE Online is an essential part of gameplay, basically allowing you to make money by finding loot in space. Since exploration is something everyone in the game can do, it attracts many beginners as a source of easy money.

However, exploration is so much more than just finding cosmic signatures and hacking them. It's an entire campaign that requires a solid strategy, especially if you're looking forward to exploring wormholes and other dangerous places.

Before venturing into space, make sure that you have all the necessary equipment for your journey. Follow our comprehensive guide for all the most important tips and tricks for exploration in EVE Online. We're going to go over the best ships and fittings, advice on exploration and choosing destinations, and hacking. Get strapped in, it's time to get started.

Best Ships for Exploration in EVE Online



The cheapest exploration ship any beginner can afford is Heron. Heron has all the necessary basic modules to pull off exploration in EVE Online with the smallest possible budget.

What makes it good is the cloaking device that lets it cloak while probing in space. This will protect the ship from enemies. But since the Covert Ops cloaking device is not available for Heron, you will not be able to warp while cloaked.

It is equipped with a relic and data analyzer, necessary for cosmic signature probing. It also has two slots for additional modules, such as Scan Rangefinding and Pinpointing Arrays.



Buzzard is a variation of the Caldari frigate that, unlike Heron, can use Covert Ops cloak. This means that you will be able to warp while being cloaked without any speed penalties.

This ship can also use the Covert Cynosural Field Generator module, which generates an undetectable energy field that only Black Ops jump drives can lock on to.

It doesn't mean that you will be completely safe when exploring wormholes or other unsafe areas of space, but that kind of job is more fitting for the next ship.



This thing is perfect for wormhole exploration, if that's your goal. The Tengu can not only be configured to fit a Covert Ops cloak, but it also allows you to warp in at extreme ranges and warp out before it can be caught.

Because of its strong shield tank, long-range missiles, decent DPS, and small mass, the Tengu is highly preferred for wormhole space exploration.

But this is still not the most optimal fitting. If you have enough money, you should always opt for the next best ship for exploration in EVE Online.



This class of ships comes from a pirate faction -- Sisters of EVE. It is quite expensive and will not be available to new players. But if you've been playing for some time and have a certain knowledge of the exploration ships, you will see why Astero is considered to be the best in this game.

It has everything you need in an exploration frigate, including Covert Ops Cloak and the largest drone bay available. It's fast and agile, and it's amazing in PvP. This means that the Astero can easily take out any other low/null or wormhole explorers.

At its base, Astero still needs some fitting to be able to perform well at probing, but when you equip it with the right type of modules, it'll easily push any other scanning frigate out of competition.

Best Fitting for Exploration in EVE Online

Assuming that you've chosen Astero as your ship for exploration in EVE Online, you will need specific modules that should bring the exploration capabilities of this excellent frigate to their maximum.

Reactive Armor Hardener

There's a ton of armor modules you can stack on your Astero, but this one is really the smartest one. It shifts the resistance percentage in accordance with the type of damage you receive.

For example, if you get hit by EM damage, the 15% to all resistances will gradually shift to 60% EM resistance and 0% to all other resistances. In effect, this will make your armor practically undefeated.

Small Armor Repairer II

However, there is still a chance that your armor will get damaged, and in that case, you'll need this repairer module that uses nano-assemblers to repair damage done to the armor of the ship.

Small Ancillary Armor Repairer

Usually, EVE players use either Small Armor Repairer II or this one, but almost never together. However, the dual repairer fit is very practical when it comes to exploration. First of all, it increases the speed of armor repairing, and secondly, it works best in PvE, which is what you'll be doing a lot of when exploring.

'Refuge' Adaptive Nano Plating I

Currently, most ships fit the most recognizable Energized Adaptive Nano Membranes for armor plating. However, the Refuge Nano Plating is far better due to the fact that it has a higher resistance bonus and doesn't use your CPU at all.

Small Electrochemical Capacitor Booster I

Capacitor booster is required to inject additional power into your capacitor in case you need to stabilize.

Warp Scrambler II

Now, this module is far more exciting. It is used to jam and disrupt another ship's attempt at warping. Of course, you could use Warp Disruptor instead, but Scrambler has better warp disruption strength in case your enemy is using stabilizers and consumes less capacitor as well.

Coreli A-Type 1MN Afterburner

This frigate-only class module will boost the velocity of your ship to its maximum. The thrust that boosts the ship is limited by the mass of the ship, and since Astero is a relatively light ship, your speed boost will be quite significant.

Data Analyzer I

An absolutely necessary module for hacking containers found on data sites while exploring. Without it you will not be able to start the hacking mini-game.

Covert Ops Cloaking Device II

Cloaking is just as important for exploration, and this module will allow you to warp and stay cloaked at the same time.

Picking the Best Destination

When you have the right ship and the fitting for exploration, you can start exploring the vast space of EVE Online. But before venturing out into the unknown, you need to check a few things.

First, you need to know where to go, and the best space to explore is the one with low activity and low-security zones. In order to find such spaces, you need to open your map and set it to show the ships destroyed within the last hour.

  1. Press F10 to open the map
  2. Go to the Star map
  3. Go to the Star tab
  4. Open the Statistics folder
  5. Select "Ships destroyed in the last hour"
Check EVE Gatecamp

If you see a system with very few or no ships destroyed, then take a note of it and check it again over at the EVE Gatecamp channels. This'll give you additional intel on the exploration route of your choice.

Start Scanning for Signatures

After you've reached the desired destination, activate your probe scanner by pressing Alt+P. You will see a list of signatures at your scanner. Most of them will be anomalies, as indicated by the green color.

Use the "Filter" option in the same menu, and select Cosmic Signatures only. The scanner will now only show the signatures with red color -- that's what you're looking for. If your system has one or more of those, then you can start the process of probing and hacking.

Probing and Hacking Containers

After a successful scanning, you can now launch your probes and start probing the signatures. Choose a signature indicated by red color in your probe scanner window and the system map will reveal all the relevant information for further probing.

Moving and Resizing Probes

You will see a red dot in space that indicates the location of a cosmic signature. Double-click on it to center it on your screen, and move your probe cube to the location of the signature.

Set the size of your probes to 8au at the bottom of the probe scanner window. That is the most optimal size for probing in the beginning. However, most signatures are located within 4au of the given zone. This means that you need to move your probes and resize them to fit the 4au size.

Four Possible Outcomes

If your probing is going well, you should be able to identify one of the four possible signatures:

  • Sphere (1 signature). If the sphere appears on your screen after probing, then you will know that the signature is inside that sphere. Keep resizing your probes to fit the sphere and press Analyze button on your probe scanner window to refresh the results untill you reach the highest possible percentage.
  • Circle (2 signatures). In the case of a circle move your probes to the rim of the circle and move and resize your probes to cover the entire circle. Then, keep pressing Analyze. Rinse and repeat until you identify the exact location of the signature.
  • Line (3 signatures). If a line appeared that connects two dots, then move your probes to the center of the line and resize in order to cover the entire length of the line.
  • Spot (4 or more signatures). In the case of a spot, you need to act in the same way as with Sphere. Center your probe cube on it and resize untill you get the results.
Four Possible Sites

After you've identified the exact location of your signature, there can be four possible results:

  • Gas site. The signature could be a simple gas site. It could be used to harvest gas, but that's not the reason why you would explore in the first place. So skip it!
  • Combat site. As the title indicates, these are PvE or PvP combat sites. You want to avoid these as much as you can. You are here to explore and not to get into random fights. Skip it!
  • Relic and data site. This is exactly what you're looking for. You will find containers that can be hacked for relic or data extraction -- the actual reason for exploring.
  • Wormholes. Also could be useful, but are recommended for experienced players only.
Hacking Mini-game

EVE's hacking minigame.

After you've located the position of the relic or data container, you need to set your ship on its orbit. Then, activate your Data Analyzer and start the hacking mini-game.

This game is very similar to Minesweeper, a game where you need to guess which spots are safe by clicking. In the EVE's hacking mini-game you have additional stats, such as health and damage. But instead of mines you will encounter enemies, various defensive subsystems, where your main goal is the Core.

If you're good at Minesweeper, then you know that if your first number is 5 and the next one is 4, then you're getting closer to something. If you manage to reveal the Core on the given grid, and beat it by simply clicking on it a few times and checking if you have enough health, then you will successfully hack the container.

Wormhole Exploration in EVE Online

In case you still decided to explore wormholes, you should always only do this with a ship that has Covert Ops cloak. Staying undetected is of utmost importance, since you never know what expects you on the other end of a wormhole.

Directional Scanning

Assuming that you've successfully jumped through a wormhole and found yourself on the other end of it, you'll first need to scan the unknown system. That's why you need to know how to use Directional Scanning to identify potentially hostile ships. Here's how you do it:

  1. Open the Scanners tab in your menu
  2. Select Directional Scan
  3. Press F11 to open the mini-map
  4. Set the scanning angle to 360 degrees

If you see anything suspicious on your scan list/map (e.g. hostile shuttles), then it's better to leave the zone immediately, while you still can. That's why before entering a wormhole it's a good idea to bookmark a safe spot to which you can come back in case you die.

Probing Wormholes

If you see no apparent threats, then you can deploy your probes and start scanning the space around your ship. The process of probing is the same as before:

  • Move and resize probes
  • Locate all possible signatures
  • Identify relic and data signatures
  • Start hacking containers

When you're done, you can warp back to your safe spot or continue exploring the unknown space.


That is all there is to exploring in EVE Online, but be sure to come back soon for more guides here at GameSkinny!

How to Win Chicken Dinner After the New PUBG 0.5.0 Update Thu, 03 May 2018 11:42:46 -0400 Stephanie Tang

The hipster gaming argument about "who dun it first" is eternal when it comes to describing the Battle Royale style of gameplay and how it has come to redefine the FPS formula. Was it H1Z1, was it not, and isn't it all just an ultra-realistic single-player/team deathmatch anyway? 

What can't be argued is the global phenomenon that exploded out of the advent of PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds, even before the full game finally hit virtual store shelves. It put PUBG Corp and Tencent Games on the map, spawned a huge number of PC and mobile clones, and inspired Epic Games to push out its own BR contender, FortniteWhile a number of the most recent news and developments in PUBG land seem to revolve around catching up on mobile platforms and arguing about copyright infringements, the devs are finally taking a good hard look at what keeps the players fighting for winner, winner, chicken dinner -- the game itself.

This latest update adds a ton of new possibilities, many of which are geared towards the more experienced player (different gun attachments, new grips, the new SLR, etc.) and the gamers PUBG wants to lure back from Fortnite. You can find the full patch notes here, but check out some of the tips below that'll help you keep playing at your best, even with all these new changes.

1. Find a new place to camp.

This applies particularly if you're playing a lot on the Miramar map, because the devs have made a bunch of world changes. A lot of players have noticed that their usual haunts have been changed around some, and what were once high-cover camp spots are now not nearly as ideal. 

A few tweaks to the map have made other areas a little easier to pass through and scavenge in, however. The oasis is now a lot bigger than it used to be, and more buildings have been added around it. These add more opportunities to sneak around undetected, and up your chances of finding more loot as well. 

Moreover, if you're out in the open world on foot, you'll now find a little more cover to hide your approach. That's handy, especially when you can't find a vehicle and you've got to really hoof it to stay in the safe zones. 

2. Know your vehicles and what they can do. 

It's no fun to run -- not in MMOs and not in FPS games with giant maps. When you can get your hands on a vehicle -- any vehicle -- it means a quick getaway and a heck of a lot of fun, especially if you're playing in a squad and you've got guns at your back to watch for other players out to snipe your ride. 

Vehicles aren't new to the game, so most players should already know their upsides (speeeeeeed) and their downsides (noise). There's also the differences between each of the vehicles (e.g. you don't want to bring the van, sturdy as it may be, off-roading). And now there's a new car in the mix, exclusive to the Miramar map -- the Mirado. 

A classic muscle car, the Mirado is probably a little more style (and straight-up fun) than it is function ... but there's no denying that it is the fastest vehicle you're going to find for zooming along long stretches of road. If you're down to the last minute between safe zones, some extra speed might be your best bet in beating the city traffic and staying alive. 

3. Bring out the new PUBG SLR.

It's new, it's shiny, and almost everyone in the game wants a chance to try it on for size. The camp sniper meta just got kicked up a notch, especially since this gun packs a powerful punch but has a lot of recoil. If you use this gun, you're going to want to be sure of your first shot since you'll have to work for the next one (10 bullets per mag of 7.62 mm ammo, although this can be extended to 20 if you can find the right attachment).  

Also keep in mind that when everyone else wants the gun, way more people are going to be carrying it around, and even more people are going to want to pry it out of your cold, dead fingers.

If you opt for using it, know the right situation for it to shine. If you don't use it, go the opposite way -- pile on the armor and practice your tracking -- you'll land six bullets dead in the brainpan before the other guy can recenter after three shots. 

4. Level-3 helmets just upped the ante on care packages. 

It's not just the guns -- it's having the resources to stay alive when other people are shooting back at you. The closer you get to the end game, the more geared up your opponents are going to be. You may have stocked up on new character cosmetics, but nobody is going to turn down the opportunity for armoring up when they get the chance. 

This latest patch has made the draw of the loot crate even stronger now that the highest-grade helmet can no longer be acquired via scavenging through the regular world map -- they'll only be made available in these massive, greed-laden murderfests around the boxes. The same goes for the SR quick-draw magazines and SR extended quick-draw magazines.

If you're going to try your chance at obtaining it, get in and get out as soon as you can!

5. Rethink your swimming strategy. 

If you've found yourself winning games by hiding out in the water, you may want to consider a new way to get from the islands to the mainland. In an effort to keep all the underwater rabbiting at a minimum, you can only stay submerged for a max of 15 seconds now (compared to the previous 35), and when you've run out of air, you'll start taking damage (10 per second, up from 4). 

Once you lift your head out of the water, you'll need to wait 4 seconds (up from 1) before you recover enough breath to dive down again. What was once an excellent escape route is no longer as effective. Time to start hunting down a boat in order to make your quick getaways on water (although players should also note that boats now sink when they are destroyed). 

6. Other things you'll want to remember: 

  • A considerable degree of rebalancing has happened to the existing guns so that there's no "best AR," SMGs are better in short-range situations, and shotguns have better damage and range now. 
  • There are a number of new grips and attachments that can adjust how the new and existing guns fire, how much ammo they can hold, etc. Many of them will operate slightly differently or do different damage from how they used to behave, and the same goes for throwables. 
  • Damage from different kinds of body/head/limb shots has been adjusted. 
  • Movement speeds have changed and will be determined by what weapon you're carrying. Weapon sway has been tweaked. 

All of the above means that even if you're a seasoned pro with a favorite set of guns, things are going to look and feel a lot different. Test them out a little before you really take on the whole battlefield!


That's it for now! Keep checking back for more PUBG guides on GameSkinny!

Fortnite Tomato Town Map & Loot Location Guide Wed, 02 May 2018 17:31:17 -0400 Ty Arthur

Ready for another Fortnite treasure map hunt? Fortnite's Season 4 Week 1 challenges have arrived, along with a drastically altered map featuring new crater areas and gravity-defying hop rocks. Let's go ahead and dive right into completing the Tomato Town treasure map!

How to Find Week 1's Challenge Loot

This challenge is incredibly easy to complete. Just leap from the bus and land at the eastern side of Loot Lake.

You'll be looking for a small, white broken row boat sticking up out of the water right by the rock formation opposite the main house island on Loot Lake. Land on the row boat (or swim there if you missed it) and the battle star loot will appear.

You don't even have to actually find the Tomato Town treasure map first to get Week 1's prize. However, if you really want to, you can land in Tomato Town, search for the map, and then sprint west toward Loot Lake -- but those extra steps aren't necessary.

 Tomato Town Treasure Map Loot Location

This treasure map hunt is just one of the Season 4 Week 1 challenges currently available for Battle Pass players. Here's the full breakdown of new ways to earn stars in Fortnite this week:

  • Deal damage with Sniper Rifles to opponents (500)
  • Search Chests in Haunted Hills (7)
  • Use a Port-a-Fort
  • Search F-O-R-T-N-I-T-E Letters (8)
  • Follow the treasure map found in Tomato Town (Hard)
  • Pistol Eliminations (3) (Hard)
  • Eliminate opponents in Flush Factory (3) (Hard)

 Landing at the exact location for the rowboat prize
(thanks to HarryNinetyFour for the screenshot)

Still getting a handle on all the Season 4 changes to the Battle Royale map? Check out our other Fortnite guides here:

How to Get the Insanely Silly Shovel Launcher in Far Cry 5 (Plus Jacob's Hunter Outfit) Wed, 02 May 2018 13:20:57 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Far Cry 5's newest event brings a crazy new weapon to the wilds of Hope County: the Shovel Launcher. As if throwing shovels wasn't enough already, now it's possible to launch these bad boys across the map -- and even take out helicopters with this low-tech weapon.

So what's the rub on getting it in your hands? 

Between now and May 8, you can jump into the White Collar Job event and complete the personal goal to add it to your inventory. On top of that, you can get some good XP and silver bars for your efforts.

Below, we outline everything you need to know to get the Shovel Launcher. 

What's the Personal Goal? 

After you've jumped into the White Collar Job event, you'll need to kill a set number of wolves using the bow and arrow to nab the Shovel Launcher. Both regular wolves and Jacob's Judges count toward your personal goal. 

Here are the two objectives and their rewards: 

  • Kill 5 Wolves: 100 XP + 50 Silver Bars
  • Kill 10 Wolves: 100 XP + Shovel Launcher

The rewards will be in any store after you complete the above objectives. 

Note: If you complete the goals and can't find your rewards, you may be running into a known bug. Try quitting the game, quitting the Ubisoft app, and restarting. 

Some users on Reddit have said that they needed to kill 10 more wolves to unlock the reward. The exact reason for the glitch is currently not known. 

Wolf Hunting Locations

So where can you find wolves in Far Cry 5? The best place to start your efforts is in the Whitetail Mountains (Jacob's Region). Here, go to the woods north of the Elk Jaw Lodge or the woods west of Baron Lumber Mill. 

You can also find wolves deep to the south, in the Henbane River area (John's Region). These will be just south of the Kellette Cattle Co. and north of the Fire in the Hole Prepper Stash. 

You can also kill Jacob's Judges for this goal. These are mostly found in Cult Outposts in the Whitetail Mountains and are somewhat random. 

How to Kill Wolves Faster

If you're hunting regular Grey Wolves, it's not all that hard to take them down with a few arrows to the chest or head. But if you're hunting Judges or want to take other rabid doggos out faster, then we suggest using explosive arrows. Sure, it's overkill, but it'll get the job done. 

You can also try and whittle down their health bars using ARs or any other weapon type -- but you might accidentally kill one before switching over to the bow and arrow. 

Where to Find the Bow 

If you're going after the Shovel Launcher, you probably already have or know where to get the bow. However, if you've somehow missed it or new to the game, there are several places to nab one. 

The easiest place to get a bow is at the very beginning of Far Cry 5 in Dutch's Area. Look for the Silver Lake Boathouse on Dutch's Island. You'll need to start the Sunken Funds Prepper Stash quest (which you can read about here). Inside the stash is where you'll find the first bow of the game. 

You can also find a bow after recruiting Jess Black as a companion. You'll find her at the Baron Lumber Mill. After completing her mission, "A Dish Best Served Cold," you'll find dozens of bows scattered around Baron Mill. 

How to Get Jacob's Hunter Outfit 

The White Collar Job event also has a community goal available until May 8. If you complete it, you'll get your new digs. 

Here's what you need to know: 

  • Kill 250,000 Animals: 100XP + 50 Silver Bars
  • Kill 500,000 Animals: 100XP + Jacob's Hunter Outfit

Check out this nifty map from Ubisoft to find all of the hunting locations in the game. 


That's all you need to know to get your hands on the Shovel Launcher and Jacob's Hunting Outfit in Far Cry 5's White Collar Job event. Be sure to check out our other tips and tricks guides while you're here. 

Hearthstone Guide: How to Beat Hagatha in Monster Hunt Wed, 02 May 2018 13:05:34 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest solo adventure for Hearthstone is out -- the Monster Hunt. It gives players four preconstructed decks, each belonging to a different character, to beat eight different bosses. If you manage to beat all of them with all four decks, then you will unlock the very last boss -- Hagatha the Witch.

Hagatha is a very powerful enemy that has 100 HP and a passive hero power that adds a random Shaman spell to her hand each time she plays a minion. This gives her a huge advantage in the match-up, so if you want to know how to beat Hagatha, then follow our guide below.

Best Passive Abilities Against Hagatha

When the match-up begins, you will be given the chance to play all four pre-constructed decks in the same match-up. You will start with Houndmaster Shaw, which has 12 cards in the deck, and you will be given three hero cards for each of the other three monster hunters: Toki, Time-Tinker, Darius Crowley, and Tess Greymane.

Every time you change the hero, it will deal AOE damage on the board equal to its mana cost, and your deck will gain an additional 12 cards that correspond to that given hero. Also, every time you play a hero, you will have the chance to choose one passive ability card.

The best passive abilities against Hagatha for each of the heroes are listed below:

Crystal Gem (Shaw)

This ability gives you an additional mana crystal at the beginning of the match, so it basically works like a free Wild Growth but with an active mana. This gives you a good head start to set up a decent board against Hagatha in the early game.

Double Time (Toki)

Toki should be your next hero after Shaw. Also, you should save Call of the Wild in combination with Double Time to cast it twice in one turn. This will put six minions on board, including two chargers. This passive ability will let you produce extremely powerful turns.

Entrenchment (Crowley)

This one gives all your minions an additional two points of health, which may not seem much, but in the end, it turns out to be the most powerful choice with Darius Crowley. Pillage the Fallen is also good if you have a weapon, but that isn't always the case.

Cult of the Wolf (Tess)

The last passive ability will allow you to discover any good spell that you've played during a match for just one mana with the help of Tess' hero power. It's super important at the later stages of the game, when you need that final push and there are no more cards in your hand.

Best Strategy Against Hagatha

In the early game, Hagatha will play Face Collector and Twilight Drake, which are both easy to deal with. But as soon as she reaches 6 mana, she will always play The Mistcaller -- a legendary card that buffs all of her other minions in hand and deck. This is when the game turns into a real challenge.

However, you shouldn't put all of your available minions on board just yet. You need to have just enough, since on turn eight, Hagatha will play Amalgamate -- a powerful AOE that destroys all minions and creates an Amalgamation with the combined power of all destroyed minions. So don't play your most powerful minions just yet.

Turn 9 usually ends up with her playing Hadronox -- a legendary that returns all minions with Taunt on board as a Deathrattle effect. The only really good way to beat Hadronox is to Polymorph it. Otherwise, just keep track of all the Taunt minions she has played during the match, and calculate if you can remove them all at once. Blizzard with Double Time should do the trick.

Alternatively, Hagatha will play Glinda Crowskin, which gives all minions in hand Echo or Aviana, which makes all minions cost 1 mana. In this case, she will start putting out Arcane or Mountain Giants, so be sure to kill those two as soon as possible. Those are her main threats, and if you manage to deal with all of them effectively, there is no doubt that you will beat Hagatha.


That is all you need to know about how to defeat Hagatha the Witch in Monster Hunt adventure, and for other Hearthstone guides at GameSkinny, please visit the links below:

God Of War (2018) Best Runic Attacks Guide Tue, 01 May 2018 17:07:23 -0400 Ty Arthur

While there's plenty of world map exploration and father/son bonding to enjoy in the story, frenzied combat is the heart of the God of War reboot experience, and its the runic attacks that can make that combat incredibly deadly.

With so many different stat, weapon, enchantment, and upgrade options in this game, it can be difficult to pick which runic attacks to use more than the others. Want to know which are the absolute best God Of War runic attacks? We break down the best options for each type of runic attack, as well as where to best use them in different combat scenarios.

Note that one certain story weapon gets unlocked at the end of the game, and it is mentioned below, so there are essentially spoilers ahead just by listing attacks with that particular weapon.

Best God Of War Light Runic Attacks

Tending to have lower cool down times and lots of utility, there are plenty of awesome light runic attacks to utilize in nearly any combat situation if you find  them in legendary chests or buy them from shops.

Hel's Touch

Location: Unmissable first rune near start of game

Although the very first runic attack to be unlocked, Hel's Touch remains useful for much of the game, as it can get Kratos out of a bind when swarmed by enemies and deals decent damage.

While personal preference will determine which specific light runic attack you use most often, Hel's Touch is probably the best all-around option for any situation.

Hel's Touch Sending a stunning shockwave through the air with Hel's Touch (thanks to PowerPyx for the screenshot)

Leviathan’s Wake

Location: Pick this runic attack up in a legendary chest in the Veithurgard region

This laser death beam of an axe throw plows through any enemies in a line. While you do have to maneuver a bit to make full use of it, any area with multiple enemies crowding towards you (like a bridge) can easily be turned into an instant killing field.

Leviathan's Wake Launching a Leviathan's Wake runic attack

Cyclone Of Chaos

Location: Garb this runic attack in a legendary chest in the Helheim” Region or buy it for 50,000 Hacksilver and 30 Aegir’s Gold at a shop

Recalling the earlier games in the series, this is the classic whirling Blades Of Chaos attack you know and love, and it's consistently useful both for damage and for stunning enemies that are swarming Kratos.

Blades of Chaos Throwing out the Blades Of Chaos for a Cyclone runic attack

Best God Of War Heavy Runic Attacks

While in most cases it makes more sense to upgrade your other stats for a more well-rounded Kratos, one interesting strategy is to focus on upgrading the cooldown stat and base your build around heavy runic attacks.

If you get your cooldown stat incredibly high, you can launch a round of runic attacks from your Blades Of Chaos, switch over and do your Leviathan Axe runic attacks, and then have your first set of runic attacks recharged already for a nearly continuous stream of devastation.

Frost Giant's Frenzy

Location: You can pick up the Frost Giant's Frency runic attack at a shop for 15,000 Hacksilver and 10 Aegir's Gold.

This devastating runic ability launches three successive slam attacks that launch enemies and then sends them flying.

There's already killer damage and stun ability at level 1... but when you upgrade Frost Giant's Frenzy to level 3 and can spam new slam attacks by mashing R2, this ability absolutely destroys normal enemies or even trolls with very little effort. 

Frost Giant's Frenzy Kratos slams the ground with Frost Giant's Frenzy

Blessings Of The Frost

Location: Buy this runic attack at a shop for 50,000 Hacksilver and 30 Aegir’s  Gold 

At first this ability seems a little underwhelming, since it basically just increases your Leviathan Axe melee attack damage. Once you upgrade this bad boy and come to realize just how much it upgrades your attacks, however, it can become indispensable against enemies with more health.

Besides bonus physical and frost damage, it also greatly increases the duration and bonus damage of runic attacks, making it a deadly combo used with additional runic abilities.

Blessings of the Frost Activating Blessings of the Frost

Hyperion Grapple

Location: Grab this runic attack in a legendary chest in the Tyr's Temple region

Not to be confused with Hyperion Slam, this heavy runic attack with the Blades of Chaos hits an enemy for heavy damage and stunning, then launches Kratos directly at them. For big, difficult enemies where you need to deal a bunch of damage and get some time to breathe (like the Valkyries), this attack is amazing.

Hyperion Grapple Launching chains for the Hyperion Grapple

Best God Of War Runic Summon

Atreus can get in on the runic activity as well with his special Talon Bow runic summons. While all can be useful when upgraded, one stands head and shoulders above the rest for its potential tactical use.

Murder Of Crows

Location: Grab this runic summon in a legendary chest in the Witch's Cave found in the River Pass region

Summoning a large group of crows that stun enemies can be absolutely deadly, especially when used in conjunction with the various heavy runic attacks Kratos has that hit large numbers of enemies or deliver area effect frost damage. The downside is the long cool down time, and the need to upgrade to get to the full 12 crows.

Murder of Crows Murder Of Crows Runic Summon

What do you think are the best God Of War runic attack combos? Let us know your combat strategies below, and be sure to check out our other God Of War guides here:

Last Day on Earth: Survival -- Recycler Guide Tue, 01 May 2018 14:57:51 -0400 Joseph Rowe

Any good crafting game has ways for you to get more resources. Last Day on Earth: Survival Patch 1.8.2 introduces the Recycler -- a tool that lets you disassemble items you have no use for to get much-needed resources to build other items. Disassembling these items will get you components that you can use to build other items. This is the perfect item for clearing inventory space and turning useless crap into useful crap.

How to Unlock and Build the Recycler in LDOE

First of all, you will need 2 craft points to even unlock the recipe. You will also need to make sure you have some empty space in your house on the floor for the Recycler. Then, of course, the last thing you will need are the materials:

  • 3 Oak Planks
  • 8 Iron Plates
  • 5 Aluminum Bars
  • 1 Light Bulb
  • 20 Bolts
  • 10 Rubber Parts

Like any good survival game, you have skills to level up with the Recycler in Last Day on Earth: Survival. You earn experience in a specific recycling group each time you disassemble something from that group of items. The groups are:

  • Clothes
  • Melee Weapons
  • Mechanics
  • Electronics
  • Firearms
  • Other

There are a ton of items you can disassemble. Some of them will only yield one specific item, but others offer three different potential items to output. The yield you get depends on your level in that group's skill.

You gain a percentage point for the first item every three levels, a percentage point for the second item every five levels, and a percentage point for the third item every 10 levels.


The following items can be disassembled to yield the components listed after 10m:

  • Dad Hat: Piece of Cloth
  • Shirt: Piece of Cloth
  • Cargo Pants: Piece of Cloth, Rope
  • Sneakers: Piece of Cloth, Rope
  • Reinforced Shirt: Piece of Cloth, Rope, Leather
  • Reinforced Trousers: Piece of Cloth, Rope, Leather
  • Reinforced Sneakers: Piece of Cloth, Rope, Leather
  • Beanie: Thick Fabric, Rope, Piece of Cloth
  • Thick Jacket: Thick Fabric, Rope, Leather
  • Denim Jeans: Thick Fabric, Rope, Leather
  • Work Boots: Thick Fabric, Rope, Leather
  • Reinforced Beanie: Thick Fabric, Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Reinforced Jacket: Thick Fabric, Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Reinforced Jeans: Thick Fabric, Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Reinforced Boots: Thick Fabric, Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Tactical Cap: Thick Fabric, Leather
  • Tactical Body Armor: Thick Fabric, Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Tactical Trousers: Thick Fabric, Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Tactical Boots: Thick Fabric, Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Fur Beanie: Fur, Thick Fabric, Rope
  • Fur Jacket: Fur, Thick Fabric, Leather
  • Fur Trousers: Fur, Thick Fabric, Leather
  • Fur Boots: Fur, Thick Fabric, Rope
  • SWAT Helmet: Piece of Cloth, Thick Fabric, Steel Bar
  • SWAT Body Armor: Piece of Cloth, Thick Fabric, Steel Bar
  • SWAT Trousers: Piece of Cloth, Thick Fabric, Steel Bar
  • SWAT Boots: Piece of Cloth, Thick Fabric, Steel Bar
Melee Weapons

This category takes 10m to complete and yields the following if you break down the items listed in the Recycler:

  • Hatchet: Pine Log, Limestone
  • Pickaxe: Pine Log, Limestone
  • Spear: Pine Log
  • Makeshift Bat: Pine Plank, Duct Tape
  • Bow: Pine Plank, Duct Tape
  • Torch: Pine Log, Rope
  • Iron Hatchet: Scrap Metal, Pine Plank, Duct Tape
  • Iron Pick Axe: Scrap Metal, Pine Plank, Duct Tape
  • Cleaver: Scrap Metal, Leather, Pine Plank
  • Crowbar: Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Nail Board: Pine Plank, Duct Tape, Scrap Metal
  • Shovel: Scrap Metal, Pine Plank
  • Spiked Devastator: Scrap Metal, Leather, Aluminum Bar
  • Skull Crusher: Scrap Metal, Leather, Duct Tape
  • Machete: Scrap Metal, Leather, Pine Plank
  • Saw Blade Mace: Scrap Metal, Pine Plank, Leather
  • Hammer: Scrap Metal, Leather
  • Hockey Stick: Pine Plank, Duct Tape, Scrap Metal
  • Golf Club: Scrap Metal, Duct Tape, Aluminum Bar
  • Baseball Bat: Pine Plank, Duct Tape
  • Paddle: Pine Plank, Plastic
  • Road Sign: Scrap Metal, Duct Tape
  • Katana: Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar, Steel Bar

The following components in Last Day on Earth: Survival will be yielded in 1h-1h30m if you break down these items:

  • ATV Gas Tank: Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar
  • ATV Wheel: Scrap Metal, Steel Bar
  • Car Engine: Aluminum Bar, Engine Part, Steel Plate
  • Chopper Gas Tank: Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar
  • Chopper Fork: Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar
  • Chopper Wheel: Scrap Metal, Rubber Parts, Aluminum Bar
  • Engine Part: Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar, Steel Bar
  • Truck Saw Blade: Scrap Metal, Steel Bar
  • Truck Wheel: Scrap Metal, Steel Bar

The Recycler will give you the following components if you disassemble the items in the list below:

  • Batteries: Scrap Metal, Copper Bar
  • Camera: Plastic, Hi-Tech Components, Copper Bar
  • Dish Antenna: Scrap Metal, Wiring, Aluminum Bar
  • Expensive Watches: Scrap Metal, Bolts, Copper Bar
  • Flashlight: Scrap Metal, Bolts, Aluminum Bar
  • Heat Sensor: Aluminum Bar, Steel Bar, Hi-Tech Components
  • Light Bulb: Scrap Metal
  • Mobile Phone: Plastic, Hi-Tech Components, Electronic Circuit
  • Signal Amplifier: Bolts, Hi-Tech Components, Electronic Circuit
  • USB Drive: Plastic, Transistor, Electronic Circuit

Disassemble these guns to yield the following sweet pieces of LDOE:S loot:

  • AK-47: Scrap Metal, Weapon Parts, Steel Bar
  • Dual Berettas: Scrap Metal, Weapon Parts, Steel Bar
  • Glock 17: Scrap Metal, Weapon Parts, Steel Bar
  • FN SCAR: Scrap Metal, Weapon Parts, Steel Bar
  • M-16: Scrap Metal, Weapon Parts, Steel Bar
  • MILKOR MGL: Scrap Metal, Weapon Parts, Steel Bar
  • Minigun: Scrap Metal, Turret Parts, Steel Bar
  • Shotgun: Scrap Metal, Weapon Parts, Steel Bar
  • VSS Vintorez: Scrap Metal, Weapon Parts, Steel Bar
  • Zip Gun: Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar, Steel Bar

Last but certainly not least in our Recycler guide for LDOE:S, you can disassemble the following objects to yield these delights:

  • Campfire: Pine Log, Limestone
  • Empty Can: Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar
  • Baked Beans: Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar
  • Beer: Aluminum Bar
  • Bandages: Piece of Cloth
  • Garden Bed: Pine Log
  • Shower: Pine Log, Iron Ore
  • Basic Backpack: Rope
  • Military Backpack: Rope, Thick Fabric, Steel Bar
  • Small Box: Pine Log
  • Chest: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal, Bolts
  • Trunk: Oak Plank, Steel Bar, Scrap Metal
  • Cozy Couch: Oak Plank, Scrap Metal, Thick Fabric
  • Dining Table: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal, Aluminum Bar
  • Melting Furnace: Limestone, Iron Ore
  • Woodworking Bench: Limestone, Iron Ore
  • Stonecutter's Table: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal
  • Workbench: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal, Stone Brick
  • Sewing Table: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal, Rubber Parts
  • Medical Table: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal, Duct Tape
  • Rain Catcher: Pine Log, Scrap Metal, Piece of Cloth
  • Weapon Stand: Oak Plank, Scrap Metal, Plastic
  • Lock and Key: Scrap Metal, Plastic
  • Doormat: Animal Rawhide, Rope
  • Comfortable Bed: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal, Thick Fabric
  • Horse Feeder: Oak Plank, Scrap Metal
  • Spike Trap: Pine Log, Rope, Scrap Metal
  • Trip Wire Trap: Oak Plank, Rope, Aluminum Bar
  • Refined Melting Furnace: Oak Plank, Stone Brick, Scrap Metal
  • Houseplant: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal
  • Meat Dryer: Pine Plank, Rope, Limestone
  • Tanning Rack: Pine Plank, Scrap Metal, Rope
  • Floor Lamp: Scrap Metal, Thick Fabric, Wiring
  • CAC Cards: Plastic
  • First Aid Kit: Piece of Cloth, Alcohol
  • Wrench: Scrap Metal, Steel Bar


That does it for our Last Day on Earth: Survival Recycler Guide! Did we miss anything? If you have any additional tips or strategies,let us know in the comments below, and we'll give you the credit!

As always, stay tuned to GameSkinny for more upcoming guides for this hot mobile game, including the new 1.8.2 skill guide. If you haven't already, be sure to check out our extensive collection of Last Day on Earth: Survival guides.

Risky Reels Is Fortnite's Best New Landing Zone Tue, 01 May 2018 14:50:04 -0400 Ty Arthur

It's time to throw all your best Fortnite landing and fighting strategies out the window, as the arrival of Season 4 completely shook up the map and added in brand-new items (check out the full Season 4 patch notes here).

After the arrival of the landscape-destroying meteor, the extremely high-traffic new Dusty Divot area, with its anti-gravity Hop Rock items, is currently the hot place to land, and that's exactly why you should avoid it if you want to make it to the top 10 of a match.

Everyone is landing at Dusty Divot and getting gunned down immediately as far too many eager players crowd into far too small of a location with far too few resources to go around.

Cautious and smart players will pick an alternate landing spot to find loot and harvest resources before descending on the Dusty Divot killing fields. Risky Reels is exactly the kind of location where you want to land now, featuring the drive-in theater area demolished in the Season 4 teaser video.

Fortnite map with the location of Risky Reels circled in red      Risky Reels Location

Risky Reels Landing Guide

This is currently the ultimate Fortnite landing location, as it is resource-rich, has plenty of places to take cover, and will have far fewer players to compete for those resources in the early game.

While skydiving from the Battle Bus, keep an eye out for other plummeting players. If several others hit the interior of Risky Reels, aim for the outside since you will be at a disadvantage in an immediate firefight if you land last.

The buildings outside Risky Reels are great for searching for floor loot, but the real goods are found by heading inside the drive-in theater area and weaving through the car maze.

Although there are far fewer of them here overall, Risky Reels does also include the brand-new Fortnite Hop Rock items that give you low-gravity jumping ability. These tend to be found inside the drive-in area itself, scattered on the ground around the cars.

As with the Hop Rocks at Dusty Divot, the anti-gravity boost lasts for 30 seconds and lets you leap much higher in the air. While this grants increased mobility for hanging out on top of freight trucks or building roofs, it also leaves you quite vulnerable in the air to anyone scanning the skies for flying enemies. Be on the lookout for ground-based players to snipe up at you!

 Grabbing a gold chest in the back of a car at Risky Reels

After properly gearing up in Risky Reels, a very solid strategy is to make your way through the high-cover tree areas of Wailing Woods, then hook southwest through Tomato Town on your trek towards Dusty Divot as the storm closes in.

Tomato Town features plenty of areas in which to take cover and resupply as necessary, while avoiding the majority of the firefights that will be brewing across the map as the storm shrinks the play area. By the time you hit Dusty Divot, you will probably be in the top 20 by default and have plenty of resources for building a fort or a sniping nest up in the sky.

From there, it's just down to skill and the luck of the draw as the final players duke it out around Retail Row, Dusty Divot, and Salty Springs.

 Scoping out Risky Reels from the outside

Where's your favorite spot to land in Fortnite's revamped Season 4 map, and do you have any great Risky Reels strategies we should try out?

Let us know in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides here for info all the weekly challenges and new weapon additions.

Essential Dusty Divot Tips & Tricks for Fortnite Season 4 (Plus How to Get Hop Rocks) Tue, 01 May 2018 14:36:32 -0400 Ty Arthur

The meteor has landed and Season 4 is finally here! Whether you play Save The World or Battle Royale, Fortnite will never be the same -- and that's a very good thing for players who want to shake up the experience.

As we all know now, Tilted Towers didn't get demolished by the comet, but another locale definitely did: Dusty Depot. And with its destruction, a brand new item has been born -- Hop Rocks. 

This guide will look at Fortnite's newest killing field, Dusty Divot, providing you with some tips and tricks on how to best approach and explore it. And on top of that, we'll also look at Hop Rocks, telling you how to use them, where to use them, and why you should be careful with them. 

Read on to find out how to get the advantage.  

Best Places to Land in Dusty Divot

Dusty Depot is now a gaping crater in the ground called Dusty Divot. Being the newest area in Fortnite, it's obviously one that will be swarming with players as soon as any match starts.

Where to Find Weapons

If you're looking for an early advantage on the weaponry front, land near the two dilapidated barns on the edge of the crater. These structures tend to have plenty to find. These some of the best places for avoiding fire, too, since there's plenty of room to hide behind, under, and above each barn.

Where to Find Loot

You can also sometimes pick up loot spawns at the crashed freight truck off to the side of the barns by the trees. Angle in this direction when you jump if a lot of players are going toward the barns. 

Otherwise, the best loot will be inside the crater in the walled-off section surrounding the meteor, which means either landing in that location directly (which will be filled to the brim with enemies), or grabbing a hop rock to leap over the wall.

How to Get Hop Rocks

Being one of the newest additions in Season 4, Hop Rocks have already become some of the most sought-after items in the game. Why? Because they make you levitate in zero-gravity

However, they aren't items that can go in your inventory. Once you find them in Dusty Divot, they can't be carried to other parts of the map. They can only be used in Dusty Divot.

To pick up a Hop Rock, just run up to one of the dozens in the brown section of the crater and hold the "Pickup" button to activate it.

How Long Does Anti-Gravity Last?

Sadly (or maybe not), these new anti-gravity items last for only 30 seconds. That will give you enough time to hop over the walls around the crash-landed meteor and explore the walled-off science laboratory inside.

Other Uses for Hop Rocks

You could also use a hop rock to get in a good position on the cliffs to the side of Dusty Divot. This is great for sniping, especially if you manage to find a weapon early. Also, be on the lookout for high jumping players, as they are vulnerable in the air.

 Picking up a hop rock and gaining some mighty anti-gravity jumping powers

The interior area of what was once Dusty Depot is a ton of fun to play, easily rivaling Tilted Towers. It has plenty of spots to hide, seek cover, and engage in either wall-building or grenade-throwing to maximum effect.

The brunt of most games are taking place entirely in this area right now, with 50 to 60 players biting the dust in the new area before the storm even gets a chance to shrink.

What's your best Dusty Divot landing and battling strategy in Fortnite Season 4? Let us know how you get your Victory Royales in the comments below, and stay tuned for more Season 4 coverage coming soon.

How to Unlock the Stellar Tier 1 Carbide Skin in Fortnite Season 4 Tue, 01 May 2018 13:48:12 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Season 4 of Fortnite is upon us -- and that means there's plenty of shiny new stuffs to get our hands on. Alongside a ton of new emotes, dances, and items, Epic's released a bevy of brand-new outfits into the battleverse, the most stellar being the Carbide skin.

Just like we saw with the Omega skin, Carbide holds true to Season 4's superhero theme. A Tier 1 skin, this outfit might not be as coveted as Omega, but that doesn't mean you won't look totally killer wearing it. If you're a true Fortnite player, this is a must-have piece of armor for your collection. 

To get it, you'll first need to purchase the Season 4 Battle Pass for 950 V-Bucks. After that, you'll be able to immediately throw it on. But to really rise to the top, there's a set of challenges that'll reward you with upgrades you won't want to miss. 

Related Content: 

How to Complete the Carbide Armor Challenges 

Like we mentioned in our Omega Skin guide, challenges are brand new to Fortnite this season. They give everyone, specifically high-end players, a reason to continue the grind, rewarding dedication with some of the game's slickest-lookin' skin upgrades and full armor sets.

If you want to stand out when you finally get that Victory Royale, completing these challenges is a no-brainer. 

  • Challenge 1: Reach Season Level 10
    • Reward: Chest Armor
  • Challenge 2: Reach Season Level 20
    • Reward: Leg Armor
  • Challenge 3: Reach Season Level 30
    • Reward: Arm Pieces
  • Challenge 4: Reach Season Level 40
    • Reward: Helmet
  • Challenge 5: Reach Season Level 65
    • Reward: Entire Upper Body Armor

When you complete three of the five challenges (Level 30), you'll also unlock the Carbide Pickaxe. 

How to Grind to Season Level 65 and Beyond 

You can read our entire Battle Royale Survival Guide to find out all of the tips and tricks for scoring experience points like a master. But outside of completing as many challenges as you possibly can, here are the main tips you'll need to know for making the most of your grind to Level 65 and beyond. 

  1. Play 50 vs. 50: This is where you'll get the most EXP in Fortnite. Typically, each match is relatively quick, and getting kills here can be easy. Start here. Other modes can bog you down. 

  2. Play WIth Other Battle Pass Holders: Doing this will team you up with other like-minded and (hopefully) high-level players. Plus, you get team boosts when playing with other Battle Pass owners. 

  3. Get High-Powered Weapons ASAP: This is a no-brainer. Nab a Rocket Launcher, Sniper Rifle, or a Shotgun early. ARs work well, too. 

  4. Get Victory Royale: Another way to look at this is "Last as Long as You Can." The longer you survive, the more EXP you'll get. This is a "Duh," but it's worth noting. 

  5. Listen Out for Double XP Events: Follow the Fortnite official Twitter here for updates on Double XP weekends and events. These can drastically decrease your grind time and get you to 100 super quick.  

  6. Don't AFK: Whatever you do, don't be that player that AFKs for experience points. Sure, it's an easy way to do it, but it's not cool. Plus, if you get reported enough, Epic will ban you -- meaning you'll have to start your grind all over again. It's just not worth it. 

Got other leveling tips that we've missed? Let us know in the comments below. We'll add them and give you credit! Be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides to get even more tips, tricks, and strategies for this hugely popular Battle Royale slugfest. 

How to Unlock the Badass Tier 100 Omega Skin in Fortnite Season 4 Tue, 01 May 2018 10:42:25 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Season 4 of Fortnite is upon us. And with that, Epic's unleashed a plethora of new Tier 100 rewards, with one of the most coveted being the new Omega skin. Not only does it look completely badass and like something right out of the Marvel superhero universe, but it's also the ultimate reward for Season 4. 

That means if you want bragging rights, the Omega skin is going to be an essential part of your collection. 

The first thing you're going to want to do is purchase the Season 4 Battle Pass for 950 V-Bucks if you've yet to do so. After that, well, it's going to be a grind. But at the end, you'll have all of this skin's upgrades (yes, upgrades). 

Below we'll go over what challenges you'll need to complete at each Season Level to customize this skin, as well as a few grinding tips to help you get to Tier 100 as fast as you can (unless you'd rather spend IRL money to get there faster...). 

Related Content: 

Omega Skin Challenges

Challenges are a brand-new addition to Fortnite Battle Royale in Season 4. We've never seen anything like this, but it's an update that's going to give everyone, especially high-level players, an even greater incentive to continue the grind. The base skin looks super cool, but after these upgrades, it'll look even better. 

  • Challenge 1: Reach Season Level 25
    • Upgrade: Chest Armor
  • Challenge 2: Reach Season Level 35
    • Upgrade: Leg Armor
  • Challenge 3: Reach Season Level 45
    • Upgrade: Arm Pieces
  • Challenge 4: Reach Season Level 55
    • Upgrade: Helmet
  • Challenge 5: Reach Season Level 80
    • Upgrade: Entire (Super Rad) Upper Body

Once you complete three of the five Challenges (Level 45), you'll also be rewarded with the Pickaxe that goes along with the Omega Skin. 

How to Grind to Tier 100 If You're Not There Yet

You can read our entire Battle Royale Survival Guide to find out all of the tips and tricks for scoring Victory Royale. But outside of completing as many challenges as you possibly can, here are the main tips you'll need to know for making the most of your grind to Tier 100. 

  1. Play 50 vs. 50: This is where you'll get the most EXP in Fortnite. Typically, each match is relatively quick, and getting kills here can be easy. Start here. Other modes can bog you down. 

  2. Play WIth Other Battle Pass Holders: Doing this will team you up with other like-minded and (hopefully) high-level players. Plus, you get team boosts when playing with other Battle Pass owners. 

  3. Get High-Powered Weapons ASAP: This is a no-brainer: Nab a Rocket Launcher, Sniper Rifle, or a Shotgun early. ARs work well, too. 

  4. Get Victory Royale: Another way to look at this is "Last as Long as You Can." The longer you survive, the more EXP you'll get. This is a "Duh," but it's worth noting. 

  5. Listen Out for Double XP Events: Follow the Fortnite official Twitter here for updates on Double XP weekends and events. These can drastically decrease your grind time and get you to 100 super quick.  

  6. Don't AFK: Whatever you do, don't be that player that AFKs for experience points. Sure, it's an easy way to do it, but it's not cool. Plus, if you get reported enough, Epic will ban you -- meaning you'll have to start your grind all over again. It's just not worth it. 

Got other leveling tips that we've missed? Let us know in the comments below. We'll add them and give you credit! Be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides to get even more tips, tricks, and strategies for this hugely popular Battle Royale slugfest. 

Header media: SwagXBL

Fortnite Season 4 Brings Hefty Changes to Both Battle Royale and Save the World Tue, 01 May 2018 09:19:00 -0400 Jonathan Moore

The moment we've all been waiting for is here: Fortnite Season 4 has finally made impact. With shards of the comet raining down and changing parts of Tilted Towers forever, players will not only find that the map has changed quite considerably from Season 3, but that there are brand-new items, new emotes, new sprays, levitating rocks, superheroes, new quests, and 100 tiers of Battle Pass rewards. 

It's a lot to take in. So if you've not had the chance to jump in yet and see what the new Season has in store, continue reading to find out all the major developments with this huge Fortnite update (we even include a few tips and tricks along the way).  

Changes to Battle Royale

Most of us are here for Fortnite's BR mode, so let's take a look at that first. Seeing as the update went live in the wee hours of the morning, we're going to update this article throughout the day with more specifics on certain items such as Hop Rocks, as well as link out to some brand-new guides we're whipping up. 

However, 99.999% of this patch notes roundup is good to go, so you won't miss out on any of the essential info. 

Related Content: 

Hop Rocks

This is currently the item we know very little about. If you travel to Dusty Depot, you'll find the area is now called Dusty Divot. And if you look around, you'll find Hop Rocks, which allow players to levitate in a bubble of low gravity. The effect lasts about 30 seconds and is primarily for getting on top of buildings in the Dusty Divot area. 

Unfortunately, it looks like you won't be able to take it to other parts of the map right now because of its short duratation. 

Weapon + Item Fixes (Tweaks)

The crossbow has been vaulted. RIP crossbow and early-game chicanery. 

As for everything else:

  • The Rocket Launcher's reticle is now a fixed size 
  • You can see hit markers when looking down the scope
  • Your pickaxe now deals 50 more damage to Supply Llamas 

Other issues laid out in the patch notes: 

  • Fixed an issue where a weapon could have no ammo when dropping it immediately after picking it up.
  • Improved pickaxe swing responsiveness when switching from a weapon to the pickaxe and immediately holding the swing button.
  • Fixed an issue that prevented Hunting Rifles from auto reloading if it was fired immediately after a reload.
  • Fixed an issue that allowed grenades to be thrown in rapid succession while sprinting.
  • Fixed an issue where aiming a grenade throw and then switching to build mode wouldn’t cancel the throw.
  • Fixed an issue with the Builder Pro configuration that caused the player's weapon to fire while trying to build in some cases.
  • Clingers will now properly cling to falling Supply Drops.
A player hiding behind pallets shoots at another player running across a warehouse floor

Gameplay Changes

If you've ever wanted to destroy the buildings on the starting island, now's your chance. On top of that, viewing distance on the starting island has been increased by 3x, meaning you can see players and their structures from much further away.

Knocking players off the island now counts as "normal fall damage," while fall damage values will be displayed in elimination feeds. 

You'll also be able to see the amount of damage being inflicted upon a player when spectating; hitboxes for player hands have been reduced, and headshots are now a priority -- even if "other body parts are in the way."  However, there is some minutia to know about that last tweak. 

  1. Headshots from above or straight on will always cause headshot damage regardless of the body part covering the head. 
  2. Headshots from below will deal normal damage if blocked by body parts. 
    • Headshot damage will only count if you're very close to your opponent. 
Replay System Tweaks and Fixes

The first Season 4 patch doesn't change a whole lot about Fortnite's new Replay System. However, it does bring with it some quality of life and UI changes. For instance, leaving replays will now take you back to the browser, while player lists have been added to replays. 

The size of the name column in the browser has also been increased, and renaming replays is now limited to 32 characters. 

UI Fixes 

Although tweaks and changes to the User Interface are often no more than quality of life upgrades, Season 4 fixes a few things that are very much worth noting. 


Players now have the ability to mark cosmetics as favorites, making searches through vast cosmetic collections easier. 

Emote Wheel Slots

The emote wheel now has more slots! According to the patch notes, you'll be able to use any Spray or Emote in your Battle Royale matches -- as long as you own them, of course. What's more, Season 4's new "Locker Emote Slot" key and button bindings mean it's even easier to bust out your dance moves or trigger a Spray. 

Changes to Save the World

Epic has been giving Save the World a little more love lately, especially with the release of the Noble Launcher and Sticky Grenades in Patch 3.6. However, Season 4 brings a whole lot more to the table. 

Blockbuster Event -- Part 1: Origin Story

If you've been paying attention to any of Epic's Fortnite marketing over the last week or so, you've noticed that superheroes have played a prominent role. And while we don't exactly know what they'll bring to the table in Season 4, we do know they'll heavily influence the events in Save the World. 

With Origin Story, you'll join Spitfire and Lok on a journey to find Ray. Across five missions and one crazy Landmark Mission, they'll recruit superheroes to their cause. With reports coming in that new husks have invaded the area, they're gonna need all the help they can get. 

On top of that, you'll have your choice of three Legendary weapons for completing Week 1's quests:

  1. Legendary Bald Eagle
  2. Legendary Silenced Specter
  3. Legendary Crossbow
Loot Drops

Get all ze loots. Enemies can now drop crafting items, as well as other ammunition and building materials. Kill patrolling enemies and packs for the greatest drop chance. To get the rarest loot, be sure to increase mission difficulty and fight larger enemies and bosses. 

Mini-Bosses Drop Caches

Caches are new items in Fortnite Save the World, and they come in two types: Schematic and Evolution Materials. Each Cache also comes in three rarities: Rare, Epic, and Legendary. 

  • Schematic Caches -- These contain a ranged or melee weapon schematic
  • Evolution Material Caches -- These contain Storm evolution materials 

To find better caches

  • Fight tougher enemies
  • Fight bosses
  • Look for High-Rarity Chests
  • Increase mission difficulty
Loot Llama Changes

Loot Llamas now cost less

  • Upgrade Llama Cost: 50 V-Bucks
  • Weapon Llama Cost: 200 V-Bucks
  • Range Weapon Llama: 200 V-Bucks
  • Melee Weapon Llama: 200 V-Bucks
  • People Llama: 200 V-Bucks
  • It's a Trap Llama: 200 V-Bucks

The best part about the price reduction is that players who have purchased these specific Llamas before the Season 4 update will get free Troll Stash Llamas

If you have 1,000 Storm Tickets, you'll get a Neon Llama, and Mini Llamas drop 30 to 50 gold. 

New Heroes, Classes, and Abilities

Season 4 brings quite a lot of changes to Save the World's heroes. From new shadow ops heroes to new subclasses and abilities, here's what's important to know from the patch notes: 

  • New Mythic Solder “Raven” -- Subclass: Nevermore
    • Description -- a Shadowy figure who screeches deafening War Cries before eliminating prey with his dual-wielded pistols.
    • New Ability
      • Lefty and Righty -- Deploy dual pistols and light up your enemies!
    • New Perks
      • ‘Dual Debilitation’ -- Lefty and Righty applies Debilitating Shots.
      • ‘Where’s Lefty’ -- Eliminating enemies with pistols reduces the cooldown of Lefty and Righty by 1 second.
      • ‘Bang and Pow’ -- Dealing damage with Lefty and Righty causes an explosion that deals Energy Damage in a 0.5 tile radius.
    • New Tactical Perk
      • ‘Explosive Rounds’ -- Tactical variant of the Explosive Rounds Perk.
  • New 8 “Shadow Ops” Heroes
    • Soldier -- New Subclass: Double Agent featuring New Characters Vaughn and Evelynn
      • Description -- Soldier that wields dual pistols with ease, creating an explosive outcome.
      • Utilizes the newly added ability and associated perks:
        • ‘Lefty and Righty’
        • ‘Dual Debilitation’
        • ‘Where’s Lefty’
        • ‘Bang and Pow’
      • New Tactical Perk
        • ‘Cluster Bomb’ -- Tactical variant of the ‘Cluster Bomb’ dealing half the damage of its non-tactical counterpart.
    • Ninja -- New Subclass: Piercing Lotus, featuring characters Edge and Luna
      • Description -- Skilled spear warrior that makes a point to poison enemies with waves of shuriken before striking them down.
      • New Perks
        • ‘Pointy Fury’ -- Increases spear combo attack efficiency by 150%.
        • ‘Poking Holes’ -- The Ninja deals 28% more damage with spears to afflicted targets.
        • ‘Fan of Stars’ -- The Ninja throws 2 additional throwing stars. All throwing stars are thrown instantly in a spreading arc.
      • New Support Perk
        • ‘Heaviest Attacks’ -- Increases melee heavy attack damage by 10/20/30%
    • Outlander -- New Subclass: Shock Gunner, featuring characters Grizzly and Buzz
      • Description -- Weaves in and out of enemies, stunning them and finishing them off with close-ranged weapons.
      • New Perks
        • ‘Pump It Up’ -- Increases shotgun rate of fire by 35%.
        • ‘In and Outlander’ -- Eliminating 3 enemies within 10 seconds after using Phase Shift will refund the Phase Shift charge.
        • ‘Shocking Embrace’ -- Increases the duration of Shock Tower by 3 seconds if placed with a Charge Fragment.
        • ‘Run And Stun’ -- Passing through enemies with Phase Shift applies a 3-second stun.
      • New Tactical Perk
        • ‘Shocking Embrace’ -- Increases the duration of Shock Tower by 3 seconds if placed with a Charge Fragment.
    • Constructor -- New Subclass: Demolitionist, featuring Penny and Bull
      • Description -- Explosives expert who corrals enemies with Decoy before finishing them with a hail of missiles.
      • New Perks
        • ‘Faster Explosions’ -- Increases explosive weapon reload speed by 35%.
        • ‘Enduring Machine’ --  Your weapons take 60% less durability damage while on tiles affected by BASE.

Knockbacks can no longer interrupt Hero Ability locks; the Shockwave "crowd-surfing" has been removed; and myriad display value tweaks have been made. 

Changes to Fortnite Mobile Battle Royale

If you're playing Fortnite on mobile, you'll be glad to know that Epic has pushed some specific Season 4 updates for iOS and Android devices.

Major additions come in the additions of "Repair Building" and "Cycle Weapon" buttons; drag and drop for item inventories; and autorun. 

According to the Patch notes, this update also: 

  • Made improvements to prevent finger creep.
  • Slightly decreased aim-assist strength at further distances to allow for easier fine tuning when aiming.
  • Grenade indicators are now displayed when grenades are equipped.
  • Made improvements to low-end mobile performance by dynamically scaling background draw distances with player height.
  • Reduced object draw distance for medium/lower-end iOS devices.


Those are all of the major additions you need to know about Season 4 right out the gate. If you want to see everything that was tweaked in the newest Fortnite update, check out the official patch notes for smaller bug fixes, as well as performance, audio, and art improvements. 

And if you're looking for tips and strategies to take your Battle Royale game to the next level, check out our Fortnite guides here

Harry Potter Hogwarts Mystery Answers For Class Quizzes Mon, 30 Apr 2018 17:23:20 -0400 Ty Arthur

The sorting hat picked your house, you got the wand you always wanted, and you've finally learned how to cast Expelliarmus for unsanctioned duels... but there's a lot more to becoming a wizard or witch still to learn in Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery.

During the course of your magical education you will have to actually *gulp* study books and learn answers to quiz questions! Let's get started so you can pass your classes with the highest marks.

Hogwarts Mystery Class Quiz Answers

After burning through energy to flip pages, glare at Merula, and pass notes to Rowan, eventually you will get either a test of skill by having to tap at a specific time, or instead you will get a pop quiz.

Every single Hogwarts class question and answer we've discovered so far is listed below so you can ace your Hogwarts classes! Note that these seem to arrive randomly, so you may not get them in the order listed below.

Potions Class Answers

These questions can be asked by Professor Snape during the Potions Class when he's not berating you and threatening to expel you like your erstwhile brother:

  • Question - What is the best way to extract juice from the Sopophorous Bean? Answer - Crush it.
  • Question - What kind of cauldron do first year students need to use? Answer: Pewter.
  • Question - Which ingredient is not used in the Shrinking Solution? Answer: Rotten Egg.
  • Question - Who wrote the book "Magical Draughts and Potions?" Answer: Arsenius Jigger.

 Learning to brew potions with Professor Snape

Flying Lessons Answers

These questions can be asked by Professor Hooch in the middle or at the end of flying lessons as she tries to keep you from plummeting to your death:

  • Question - Which of these is not a variety of broom? Answer: Occamy
  • Question -  What do you say to summon a broom to your hand? Answer: Up
  • Question - Where are flying lessons held? Answer: The Training Ground
  • Question - A Firebolt is a type of what? Answer: Broom
    ​​Question -  Madam Hooch has distinct yellow what? Answer: Eyes
  • Question - No spell yet devised allows a wizard to do what? Answer: Fly Unaided
  • Question - What is the name of America’s magical government? Answer: MACUSA
  • Question - Who is the Flying Professor? Answer: Madam Hooch
  • Question - Who is the Potions Professor? Answer: Professor Severus Snape
  • Question - Who is the Divination Professor? Answer: Professor Trelawney

 Learning to ride a broom with Profess Hooch

Charms Class Answers

The diminutive Professor Flitwick will test your knowledge with these questions during Charms Class:

  • Question - Who teaches care of magical creatures? Answer: Silvanus Kettleburn.
  • Question - What is the effect of the Stupefy spell? Answer: Stun You.
  • Question - What does the charm Lumos provide? Answer: Light.
  • Question- Before Dumbledore, who was the headmaster of Hogwarts? Answer: Armando Dippet
  • Question - What is the name of the wizard village near Hogwarts? Answer: Hogsmeade.
  • Question - Who is the History of Magic Professor? Answer: Professor Binns.
  • Question - What does Professor Vector teach? Answer: Arithmancy.
  • Question - Why would you Cast Alohomora? Answer: Unlock a Door.
  • Question - Which of these is not a cleaning spell? Answer: Confrigo.
  • Question - Who is the Transfiguration Professor? Answer: Professor Minerva McGonagall.
  • Question - What kind of spell is Flipendo? Answer: Jinx

 Answering a question wrong in Charms Class - try paying more attention!

With a full seven years of Hogwarts classes available and the delay in playing due to the constant energy timers, there are almost certainly more down the line we haven't discovered yet.

Have you come across any other Harry Potter Hogwarts Mystery questions and answers not listed here? Let us know and we'll get this article updated! Be sure to also check out our other Hogwarts Mystery guides below:

Fortnite Guess The Picture Quiz Answer Guide (Levels 51 to 100) Mon, 30 Apr 2018 17:05:30 -0400 Tobbpitt

Maybe you used our guide to Levels 1 through 50, or maybe you've just now wandered to this guide set for the almighty Google. In any case, we're going to go over the second half of the levels currently in Fortnite Guess The Picture Quiz!

This section is laid out just like the answer guide for the first half of the levels. A small-scale screenshot of the level's image and the level number are to the left with the answer to the right.

When playing the game, you can see which level you are at by looking at the top of the screen. You can tap the level number to choose another level if you know you need to go back and complete one.

Playing an image recognition game is fun, but the actual Fortnite game is far more entertaining. If you found this guide useful, check out our whole library of Fortnite guides so you can make sure to secure that Victory Royale every time. 

Image/Level Answer
Level 51
 Fatal Fields
Level 52
Wailing Woods
 Level 53
 Tomato Town
 Level 54
 Junk Junction
 Level 55
 Level 56
 Level 57
 Level 58
 Level 59
 Level 60
 Level 61
 Level 62
Best Mates
 Level 63
Dusty Depot
 Level 64
 Level 65
Merry Marauder
 Level 66
 Level 67
 Level 68
 Level 69
The Reaper
 Level 70
 Moisty Mire
 Level 71
 Level 72
 Level 73
Rabbit Raider
Level  74
 Level 75
 Level 76
 Level 77
 Level 78
 Level 79
 The Worm
 Level 80

 Level 81
 Love Ranger
 Level 82
 Level 83
 Level 84
 Level 85

 Level 86
 Level 87
 Level 88
 Level 89
 Skull Trooper
 Level 90
 Level 91
Slow Clap 
 Level 92
 Level 93
 Level 94
 Dance Moves
 Level 95
 Level 96
 Level 97
 Level 98
 Level 99
 Level 100


With that, we wrap up all of the current 100 questions found in Fortnite Guess The Picture Quiz. Here's to hoping for more questions, some that are a bit more tricky would be nice!

Fortnite Guess The Picture Quiz Answer Guide (Levels 1 to 50) Mon, 30 Apr 2018 17:01:25 -0400 Tobbpitt

So you think you know your Fortnite? The Fortnite Guess the Picture Quiz tests you on your knowledge of the locations, items, and weaponry you come across in the game.

You may know plenty about Fortnite. You may know all the item names, all the locations, and all the weapons -- but can you name them off the top of your head if given a vague picture as a hint?

Probably most of them -- but not all.

This guide will help you do that. You can look on the top of the screen to see which level you're on and scroll down to the level number to get the answer. This part of the guide is for Level 1 through Level 50. Head over to the levels 51 through 100 answer guide for the rest of the answers!

Image/Level Answer
Level 1
 Level 2
Anarchy Acres 
  Level 3
  Level 4
 Boogie Bomb
  Level 5
 Dusty Depot
  Level 6
  Level 7
 Haunted Hills
  Level 8
Lonely Lodge 
  Level 9
  Level 10
 Chug Jug
  Level 11
 Lucky Landing
  Level 12
 Snobby Shores
  Level 13
  Level 14
 Tilted Towers
  Level 15
  Level 16
 Junk Junction
  Level 17
 Launch Pad
  Level 18
Haunted Hills 
  Level 19
 Loot Lake
  Level 20
 Loot Llama
  Level 21
 Loot Lake
  Level 22
 Lucky Landing
  Level 23
Moisty Mire 
  Level 24
  Level 25
 Burst Rifle
   Level 26
 Wailing Woods
   Level 27
Dusty Depot 
   Level 28
 Flush Factory
   Level 29
   Level 30
 Greasy Grove
   Level 31
 Pump Shotgun
  Level 32
 Pleasant Park
  Level 33
 Shield Potion
  Level 34
 Shifty Shafts
  Level 35
Greasy Grove 
   Level 36
 Heavy Shotgun
  Level 37
 Shifty Shafts
Level 38
 Slurp Juice
Level 39
 Snobby Shores
Level 40
 Retail Row
Level 41
 Hunting Rifle
Level 42
Tomato Town 
Level 43
 Lonely Lodge
Level 44
Smoke Grenade 
   Level 45
   Level 46
Pleasant Park
   Level 47
V Bucks
   Level 48
Salty Springs
   Level 49
Tilted Towers
   Level 50
Submachine Gun


Don't forget we also have the answers for levels 51 through 100. If you're way more interested in upping your actual Fortnite game instead, check out our extensive Fortnite guides!

How to Play Stardew Valley Multiplayer Mon, 30 Apr 2018 16:45:32 -0400 Ashley Gill

The day has finally come! Farmers the world over are ecstatic. Stardew Valley finally has multiplayer, at least in some form.  

The game's multiplayer works just like much of the playerbase had hoped. Each player on a server has their own cabin and inventory, and they can do pretty much all the same things the host player can do. However, there are some exceptions.

You may be happy to know that this newest patch comes with the ability to marry other players in-game, which can be done using a Wedding Ring. But you may be less happy to find that only the GoG and Steam versions of Stardew Valley can be played multiplayer at this time.

However, before you decide to hop into the beta branch and give multiplayer a whirl, be sure to back up your saved data before you apply the beta branch.

Here's how to get things rolling like a cheese wheel. 

Step 1. Opt-in for the beta

Let's go over this bit by bit, as this itself is a multi-step process.

  1. Right click on Stardew Valley in your Steam library
  2. Click on 'Properties'
  3. Click on the 'Betas' tab
  4. Enter the code jumpingjunimos in the 'Enter beta access code to unlock private betas' section
  5. Click 'Check code'
  6. Click on the drop menu under 'Select the beta you would like to opt in to'
  7. Click on 'beta -- Help new test updates before they go live!'
  8. Close the Properties window

The game will now download and install a small update. It will also say [beta] next to the title in your library.

Step 2. Prepare Your Current Farm or Start Anew

You can either bring your friends onto your current farm to help tend your land, or you can start a new, fresh farm.

Whichever route you decide to take, you need to have space for other players to join you. This is as easy as choosing how many cabins are available to start when making a new farm under the new Co-op option on the main screen. But it does require some extra preparation if you want to bring people to your established farm.

How to prepare your farm for other players

You have to build enough cabins to host your friends before you can invite them. Each guest needs a cabin.

You can go to Robin to request she build cabins for you.

Luckily, they are super cheap. Each cabin costs a mere 100 Gold and 10 Stone. What a steal!

This is also how you add more cottages later if you made a new farm for multiplayer and started with only one or two cottages and want to add another.

Once the cabins are built, you can invite your friends or have random people join, depending on your server settings.

Step 3. Have Other Players Join Your Game

If you are hosting your farm, you can go in to the Settings menu while in-game and alter some things. You can set the server to be friends-only, invite-only, or shut the server down using the offline option.

You can toggle the 'Accept IP connections' option to allow players on your network to play with you via LAN as well.

Provided both you and your friends are logged onto Steam, your friends should be able to see your farm on their Co-op menu and join from there.

You can use the 'Invite Friend' button to invite your friends on the Steam or GoG versions of Stardew Valley.

You can also give your friends an invite code to join their game if they are using either Steam or GoG. This is best for players who are not on your friends list. You can find your invite code in the Settings menu by scrolling down and finding the 'Show Invite Code' option. Nab the code and share it with your friends to join your server.


It all sounds complicated, but in function, it's very easy to get Stardew Valley's multiplayer up and running -- even now in its beta. Give it a try. It's not as hard to get working as it looks.

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Guide: How to Get T-elos and Poppibuster Rare Blades Sat, 28 Apr 2018 17:47:46 -0400 Autumn Fish

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 recently received its 1.4.0 patch update, and with it comes a couple of new Rare Blades, with the promise of more to come throughout the month of May. All players can now find the Rare Blade T-elos, a character from Xenosaga, for absolutely free. Poppibuster is also free, but only for owners of the Expansion Pass.

What's more, you can't just grab these Rare Blades right out of the gate, either. There's a bit of setup required to get each one. But their battle abilities make them well worth it, so let's get this guide started.

How to Get T-elos

T-elos is the easiest of the new Rare Blades to get -- given you've beaten the game. In order to obtain her, you simply need to open Core Crystals in the Advanced New Game mode (aka NG+), which you can access from the Title Menu after watching the credits roll.

As per usual for DLC Blades in Xenoblade Chronicles 2, her encounter rate is actually fairly high, so don't worry about farming too many Core Crystals.

T-elos is a Dark element ATK Blade that wields a scythe under the Greataxe weapon class. Her focus is all about maximizing damage potential, with Battle Skills that increases damage for each defeated enemy. They even increase damage whenever you die in combat. 

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Rare Blades T-elos and Poppibuster

How to Get Poppibuster

Poppibuster is only available to DLC owners. To get this Rare Blade, you'll nee to complete a tricky side quest. Here are the steps you need to take, all in the proper order. 

First, you need to have Poppy α, Nia, and Morag in your Party and be on Chapter 5 or beyond in order to start the quest. Then, you must accept the Shiny New Power quest from the DLC Blade List -- Distribution 1 gift in the Expansion Pass menu.

Once you've done that, head over to Tora's House in Torigoth, and you'll trigger a cutscene to start the quest. You're asked to gather data by performing specific Special Attacks with different types of Common Blades.

Specifically, this Xenoblade 2 quest will task you with performing the following attacks:

  • Beam Barrage: The Level 3 Special Attack of a Common Female Blade wielding an Ether Cannon.

  • Assault Rush: The Level 2 Special Attack of a Common Male Blade wielding Knuckle Claws.

  • Dual Fang: The Level 2 Special Attack of a Common Dog Blade wielding Twin Rings.

  • Axe Throw: The Level 3 Special Attack of a Common Male Blade wielding a Greataxe.

  • Aerial Shield: The Level 1 Special Attack of a Common Female Blade wielding a Shield Hammer.

  • Flash Bomb: The Level 1 Special Attack of a Common Female Blade wielding a Bitball.

  • Beam Halberd: The Level 2 Special Attack of a Common Giant Blade wielding a Megalance.

  • Multi Raid: The Level 3 Special Attack of a Common Male Blade wielding a Chrome Katana.

Since Special Attacks differ depending on the type of Common Blade you're using, you'll need to have a bunch of really specific Blades on hand in order to complete this quest.

You'll likely find yourself opening more than a few Core Crystals just to try and find the right Common Blades for the job -- especially for the Meglance-wielding Giant, considering the Giant variant is rare enough as is.

Once the data for all eight of the Special Attacks have been collected, you'll just need to follow the quest objective to talk to an NPC. Afterward, pop over to find a treasure chest for them, and then talk to the NPC again. You'll receive Poppibuster.

This Rare Blade is unique because it's not bonded to anyone. In other words, it can be used by any member in the Party.

She's a Light element TNK Blade that wields a Shield Hammer. Her unique combat abilities make her an excellent choice for the Main Tank in your party. Not only is she good at drawing aggro, but she's great at dealing damage when she has that aggro.

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Rare Blade Poppibuster

While T-elos and Poppibuster aren't the easiest Rare Blades to get, they are certainly worth picking up, especially for those who want more of this fantastic RPG. 

What do you think of the New Rare Blades? And what kinds of Rare Blades do you think the developers plan on adding next? Sound off in the comments below!

If you need any more help on your journeys in Alrest, be sure to check out some of our Xenoblade Chronicles 2 guides:

Fortnite Save The World Complete Weapons List Guide Fri, 27 Apr 2018 14:24:13 -0400 Ty Arthur

If you plan on defending your storm shield and completing missions while taking out thousands of husks in Fortnite's Save the World mode, your hero is going to need some serious firepower!

Luckily, there's no shortage of weaponry in Save The World, with hundreds of pistols, assault rifles, sniper rifles, rocket launchers, axes, hydraulic sledgehammers, and more ready to deal some cartoon zombie death!

Below we cover the entire Save The World weapon list from beginning to end, along with each weapon's Damage Per Second stats and crafting requirements. Note that this is a drastically different selection of death dealers than the Battle Royale mode's weapon list

Every Weapon in Fortnite Save The World 

Because every weapon can be leveled repeatedly -- and then even evolved to higher stages for more leveling -- the DPS and specific numbers of each crafting requirement may look different on your screen. The data listed here is based on Level 1 stats.

Most of these weapons also have upgraded crystal versions with slightly different crafting requirements that tend to have much higher base DPS values -- check the Collection Book section for specific info on creating the crystal versions, which are not listed below.

 Cyber Ranged Weapons
Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Krypton Pistol Epic 616 7 Quartz, 18 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
Krypton Pistol   Legendary  662.2 8 Quartz, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 10 Batteries
Helium Shotgun  Epic  756.8 5 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Helium Shotgun  Legendary  824.8 6 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Argon Assault Rifle Epic  609.8 7 Quartz, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Argon Assault Rifle  Legendary  665/3 7 Quartz, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries


Cyber Melee Weapons
Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
Argon Axe  Epic 167.5 5 Rough Ore, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
Argon Axe   Legendary 179.9 6 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Neon Scythe Epic 210.0 5 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
  Neon Scythe  Legendary 226.8 6 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Krypton Sword Epic 259.2 5 Rough Ore, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper, 8 Batteries
 Krypton Sword  Legendary 280.9  6 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries


Assault Rifles
Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
Assault Rifle   Common  554.4 5 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Striker  Uncommon  628.3 8 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Breacher Rare  700.5 10 Blast Powder, 18 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Silver Ore
 Equalizer Epic  776.2 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Siegebreaker  Legendary  850.1 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
Burst Assault Rifle  Common  529.2 5 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
Scalpel  Uncomon  604.8 8 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
Razor  Rare  655.2  10 Blast Powder, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Razorwire Epic  730.8 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Razorblade  Legendary  806.4 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Trooper Epic  689.9 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
Ranger   Legendary  755.6 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Light Machine Gun Rare  739.2 10 Blast Powder, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Bullet Swarm Epic  813.1 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Terminator  Legendary  887.0 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Semi-Auto Rifle Common  492.8 5 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Old Faithful Uncommon  566.7 8 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
Predator  Rare  616.0 10 Blast Powder, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Raptor Epic  724.4 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
Hunter-Killer   Legendary  739.2 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Slug Gun Rare  679.1 10 Blast Powder, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Hammershot Epic  743.8 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Hammercrush  Legendary  808.5 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Nightlance Epic  663.1 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Deathstalker  Legendary  620.9 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Raygun Epic  616.0 7 Quartz, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Deathray  Legendary   665.3 7 Quartz, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries

Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Automatic Shotgun  Uncommon  887.0 10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Kodiak Rare  985.6 12 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Bearcat Epic  1084.2 15 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Tigerjaw  Legendary  1182.7 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell,11 Copper Ore
 Roomsweeper  Legendary  1164.2 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell,11 Copper Ore
 Double-Barreled Shotgun Common  693.0 10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Strongarm  Uncommon 776.2 10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Double-Punch Rare  868.6 12 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Shockwave Epic 951.7  15 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Thunderbolt  Legendary  1044.1 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Enforcer Epic  552.6 15 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Longarm Enforcer  Legendary  600.6 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Pump-Action Shotgun Common 474.3  10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
Knight   Uncommon  535.3 10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Crusader Rare  592.9 12 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Templar Epic  653.9 12 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 The Bear  Legendary  711.5 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Tactical Shotgun Common  369.6 10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
Puma Uncommon  416.4 10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Panther Rare  463.2 12 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Precision Panther Rare  439.8 12 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Clipper Epic  482.3 15 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Nightlcaw  Legendary  526.7 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Over-Under Shotgun Uncommon  600.6 10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
Rustler  Rare  674.5 12 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Bandit Epic  739.2 15 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Maverick  Legendary  803.9 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Semi-Auto Shotgun  Uncommon  933.2 10 Planks, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Charger Rare  1044.1 12 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Stallion Epic  1145.8 15 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Stampede  Legendary  1247.4 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Backbreaker  Legendary  924.0 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore

Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Machine Pistol  Common  646.8 5 Blast Powder, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Snakebite  Uncommon  813.1 8 Blast Powder, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Rattler Rare  831.6 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Cobra Epic  877.8 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Viper  Legendary  970.2 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Ripper Rare  739.2 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Slasher Epic  813.1 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Thrasher  Legendary  887.0 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Cyclone Epic   1053.4 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
Monsoon   Legendary  1164.2 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Bolt Revolver Common  492.8 5 Blast Powder, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Bolt Slinger  Uncommon  554.4 8 Blast Powder, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Junkyard Pal Rare  616.0 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
Bolstorm  Epic  631.4 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Bolt Bolt  Legendary  693.0 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Dragon Epic  744.1 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
Dragon's Breath   Legendary  813.1 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Firecracker Rare  813.0 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Liberator Epic  847.5  12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Freedom's Shield  Legendary  970.2 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
Tiny Instrument Of Death   Legendary  1386.0 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Handcannon Rare  480.5 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Lawbringer Epic  523.6 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Judge  Legendary  572.9 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Shrike Rare  469.7 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Kestrel Epic  515.9 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Falcon  Legendary   569.8 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Quickfire Pistol Rare  640.6 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Haywire Epic   714.6 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
Haywire Storm   Legendary  788.5 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Semi-Auto Handgun Common  462.0 5 Blast Powder, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Outlaw  Uncommon  517.4 8 Blast Powder, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Vigilante Rare  572.9 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Vendetta Epic  628.3 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Jackal  Legendary  702.2 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 
 Revoiver Common  492.8 5 Blast Powder, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Dealmaker  Uncommon  554.4 8 Blast Powder, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Nighthawk Rare  616.0 10 Blast Powder, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
Space Pistol  Epic  640.6 7 Quartz, 18 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Space Invader  Legendary  702.2 7 Quartz, 24 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Zapper Epic  180.2 7 Quartz, 18 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Zap Zapp  Legendary  197.1 7 Quartz, 24 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Bald Eagle  Legendary  352.4 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore 

Sniper Rifles
Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Laser Rifle Rare  242.6 10 Blast Powder, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
Powered Laser Rifle  Epic  255.6 7 Quartz, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
Zapotron   Legendary  277.2 7 Quartz, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Automatic Sniper Rifle  Uncommon  418.9 8 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
Extinguisher  Rare  468.2 10 Blast Powder, 18 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Exterminator Epic  505.1 12 Blast Powder, 24 Simple Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Deathwing  Legendary  554.4 15 Blast Powder, 30 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
Scoped Wasp  Epic  446.6 10 Blast Powder, 18 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Scoped Dragonfly  Legendary  485.1 15 Blast Powder, 30 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Bolt-Action Rifle Common  172.5 5 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Bullseye  Uncommon  189.9 8 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Deadeye Rare  216.8 10 Blast Powder, 18 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Scoped Bullseye Rare  216.5 10 Blast Powder, 18 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Scoped Deadeye Epic  236.5 10 Blast Powder, 24 Simple Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
One Shot   Legendary  258.7 15 Blast Powder, 30 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Shredder Epic  507.6 10 Blast Powder, 24 Simple Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Super Shredder  Legendary  554.4 15 Blast Powder, 30 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Hunting Rifle Common  339.6 5 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Lil' Bee  Uncommon  361.9 8 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
Stinger  Rare  408.1 10 Blast Powder, 18 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Wasp Epic  446.6 10 Blast Powder, 24 Simple Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Dragonfly  Legendary  485.1 15 Blast Powder, 30 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Burst Sniper Epic  591.4 10 Blast Powder, 24 Simple Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Triple Tap  Legendary  650.5  15 Blast Powder, 30 Simple Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore

Explosive Weapons
Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Grenade Launcher Rare  779.1 10 Blasting Powder, 8 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Copper
 Blooper Epic  630.6 12 Blasting Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Copper
 Thumper  Legendary   689.9 15 Blasting Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Copper
 Rocket Launcher Rare  866.2 10 Blasting Powder, 8 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Copper
 Missile Launcher Epic  954.0 12 Blasting Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Copper
 Bazooka  Legendary  1039.5 15 Blasting Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Copper

Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
Shortblade  Common  184.5 10 Rough Ore, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Machete  Uncommon 220.6 10 Rough Ore, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Shortblade Slicer Rare 257.8 12 Rough Ore, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Nightcleave Epic 282.9 15 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Stabsworth The III  Legendary 310.5 20 Rough Ore, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Ruler Sword Common  190.2 10 Rough Ore, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore 
 Ninjato  Uncommon  210.0 10 Rough Ore, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Shadow Blade Rare  225.6 12 Rough Ore, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Rageblade Epic  258.0 15 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Slice N' Dice  Legendary  282.0 20 Rough Ore, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Two-Handed Sword Common  163.2 10 Rough Ore, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Claymore Uncommon  182.4 10 Rough Ore, 12 Rough Mineral Powder, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Highlander Rare  206.4 12 Rough Ore, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
Greatsword  Epic  225.6 15 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
Huskcleaver   Legendary  244.8 20 Rough Ore, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Laserblade Epic  264.0 5 Rough Ore, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
Stormblade   Legendary  288.0 6 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries

Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Bootaxe Common   156.0 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Ski Axe Uncommon   174.0 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Ski Cleaver Rare  192.0 12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Antler Axe Epic  196.2 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Claxe  Legendary  214.0 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
Handmade Axe  Common  135.7 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Fire Axe  Uncommon  151.2 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Splinter Axe Rare  166.7  12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Skullcleave Epic  182.2 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Revenant's Wrath  Legendary  201.6 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Stop Axe  Common  121.0 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Fractured Axe  Uncommon  132.0 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Greataxe Rare  148.9  12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Boneshatter Epic  164.4 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Stormchaser's Revenge  Legendary  179.9 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Laser Axe Epic  186.1 5 Quartz, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Armaggeddon  Legendary  205.5 6 Quartz, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries

Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
Simple Pitchfork  Common  158.2 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Pitchfork  Uncommon  179.2 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Mighty Pitchfork Rare  201.6 12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Skewer Epic  220.3 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Whirling Doom  Legendary  238.9 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Lacerator Rare  201.6 12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Bloodletter Epic  220.3 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Dissector  Legendary  238.9 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Laser Trident Epic  227.7 5 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Farmer's Glory Legendary   246.4 6 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries

Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Hockey Stick  Common  150.3 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Claw Rake  Uncommon  169.5 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Reaver Rare  188.7 12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Scythe Epic  207.9 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Elegant Scythe  Legendary  227.1 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Laser Scythe Epic  211.1 5 Rough Ore, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Reaper Scythe  Legendary  230.3 6 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries

Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
Baseball Bat   Common  115.2 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
 Slugger  Uncommon  131.4 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 Mighty Slugger Rare  148.8 12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Fortsville Slugger 2000 Epic  168.0 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Fortsville Slugger 3000  Legendary  182.4 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Driver  Uncommon  124.5 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
Mighty Driver  Rare  137.4 12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore
 Tremendous Driver Epic  150.3 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Masters Drive  Legendary  163.1 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Cricket Bat Common  171.4 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 2 Duct Tape, 1 Copper Ore
Husk Hazer   Uncommon 182.4 10 Planks, 12 Stringy Twine, 4 Duct Tape, 3 Copper Ore
 The Initiator Rare  206.4 12 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 1 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore


Ranged Vacuum Tube Weapons (Holiday Survival)
Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Vacuum Tube Rifle Epic  569.8 7 Quartz, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
Vacuum Tube Rifle   Legendary  631.4 7 Quartz, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Lightning Pistol Epic  1016.4 7 Quartz, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
  Lightning Pistol   Legendary  1108.8 7 Quartz, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Vacuum Tube Revolver Epic  511.3 7 Quartz, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
  Vacuum Tube Revolver  Legendary  554.4 7 Quartz, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Vacuum Tube Shotgun Epic  802.4 5 Planks, 18 Rough Mineral Powder 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Vacuum Tube Shotgun  Legendary  875.4 6 Planks, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Vacuum Tube Sniper Rifle Epic  665.3 7 Quartz, 18 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
  Vacuum Tube Sniper Rifle  Legendary  739.2 7 Quartz, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Vacuum Tube Launcher Epic  869.6 12 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Copper Ore
Vacuum Tube Launcher   Legendary  948.6 15 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Copper Ore


Hydraulic Weapons (Storm Zone)
Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Hydraulic Assault Rifle Epic  474.3 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Nailer  Legendary  508.2 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Hydra   Legendary  762.3 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Hydraulic Shotgun Epic  428.0 15 Planks, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Pummeller  Legendary  465.7 20 Planks, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Hydraulic Pistol Epic 471.2  12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Piston Spitter  Legendary  517.4 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
Hydraulic Sniper Rifle  Epic  286.4 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Tsunami  Legendary  314.2 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Hydro Launcher Epic 1032.6  12 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Copper Ore
 Dam Bauster  Legendary  1127.3 15 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Copper Ore
 Hydraulic Sword Epic  239.6 5 Rough Ore, 18 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Pressure Cutter  Legendary   244.8 6 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Hydraulic Spear Epic  206.3 5 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Sawtooth  Legendary  222.1 6 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries
 Hydraulic Sledge Epic  133.3 5 Planks, 18 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 5 Copper Ore, 8 Batteries
 Pulverizer  Legendary  146.0 6 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 8 Copper Ore, 10 Batteries

Dragon Weapons (Spring It On)
Weapon Rarity DPS Crafting Requirements
 Dragon Rifle Epic  508.2 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Dragon's Roar  Legendary  554.4 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
Dragon Rocket Launcher  Epic  123.2 12 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 2 Copper Ore
 Dragon's Fury  Legendary  135.5 15 Blast Powder, 12 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Copper Ore
 Dragon Blunderbuss Epic  1737.4 12 Blast Powder, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Dragon's Might  Legendary  1895.4 15 Blast Powder, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Dragon Sniper Rifle Epic  334.2 12 Blast Powder, 24 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Dragon's Claw  Legendary  366.5 15 Blast Powder, 30 Rusty Mechanical Parts, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Dragon Sword Epic  225.6 15 Rough Ore, 24 Rough Mineral Powder, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Dragon's Tooth  Legendary  244.8 20 Rough Ore, 30 Rough Mineral Powder, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore
 Dragon Spear Epic  220.3 15 Planks, 24 Stringy Twine, 3 Rotating Gizmo, 8 Copper Ore
 Dragon's Fang  Legendary  238.9 20 Planks, 30 Stringy Twine, 1 Active Powercell, 11 Copper Ore

Notice any missing weapons added in a recent update or any stats that have been tweaked? Let us know in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides here covering both Save The World and Battle Royale modes!

Korgan Beginner's Guide: Dungeoneering for Dummies Fri, 27 Apr 2018 10:36:14 -0400 RobotsFightingDinosaurs

Korgan, on its surface, seems like a very hard game to understand. The novel character-switching mechanic (with each character having their own stats to keep track of, natch), the traps (oh god, the traps), equipment management, and leveling -- it's all pretty overwhelming at first. Plus, the tutorial isn't super helpful. Luckily, the game's systems quickly prove themselves to be much shallower than they appear to be. That's why we've put together this Korgan beginner's guide, to show you that dungeoneering doesn't need to be that hard.

Korgan Beginner's Guide

In order to successfully navigate the dungeons, first you'll need to familiarize yourself with the three characters you'll be controlling.

Meet The Characters

The Warrior

As you might expect, the warrior is going to function as your tank throughout the episodes, and since health potions are going to be few and far between on your journey, he'll be a character you rely on to soak up the damage. Here's a rundown of his most important abilities.

  • Armor

Unlike the other characters, who have a mana or energy bar, the warrior has an armor bar. The tutorial doesn't explain this at all, but as you get hit, you may notice that your health bar doesn't go down. Instead, your armor bar will. The nice thing about this is that the armor bar will replenish over time, so you can soak up some hits, take cover, then rejoin the fray.

  • Earthquake

The warrior's heavy move can be upgraded so that it does splash damage, as well as additional damage to foes that have been frozen by the mage. This is key, since early on, you'll have trouble outrunning foes. This makes the earthquake combo very powerful. Invest your upgrade points here early.

  • Inferno

This is the warrior's special skill. It doubles both damage received and taken, so use it with caution (and preferably a full armor bar).

The Mage

Korgan's mage really only has two abilities you'll need to be aware of, so we'll focus on those two for our Korgan beginner's guide: the iceball and the storm. She's a bit of a glass cannon, so try to only attack from range. Swap if you get swarmed. Also be aware, all of the mage's attacks use mana, so if you're running low, retreat for a bit to regain your stock.

  • Iceball

As we stated above, this, in combination with the warrior's heavy move, results in an incredibly strong combo, assuming you've unlocked the appropriate upgrade for the warrior. 

  • Storm

This is an area of effect attack, most useful against a scattered group of enemies. Use it before they notice you, then clean up the scraps.

The Hunter

The hunter is without a doubt the most useful character in the game. She is incredibly effective both close-up and at range. Her attacks use energy, which operates the exact same way that mana does for the mage.

  • Disarm traps

Because of the way movement works in Korgan, disarming traps is dicey. If you see one (indicated by a red highlighted area), immediately swap to the hunter, and very, VERY slowly tap the joystick towards it. The activation radius for traps is incredibly unforgiving, so take it slow and really inch up on those traps.

  • Multi-shot

The hunter's heavy attack unleashes three arrows instead of one, and if you upgrade the hunter's arrow damage, you'll find that this is the most powerful move in the game, especially if you're able to run straight up to a target and hit them with all three arrows at once. Just get out of there before you get clobbered!

  • Deadly multi-shot

Korgan's hunter's special attack operates in a similar manner to multi-shot, except even more arrows are loosed. And again, just like the multi-shot, this is incredibly effective up close, especially against some of the tougher baddies you'll come across. 

Combat, Kiting, and Optimizing your Attacks

The flow of combat in Korgan generally follows a similar format no matter where in the game you're at, and it mostly has to do with the practice of "kiting" enemies. It takes a bit of time to master this, but in short, "kiting" your enemies refers to getting their attention and then leading them to you in a specific way so that they follow a predictable path and cannot flank or overwhelm you.

This is most easily done with the hunter since she's your quickest character. Pop in, draw the attention of an enemy, turn back around to fire, then rinse and repeat. If you get overwhelmed by enemies following you, swap to the mage and fire off a few ice balls to freeze a few. Then, if you're feeling frisky, you can get in there with the warrior, or just keep taking potshots with the hunter.

On Portals

Okay, if we're going to have any kind of authority here in this Korgan beginner's guide, we have to be honest with you. Portals and other enemy spawning points are going to be really annoying. We're sorry.

The best way to deal with them that we've found so far is to use the earthquake combo to clear out most, if not all, of the enemies in the area, then swap to the hunter to multi-shot the spawning point. You have been warned, this will take a very long time, and you will be tempted to try to soak up damage with the hunter for as long as you can in order to get in extra shots. DO NOT DO THIS. Health potions are rare, and if you screw up and die, you'll have to do it all over again. Be patient, and you'll get through just fine.

Inventory Management and Upgrading your Characters

First, and most importantly: DO NOT BUY ANYTHING FROM THE MENU STORE. You'll come across merchant NPCs that will sell you things for much, much lower prices than you'll find in the menu. Even if you're in a really tight spot, it is almost always better just to die and make your way back to where you were than it is to blow 1,000 crystals on a measly health potion.

How to Share Health Potions Between Characters

Speaking of which, your stock of health potions IS NOT SHARED BETWEEN YOUR CHARACTERS. You will have to keep an eye on each character's stock to avoid running out at an inopportune time. 

The good news is you can shuffle your potions around, though the way you do that isn't obvious at first. To do that, you'll have to first unequip your health potions from your characters. Then, go to your inventory screen. When you choose to re-equip the health potions on each character, you'll have the chance to select how many to equip to each of them. We recommend leaning heavily towards the hunter and mage since the warrior has his armor.

Recommended Upgrades

In general, focus your upgrade points on skills that emphasize and increase attack. The penalty for death in Korgan isn't super high -- it's more of a time-waster than anything else -- so it really does pay to turn your motley crew into a group of glass cannons. Specifically, we'd start by putting points into upgrading the freeze rate of the mage's iceball, the attack power of the hunter's arrows, and the warrior's earthquake attack.

The dungeons in Korgan can often be unforgiving, but as long as you heed this advice, you'll be raking in golden keys, plundering chests, killing demons, and mastering each successive episode with ease.


Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more tips and guides on Korgan, and if you have any strategies you'd like to share, we'd love to hear about them in the comments.

How to Zoom In and Out on Bluestacks on PC Thu, 26 Apr 2018 15:56:58 -0400 Ashley Gill

If there's one function the Android emulator Bluestacks needs to make more obvious, it's the ability to two-finger touch and swipe. A huge amount of games allow you to zoom in and out via pinching your fingers together or swiping them apart on the screen.

If you've ever given up on emulating a particular Android game because you weren't sure how to zoom in or out, you'll be free of that restriction soon enough.

There are two methods PC users can use to imitate pinching and outward swiping to zoom in and out in games on Bluestacks. These are:

  • Hold the Ctrl key while pressing the - key to zoom out and the + key to zoom in
  • Hold the Ctrl key while scrolling up or down using the mouse wheel

This works in any game that innately has a zoom in and zoom out function, but does not work on games that do not allow you to zoom.

Bluestacks has several keybinding functions. Some games have keyboard layout presets already available when you first launch the game (such as Lineage 2: Revolution), but most require you to set the keys yourself if you want to use the keyboard.

You can set up custom keybindings using the keyboard icon  on the bottom left of the Bluestacks window. Unfortunately you can't use this function to set your preferred camera zooming method, but holding Ctrl and scrolling the mouse wheel is pretty simple.

There are a lot of reasons to use an emulator like Nox or Bluestacks -- perhaps your phone can't run a game, or you prefer to play your shooters on PC -- but not knowing how to do a function as simple as pinching in or out to zoom is a big enough reason not to bother. Luckily now you do know how to do it, so go forth and emulate!

God of War Frozen Flame Guide: How to Get It & Level the Leviathan Axe Thu, 26 Apr 2018 15:03:41 -0400 Jonathan Moore

Powerful gods need powerful weapons. And while the Leviathan Axe in God of War is pretty damn epic, you can make it even mightier by upgrading it with Frozen Flame. This must-have resource can only be found in a few places in God of War on PS4; only a select few enemies will drop it, and you won't find it in regular, or even Legendary, chests. 

In fact, one Frozen Flame can only be found after you've beaten the game. Luckily, you'll be able to unlock all of the Axe's skills and abilities when you upgrade it to Level 5; the Level 6 improvement only increases the weapon's base attack power. 

Frozen Flame Locations 

#1: After Meeting Brock on the River Pass Bridge

As you progress through the story, you'll eventually meet the dwarf Brock. He'll be on a bridge in the River Pass. After you help him get his faithful steed on the other side of the ravine, Brok will open his shop and upgrade your Leviathan Axe as a reward

The Frozen Flame you get here is one of the easiest to get in the entire game. 

#2: Ascending the Mountain from the Foothills

After meeting Sindri in the foothills, you'll need to progress through the Foothills area to make your way to the Mountain. Defeat the enemies here and climb up the cliff that's accessed from the middle of the area. When you get to the top, there will be a Revenant. Defeat that and continue along the path. 

Eventually, you'll reach an open area that looks ripe for a boss fight. Go toward the doors to agg the troll hiding behind them. Defeat the troll to get the second Frozen Flame

#3: In the Mine Inside the Mountain

Once inside the Mountain, you'll come to a huge room full of mining equipment. This is where you'll need to find the elevator to take you to the summit. However, there's a troll here that has other plans. Defeat this nasty troll to nab your third Frozen Flame

#4: Getting a Piece of the Chisel

To open all the hidden chambers and fight God of War's Valkyries (as well as progress in the story), you'll need to get a chunk of Thamur's chisel. During the quest "The Magic Chisel," you'll do just that. 

There will be a boss fight as you get closer to the chisel. Get past that, and you'll get your hands on the fourth Frozen Flame. 

#5: The Mists of Nilfheim

The final Leviathan Axe upgrade material can be found in Nilfheim -- but only after beating the game's story. Why? Because that's when Sindri's shop lets you buy Frozen Flame. 

To purchase the item, you'll need a Chilling Mist of Nilfheim. You can find this item in the center of Nilfheim. It will be in a Legendary Chest. Return to Sindri and buy the upgrade item to make the Leviathan Axe a true weapon worthy of a god. 


That's all you need to know about finding and getting Frozen Flame in God of War. If you're looking to upgrade any of Kratos' other weapons or armor that require Smoldering Embers, click here. If you're looking for other collectibles or tips and tricks, check out our growing guides page.  

BattleTech Bug Fix Guide -- Already Have A Paradox Account Glitch Thu, 26 Apr 2018 13:31:00 -0400 Ty Arthur

Our long wait is finally over, my fellow mechwarriors, and now we can engage in some of that classic turn-based PC strategy combat we've been craving with Harebrained Schemes' BattleTech ... only maybe not. Of course there's bugs and glitches and overloaded servers galore, which seem to plague all game launches these days.

Like Obsidian recently did with the Tyranny RPG, the BattleTech developers teamed up with Paradox for the online account aspects of the game. As expected, those Paradox servers are getting hammered, and nearly everyone is getting some sort of BattleTech error message while trying to join a multiplayer skirmish.

BattleTech Already Have A Profile Glitch Solution

The most common BattleTech bug right now is for new players to be stuck on the screen where you pick your mech commander's callsign when trying to create a profile to play a skirmish in multiplayer mode.

For some reason, this bug creates a connection error in a menu screen that you can't actually exit by clicking anything. This has been particularly annoying for people trying to log in to claim the pre-order bonus skin for the Shadow Hawk and who may not even be trying to play a full multiplayer match.

The game seems to think some people already have a Paradox account created and signed into when they attempt to join a skirmish, so you have to log out of it somehow (even though you don't actually have an account yet) to get things working again.

If you try to hit Escape or click anything to exit, you will get a "Please enter a callsign" error and be returned to the same screen. To exit the game, close your client entirely with ALT+F4 if the program will let you, or instead by tapping CTRL+ALT+DEL and choosing Task Manager. When you get the Task Manager window open, manually shut down the BattleTech and ComStar processes to exit the client and log out of Paradox.

Reload the game and it should again give you the option of picking from Campaign or Skirmish mode. In most cases, this should reset everything, but you may need to also manually close down and then restart Steam if the issue happens again.

From here, you should now be able to successfully create a callsign and log in to play some multiplayer matches normally. The player base is going to be low at the moment, however, since so many people are experiencing the same bug.

 This is where you want to get back to ... if the game will let you get there!

Unfortunately, this isn't the end of the bug squashing for some users. Since the servers are getting overloaded due to all the new players jumping on at the same time, you may now get hit with this dreaded BattleTech error message:

"We're sorry, there was an unspecified error in establishing your connection to ComStar. Please try again later."

There's no fix for that particular BattleTech launch day bug at the moment besides waiting it out until the servers are working again. Note that this problem currently only affects multiplayer skirmish battles, however.

Picking the Campaign mode starts the game with no issues at all, so you can play the main story campaign for a few hours to get up to speed on the game mechanics before the flood gates open and all the online players get to finally wreck each other's mechs.

 Why does it seem like nearly every major game launch has this issue on Day One?

Have you managed to get online yet and play any skirmishes? Let us know how you did!

For those new to the game mechanics, be sure to check out our BattleTech beginner's strategy guide here if you find yourself lost in the sea of options while trying to pick the best mech lance and survive your first few missions!

BattleTech Save Game Bug Workaround Thu, 26 Apr 2018 13:14:06 -0400 Ty Arthur

Mech combat fans have been waiting many years for a proper turn-based tabletop representation of the BattleTech universe, and unfortunately, some players will have to wait longer for a bug-free experience.

From overloaded servers to janky camera angles and outright crashes, there have been plenty of BattleTech glitches to overcome before you can destroy your enemy's lance with a hail of LRM fire.

For those who gave up on multiplayer skirmishes to explore the single-player story campaign, the biggest issue right now is save games just up and disappearing. Don't lose hope -- your BattleTech save files aren't gone forever! They just aren't being read by the game properly, and there is a workaround to get them working again.

BattleTech Save Game Location Bug Fix

First up, you want to verify that your save game file is in fact still there and that it hasn't been deleted for some reason. To check if the data remains intact, navigate to these locations and look for a save game file:

  • Steam: C:\Steam\userdata\\637090\remote\C0\SGS1
  • GOG: C:\Users\YourUserName\AppData\Local\\Galaxy\Applications\50593543263669699\Storage\Shared\Files\C0\SGS1

If there are any files in this folder, in most cases you only need to shut down the game, then restart either Steam or GOG Galaxy, and wait a few minutes. The Steam or GOG game client should correctly locate and read your BattleTech save game info when you boot up the game again.

In some cases you may still not be able to read your save game file after restarting, so it's time to move onto three possible other troubleshooting options.

Verify Game Files

Some players have a missing or corrupted file that is messing with the save game system. You can get this file replaced in either the Steam or GOG version with a few simple steps.

To fix this problem with Steam, right-click BattleTech in your library and choose Properties, then navigate to the Local Files tab. Just click the Verify Integrity Of Game Files button, and then follow the prompts to see if this is causing your problem.

To fix this problem with GOG, navigate to the BattleTech entry in your list of games, and click the "More" option next to the Play button. Go to the Manage Installation entry and then click Verify/Repair and follow the prompts.

 Verifying file integrity with GOG Galaxy

Turn Off Steam Cloud Saves

A few players are reporting the issue can be resolved by turning off the Steam cloud save games, as this seems to force the game to find the local folder with the save data.

Right-click BattleTech in your library and choose Properties, then navigate to the Updates tab. At the bottom of the menu, uncheck the box labeled "Enabled Steam Cloud Synchronization for BattleTech."

 Turning off Steam cloud synchronization

Create/Verify Paradox Account

If none of the above options work, then you may be dealing with an issue with the Paradox servers.

Be sure to choose the option to create an account on the game's main menu if you haven't already, then verify your Paradox account in your email and log in (this isn't the only Paradox account glitch, as many players are still stuck at the multiplayer callsign creation screen due to the "Already Have A Paradox Account" glitch).

No matter what resolves the issue (or if you find that your saves are entirely deleted and can't be recovered), make sure to log the bug in the BattleTech bug report forum here with as much information as you can provide! The more data that Harebrained Schemes has, the quicker this save game bug can be patched out.


Having trouble taking out pirate lances or surviving assassination and escort missions after getting your save game bug fixed? Check out our full Battletech beginner's guide here to understand how to outfit mechs and to learn the best movement and firing strategies!

How to Reset Your Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery Game Thu, 26 Apr 2018 13:13:37 -0400 Jonathan Moore

So you've chosen your wand and your house. You've taken a few classes and learned a few spells. Maybe you've even started climbing the leaderboard already.

But something's not exactly right. What if you've changed your mind and don't want the wand you've chosen -- or you don't want to support the house you've pledged to? If you're wondering how to reset your game in Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery, you're not alone. 

The problem is that doing so isn't straightforward at all. In fact, many players have discovered that they can't reset the game at all... Or can they? 

The obvious steps of uninstalling the app, clearing your app data, and reinstalling the game don't seem to work at all (I know they've not worked for my iPhone 6S+). And if you look at Reddit or any other forums around the Web, Android users are having similar luck with the game. 

However, there seem to be two (edit: now several) workarounds. These ways are proven to work on both Android and iOS devices. 

Related Content

Currently the Easiest Way: Turn Wifi Off 

Thanks to an awesome reader in the comments below, as of 4/28/18, we now have an even easier way to to reset your game. Here are the steps: 

  1. Turn off your data and WiFi
  2. Start the game
  3. Close the game when the "Cannot Connect" error message appears
  4. Turn your WiFi back on 
  5. Restart the game

That's it. Much easier than the process below. However, if the above method doesn't work for you for some reason, read on. We've got two more methods that will get you back to the wizard/witch selection screen. 

Log Into Facebook With a Single Device

  1. Open the Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery App.

  2. Look at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen and tap the gear icon.

  3. Once in the Settings Menu, tap the "Account Info" box underneath "Help"

  4. Connect your Facebook Account.

  5. Exit the Harry Potter app and log out of your Facebook Account.

  6. Delete the Hogwarts Mystery game from your device and clear your browser cache and cookies. 

  7. Log back into Facebook and go to your Settings Menu on Facebook 

  8. Once in your Facebook Settings menu, look for "Apps and Websites" on the left of the screen. It will be at the top of the fourth block of options. Click that. 

  9. Under "Active Apps and Websites", look for the Hogwarts Mystery app.
  10. Check the box and click "Remove." A new box will appear asking if you're sure. Check the "Delete All Posts, Photos, and Videos" checkbox and click "Remove" again. 

  11. Return to the App Store or Google Play Store and re-download the Hogwarts Mystery game. 

  12. The game should load and start you off at the Witch or Wizard selection screen.

It's a protracted process, but it works. I tested it out on my iPhone, and after following the steps above, I was able to confirm the process lets you start a brand-new game. Right now, the above method is the only confirmed way to reset your game without resetting your entire device or using a second device.

Log Into Facebook Using Two Devices

However, if you do use a second device, you can:

  1. Start the game on your second device.
  2. Log into Facebook via the Hogwarts app.
  3. Exit the game.
  4. Go back to your first device and the log into the game with Facebook

That should override the save on your first device with the save from your second device, effectively resetting your game.  


If you find another way or an easier way, let us know in the comments. We'll add it to this guide and give you credit, too! 

As always, stay tuned to GameSkinny for more news and information on the wizarding world of Harry Potter. And while you're here, why don't you check out our other can't-miss Hogwarts guides for even more tips, tricks, and strategies.  

How to Get Your Fastest Chicken Dinner Ever in PUBG Mobile Arcade Thu, 26 Apr 2018 13:02:52 -0400 Stephanie Tang

In a bid to outdo its growing list of competitors, PUBG Mobile just launched a massive new update with version 0.4.0 that includes the new Arcade Mode as an alternative to the existing 100-player game mode that launched the original PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds to fame on PC. 

You now have the option of pitting yourself in a smaller map with only 28 players, all while still allowing for the traditional PUBG squad options: solo, duo, and 4-man teams. The wait time in the Lobby is shorter, games that could take up to half an hour at a time (if you made it to the top 5) now last approximately 10 minutes, and the hunt for resources is even more desperate than ever before.

Since its release, PUBG Mobile has achieved the not-insignificant task of bringing the thrilling suspense of the original to smaller screens -- and with great effect. Now Arcade Mode comes as an acknowledgement of the limitations of trying to play on mobile -- where players want a smaller time commitment, shorter matches, and more action straight away. Arcade Mode is the fast food version of PUBG and just what we needed for the interruption-heavy nature of mobile gaming. 

If you're just starting out in PUBG Mobile, check out our beginner's guide for tips on staying alive. That'll definitely get you started.

But what do you need to change about your usual PUBG tactics in order to "get gud" in Arcade? Here are some of our best suggestions!

1. Fly, you fools!

Every second counts in PUBG, but never more than in Arcade Mode, where action strikes fast and hard, and can catch everyone unprepared -- particularly right at touchdown. The second you start a game, be prepared to check out the map, time your jump, and dive -- pushing yourself (directional stick forward) to get to the ground as fast and as far away from a bare-handed fistfight to the death as you can. Watch for other players as they exit the plane, and plan ahead.

The maps are more heavily populated (villages versus open fields), so you're likely to find houses nearby pretty much wherever you drop in which to rummage for stuff. While weapons and supplies are more liberally spawned on these maps than usual, you've still got a vested interest in getting to them before anyone else does!

2. #SquadGoals

It's hard to have an edge when you're running solo in Arcade (or in regular mode, for that matter) right from the get-go, but with this latest update, you can take advantage of the Follow the Leader option in the Lobby. 

When you're playing in a duo or as a 4-man team, you can designate one player to act as the Leader. This means that that person is the one who will control when, where, and how fast you dive when getting down to the map. You land together, so no one gets stranded, and you're at a greater advantage when it comes to coordinating a pitched team fight!

3. Maintain your Situational Awareness

The above should go without saying, particularly in a game where you often lie in wait for other players to stumble upon you and where the safe zone is constantly shrinking. But in Arcade, you should also take into account the map type -- which is to say, how to move when you're going through and around a number of different houses. 

The extra elevations mean that if someone is well-situated, they are in the perfect position to snipe you through a window. Hug walls, close doors behind you, listen for footsteps, and watch your windows while you're scavenging! 

4. Wait a few seconds before heading over to loot a body. 

This is usually advice that I'd leave for the later stages of gameplay in a normal round of PUBG, but it's something you're going to want to keep in mind almost from the get-go in Arcade Mode. Chances are that you'll have someone close by you who's heard the murder ruckus and is in a better position to snipe you off or at least land a few more shots on you while you're still focused on loot and unaware. 

Know the limitations of your controls -- if you're playing on a phone the way it was intended to be played (PUBG Mobile has a pretty big problem with players using emulators to play it on PC with a mouse and keyboard), you turn like a tank. Don't give someone else the upper hand!

Other things to note: 

  • Don't be afraid to run away and heal if you have to.
  • Configure your controls before jumping into a game. 
  • Use headphones!


That said, you should have no problem getting started in PUBG Mobile Arcade mode. Play with friends when you can -- that little bit of coordination will go a long way. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more PUBG Mobile guides and info!

Hogwarts Mystery Tips Guide: Quickly Go From Beginner to Expert Wed, 25 Apr 2018 16:17:16 -0400 Ty Arthur

Now that we can officially explore Hogwarts on our iOS and Android devices, it's time to explore the best ways to become a master witch or wizard. Once you officially sign up -- and hand over your muggle status for something more wizarding -- Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery has quite a bit to learn. 

And although it might still be the exact same freemium cookie clicker every major franchise gets these days, there are some mechanics and systems you'll want to know about to best use your time in Hogwarts. 

These magical tricks will help you get ahead from Year One. From free energy exploits to level grinding tips, re-rolling rewards, and strategies for choosing your rewards, this beginner's guide will teach you everything you need to know to get started. 

Related Content: 

The Sorting Hat helps a wizard choose his house

How To Get Free Energy in Hogwarts Mystery

There are ways to get energy in this clicker without spending a dime. Cleverly hidden across the grounds of Hogwarts, you can find secret Easter egg locations if you spend some time exploring all the different areas. But you can't freely explore right off the bat.

After escaping the Devil's Snare in the supply room, your witch-in-training can finally roam the hallways unimpeded before heading to the next story segment -- and this is when you can start getting free energy.

Unlike with mission tasks, these locations are all unmarked and don't glow blue, but tapping them will give you a free point of energy anyway.

The following locations are known to give free points:

  1. East Towers: Painting of a woman in a white dress next to the Charms classroom

  2. West Towers: Nature painting next to the Prefect's bathroom

  3. Lower Floor West: The stone fire stand to the right of the Great Hall

  4. Lower Floor West: The middle stone knight statue to the right of the Great Hall

  5. Dungeons: The house elf to the right of the Kitchens

  6. Castle Grounds: The stick in the foreground in front of the Whomping Willow

Tip: Keep in mind that there is a max energy amount in Hogwarts Mystery, so even if you tap the free energy everywhere, every single time, you can't go above that maximum. Tapping any of these while you are at the energy max is a serious waste, as it takes time for the free energy sources to regenerate.

If you've found any other Hogwarts Mystery free energy locations, let us know in the comments, and we'll add it to this guide, giving you credit. There's bound to be more across the whole seven-year experience. 

Free Unlimited Energy location in the East Towers of Hogwarts East Towers free energy location.

How to Get More Energy

Free energy is great, but what do you do when you want to get more energy faster? Nobody wants to wait around for agonizingly slow meters to fill up. If you strategize well enough, you can constantly fill up your energy by visiting the free spots listed above and following the four tips listed below: 

  1. Complete Activities: We talk about this more below, but at the end of each activity, you can choose energy as a reward

  2. Level Up: Every time you level up you witch or wizard, you'll get a full energy meter

  3. Spend 20, 55, or 100 Gems: You can either buy gems with IRL cash, or you can choose gems as a reward when completing activities. The in-app shop lets you use gems to buy energy boosts

  4. Wait: OK, we said waiting sucks (and it does), but seeing as Hogwarts Mystery is part of that clicker/wait-forever genre, there will be times when you've exhausted all other energy-gathering options. 
Unlock More Flying Abilities

Besides charms and potions, flying abilities learned through flying classes give you more energy. With each new flying skill, you'll increase your energy stockpiles by 1. 

You can't rely on it, but you can add it to your overall strategy. 

Hacks, Cheats, and APK Mods

There are some energy hacks and cheats available via third-party services, as well as other platforms, that theoretically speed things up even more. Although we won't share those here, we do suggest exercising caution when using these tools as many may require both access to your phone and app. Other hack and cheat tools will require you to download multiple secondary apps that could pose further security risks. 

There is also a mod for unlimited energy, but you'll need to download the APK to use it. If you're on an iOS device, you won't be able to take advantage of the mod at all. 

So the TL;DR on hacks, cheats, and APK mods is this: Use at your own risk. 

Students taking part in an activity in a Hogwarts classroom

Level Grinding Classes

In between the main story missions, keep in mind that you can return to classrooms to repeat classes and get more gold coins and attribute rewards.

In some cases, you can even learn new spells before progressing the story. If you want to raise your three main attributes -- Courage, Empathy, and Knowledge --  for more dialog options or to access new quests, this is the way to go. That's why getting free energy is so important.

If you want more coins to buy new clothes, grinding classroom lessons is also a means of building up your funds.

Wizards and witches choosing rewards outside

How to Choose the Right Rewards

When you complete a lesson or main story quest, several options are available with the following possible rewards:

  • Main stat boost
  • Free energy
  • Gold Coins
  • Gems 

Picking your reward changes the trajectory of your character growth and impacts how often you can play. It also affects what cosmetic items you'll be able to pick up, as clothing and hair options tend to be pretty pricey.

Tip: If you exit the game when you get rewards, they will re-roll when you return.

Picking Energy

The free energy reward is actually pretty useless, especially since it's usually only a small number of points. You can easily get significantly more free Hogwarts Mystery energy just by going to the locations listed above. The only exception to this is if the rewards is offered in the middle of a quest and you are too low on energy to complete the mission without waiting.

Picking Stat Boost

Picking the stat boost is the best option if you want to progress through the game quickly and have more dialog options. It's also helpful for anyone who isn't specifically trying to get a particular cosmetic item. 

Picking Gold and Gems

These are the two primary currencies in Hogwarts Mystery. If you want more gold and gems to buy an outfit or get a bunch of energy all at once, then those rewards are the ways to go. Gems, in particular, are a solid choice, as it seems like a foregone conclusion that there will be limited-time sale items for gems available down the line. 

Several quests require gems to start, unless you are willing to outwait the timer. If you want to start new quests earlier and don't feel like waiting a few hours, then gems are the way to go.

Snape teaches one of his potions classes as students watch on

In-App Purchases For Coins, Gems, and Energy

Although it's a free-to-play game, Hogwarts Mystery follows the path of almost every other F2P title with the inclusion of in-app purchases. 

You access the in-game shop by clicking the "+" symbol next to either your energy meter, your coin counter, or your gem counter, all of which are located in the top right-hand corner of the screen (shown in the image above). 

Here's a rundown of all of the game's in-app purchases. 

Coin Packages
Name Cost Amount
  Purse of Coins  $0.99   250
  Pouch of Coins  $4.99   1,500
  Case of Coins  $9.99   3,500
  Hut of Coins  $19.99   7,500
  Tower of Coins  $49.99   22,500


Gem Packages
Name Cost Amount
  Handful of Gems  $0.99   25
  Measure of Gems  $4.99   130
  Sack of Gems  $9.99   275
  Trunk of Gems  $19.99   575
  Trainload of Gems  $49.99   1,500
  Vault of Gems  $99.99   3,125


Energy Packages
Name Cost Boost Amount
 Bit of Energy 20 Gems   10
 Stash of Energy 55 Gems   30
 Hoard of Energy 100 Gems   60



And that's all you need to know to quickly become a master in Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery. If you have any other tips and tricks you think beginners should know, drop in the comments and tell us. We'll add it to this guide!

And if you're looking for more tricks to make your journey through the wizarding world easier, check out our other guides.

Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery Wand Choice Starter Guide Wed, 25 Apr 2018 15:27:55 -0400 Ty Arthur

Short of visiting Universal Studios and taking a stroll through the ultra-expensive (and ultra-crowded) Wizarding World Of Harry Potter, the next best way to have one of Ollivander's wands choose you is to download the Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery app and take on the role of a new student.

With the release of the game today on iOS and Android devices, trying to prove yourself worthy of a place at the magical Hogwarts just became a bit more tangible. Of course, you'll have to make an incredibly important starting decision -- what kind of wand best suits your personality as a witch or wizard?

Related Content

Hogwarts Mystery Wand Choices

As a new student of witchcraft or wizardry, Ollivander will ask you very early in the game how you felt about your older brother being expelled from Hogwarts in the past. The answer you give him determines the specific wand you end up playing with for the rest of the game.

Here are the answers and their outcomes: 

  • I was determined -- You'll receive an 11-inch inflexible hornbeam wand with a dragonstring core. This is the same kind of wand used by Ollivander himself and indicates a wizard with a unique passion.

  • I was angry -- You'll receive an 11-and-three-quarter-inche blackthorn wand with a unicorn hair core. Ollivander indicates this is for a witch with a lot of fight in her.

  • I felt sorry for him -- You'll get a pliable 12-inch acacia wand with a unicorn hair core meant for a sensitive wizard.

Note that during the game's soft launch beta, there was a fourth option of "I wanted answers." This option resulted in an elastic 12-inch maple wood rod with a unicorn hair core, which just happens to be the same kind of wand used by your brother before he was expelled from Hogwarts.

It isn't clear why, but this option was removed from the full Harry Potter: Hogwarts Mystery release and is no longer available.


Which wand did you pick, and which of the Hogwarts' houses did you end up joining? Let us know in the comments, and stay tuned for more Harry Potter Hogwarts Mystery guides coming soon.

God Of War (2018) Guide: Every Secret Valkyrie Location Unlocked Tue, 24 Apr 2018 16:17:42 -0400 Ty Arthur

Mostly locked inside hidden chambers, Valkyries can be found almost immediately upon starting God of War. However, it's a good thing Kratos can't face these bosses until much, much later in the game because they would absolutely wreck Level 1 Baby Kratos! 

But as you continue your journey and level up, you'll notice more hidden chambers scattered across Midgard -- and at the center of each is a secret ultra-hard Valkyrie that will test your prowess in the end-game phase.

There are three that aren't in hidden chambers, which we'll get to in just a second. But before we start in earnest, there's one thing you should know ... 

How to Unlock God of War's Valkyries 

Before accessing any of the God of War's Valkyries, you need to first obtain the Magic Chisel. This occurs normally during the course of the story when a new area is opened after the scene with Mimir and the World Serpent, so if you don't have it yet, just continue the main story quest.

With the Chisel in hand, you can go back to the hidden chambers and unlock their seals to tackle the Valkyries for the Prove Your Valour quest and ultimately, the Chooser of the Slain trophy. After defeating eight Valkyries, you'll need to take their heads to the Council of the Valkyries to battle the ninth.

Besides finding the Valkyrie bosses to defeat, these locked, hidden chambers also frequently have the Odin's Ravens collectibles flying around in trees. One even has an artifact hidden inside

How to Find Geirdriful

Location: Foothills -- Hidden Chamber of Odin  

To find this hidden chamber, head to the east through the fields of poison from where you first meet Sindri. However, turn left at the path to find a cave where the chamber is located.

When fighting this enemy, be sure to use the quick-turn ability to evade this Valkyrie's blinding shockwave and be prepared for lots of long-range projectile attacks. Patience is key to this fight, with you most likely turtling up more than attacking. 

 Foothills Valkyrie Location

How to Find Olrun

Location: Alfheim Lake Of Light  -- Hidden Chamber of Odin 

Head to the western beach at the Lake Of Light and go to the right of the dock to find the hidden Valkyrie chamber.

This Valkyrie evades attacks like crazy and will need to be hit with arrows while in the air, so make sure to rely on Atreus. Also, be on the lookout for a quick attack to arrive at the end of the boss' evasion move.

 Alfheim Valkyrie Location

How to Find Gunnr

Location: Thamur’s Corpse -- Hidden Chamber of Odin 

From this area's northern dock, travel toward the giant blacksmith's fingers and then go left into the hidden chamber.

Command Atreus to launch shock arrows when this Valkyrie takes to the air and be on the lookout to evade the wing combo attack (which can't be blocked with your shield).

 Thamur's Corpse Valkyrie Location

How to Find Eir

Location: The Mountain -- Hidden Chamber of Odin 

You'll find this one in the Mountain mineshaft, the area with the giant metal claw on your way to the summit. Head to the far right side of the area near a big pile of rubble to find the hidden chamber.

This Valkyrie is entirely focused around defense, so you need to use the block breaking ability to get damage through without being counterattacked.

 The Mountain Valkyrie Location

How to Find Kara

Location: Witch’s Cave (The River Pass) -- Hidden Chamber of Odin 

In the witch's cave, turn left at the bridge heading toward the house. Travel the light bridges toward the Nornir chest, then destroy the area up on the left ledge with the exploding red sap door. Head through the cleared area to find the hidden chamber.

This Valkyrie summons a bunch of Draugr to fight you, but if you keep at least two around, she typically won't summon more. 

 Witch's Cave Valkyrie Location

How to Find Rota

Location: Helheim -- Hidden Chamber of Odin 

On Helheim's final bridge, turn toward the west and have Atreus shoot an arrow at the red sap doorto open the area to the hidden chamber. There will also be a Raven and Artifact just inside, as well as another Artifact behind the left-most brazier just before the boss area. 

You need to be nimble here to block the devastating grapple attacks and long-range chakram throws from this Valkyrie.

 Helheim Valkyrie Location

How to Find Gondul

Location: Muspelheim Trial VI 

Rather than opening a hidden chamber of Odin, this Valkyrie is found by unlocking Muspelheim (with the four ciphers found in Legendary chests). Gondul is can be found after completing the trials and making it to Arena 6.

Use rolls and sidesteps to avoid the meteors it throws, then get in a quick attack when the Valkyrie is vulnerable -- usually after using the fire/heel stomp attack.

 Muspelheim Valkyrie Location

How to Find Hildr

Location: Niflheim 

In Niflheim, head down the left-hand path and be on the lookout for a cave on your left side in the second room with a chest.

When Hildr sends out projectiles, block the first few and then sidestep the final one, which can't be blocked. Don't bother with the frost axe -- it won't hurt this ice-focused Valkyrie.

 Niflheim Valkyrie Location

How to Find Sigrun

Location: Council of Valkyries

To find and battle the ninth Valkyrie -- actually the queen of the Valkyries -- you need to first kill the other eight and bring their heads to the Council Of Valkyries.

To get there, travel to the northern shore of the Lake of Light and the Mason’s Channel dock. Move up the ledge by the giant boats and then go down the path in the cave to a big set of wood doors.

This boss has much more health and additional attack types than its compatriots, so get ready for a long, brutal battle where strategy is mightier than the sword.

Council Of Valkyries Location

That's all the Valkyrie locations in God of War -- let us know when you manage to beat them all and check out our other God Of War guides here:

God of War (2018) Guide: How to Get Smoldering Ember Tue, 24 Apr 2018 11:57:03 -0400 Sergey_3847

Muspelheim Armor in God of War is one of the most efficient armors in the game. However, in order to forge this great armor, you need to collect a required amount of smoldering embers -- an item that can be obtained only in Muspelheim.

If you want to know how to get the necessary number of smoldering embers in Muspelheim, and eventually forge the desired armor, then follow our step-by-step guide below.

How to Find Smoldering Embers in God of War

Step 1: Unlock Muspelheim

In order to unlock Muspelheim, you need to collect four of seven possible Cipher pieces. These can be found in chests scattered all over the world. Below you will find the locations of these chests:

  1. Passage from Lake of Nine to Foothills
  2. Cliffs of the Raven
  3. Forgotten Caverns
  4. Witch's Cave
  5. The Mountain Summit at Mystic Gateway
  6. Alfheim
  7. Muspelheim Tower

When you collect at least four Ciphers, Atreus will be able to read them, and you will be granted with the Muspelheim Travel Rune, which unlocks the realm of Muspelheim at Tyr's Temple.

Step 2: Complete Muspelheim Trials

When you enter the Realm of Fire (Muspelheim), you can do challenges that stand in your way, which mainly consist of combat trials of various difficulties. This is the point in the game when you will start earning smoldering embers.

These challenges mostly consist of combat trials of various difficulties, so be well prepared. Some are so difficult that you will not be able to finish them. But if you already have enough embers, you can go back to Brok's Shop and forge your armor.

Here is the list of rewards for each trial:

  1. +3 Smoldering Ember and +1938 Hacksilver
  2. +5 Smoldering Ember and +1828 Hacksilver
  3. +8 Smoldering Ember and +3786 Hacksilver
  4. +8 Smoldering Ember and +1648 Hacksilver
  5. +5 Smoldering Ember and +3550 Hacksilver
  6. +8 Smoldering Ember and +1951 Hacksilver
  7. +12 Smoldering Ember and +4082 Hacksilver
  8. +12 Smoldering Ember and +1634 Hacksilver
  9. +12 Smoldering Ember and +3949 Hacksilver
  10. +15 Smoldering Ember and +5000 Hacksilver
  11. +9 Smoldering Ember and +6887 Hacksilver
  12. +9 Smoldering Ember and +6279 Hacksilver
  13. +9 Smoldering Ember and +6500 Hacksilver
  14. +9 Smoldering Ember and +7622 Hacksilver
  15. +37 Smoldering Ember and +2000 Hacksilver
  16. +20 Smoldering Ember, +3 Crest of Flame
  17. +50 Smoldering Ember, +20 Crest of Flame, +12 Greater Crest of Flame and +5 Crest of Sutr


That is all you need to know to collect smoldering embers, and for other God of War guides at GameSkinny, check out the links below:

BattleTech Tips and Tricks Guide Tue, 24 Apr 2018 11:30:51 -0400 Ty Arthur

As a tabletop conversion to PC, BattleTech is the sort of game that requires a strong grasp of the fundamental mechanics if you want any shot at keeping your pilots alive, your mechs outfitted, and your merc company paid.

This particular entry in the hallowed giant robot franchise can be unforgiving to new players, and the tutorials are buried in dialogue options that are easy to miss if you aren't exploring every nook and cranny of your drop ship.

Before you get started retaking the Aurigan Reach for the Arona Restoration, this is everything you need to know about strategy and mech maintenance if you don't want to be reloading every single battle.

BattleTech Mech Combat Basics

Navigating turn order and planning your upcoming attacks based on which enemy will move next is critical in absolutely any mission. The turn order goes in descending order of  5, 4, 3, 2, 1 instead of ascending order, so pay attention to who is going to attack next and who can be Sensor Locked that turn and then still attacked by another mech in your group. 

Best BattleTech Pilot Skills

You will quickly learn that Sensor Locking and Evasive Movement are two of the most important skills to have, but they aren't fully explained by the tutorial missions.

For instance, you don't need direct line of sight to Sensor Lock an enemy vehicle. They just have to be on your radar as the unknown red dots within sensor range. This is important for indirect missile fire over long distances before closing the gap and engaging in short-range laser fire or direct melee combat.

Your enemies will typically be either mechs or tanks, and it's these smaller ground vehicles like tanks that are extremely susceptible to mech melee assaults -- usually going down in one hit. 

Choosing Attack Types

When engaging in ranged combat, always keep in mind that you don't have to launch the mech's entire weapon payload with every attack. You can click each weapon in the list in the lower right corner to remove or add before firing, which is important for managing heat. Switching to melee for a round is another excellent option for venting heat.

If a weapon has a low chance to hit but will increase your heat into the critical range, just turn it off for that attack. Remember that these settings are saved for every attack, though, so don't forget to turn it back on for the next salvo if you want to use all the weapons at once.

Finally, while shooting ranged weapons like missiles and lasers, it's always better to try to hit enemies on their sides or from the back. Not only does this reduce their armor's damage reduction and overcome the Guarded state, but your chances of destroying a mech section with a Called Shot shoot up significantly.

Hitting from behind, your chances of taking out a mech's leg to knock it over will jump from 18% to the 50% range. Don't discount the center torso, though. While the percent chance will be lower, destroying the torso with a Called Shot incapacitates the pilot and takes the mech out of commission immediately.

 Called Shot percentages go up drastically if attacking from behind or from higher ground

Understanding BattleTech Mech and Weapon Types

There's a huge array of mechs, from Spiders to Dragons to Shadowhawks, Vindicators, Centurions, and many more. While each has a slightly different focus between movement range, heat distribution, ranged or melee combat, and so on, the primary differences will be in their weight category.

Best BattleTech Mechs and Weapons

In general, heavier mechs have more space for more weaponry, so heavy is a good way to go for both armor and attack strength. Each mech has different weapon anchor points, however.

Not all mechs can equip an SRM 5 or AC/10 on either arm for instance, while some can equip multiples of the same type of weapon on the same location for truly devastating volleys of fire. Highlighting a weapon in the equipment list will show you which locations on the mech can use that weapon. 

You can get drastically different results in a mission just by swapping out weapon types and tailoring them to each pilot's skills. The PPC, for instance, is basically the mech rendition of a sniper rifle and is only useful at long range if you have a high Gunnery skill. Machine guns, on the other hand, aren't all that helpful against 50-ton metal monstrosities, and they're only useful for light mechs to deal a little extra damage and hope for a critical if the enemy is low on armor.

LRMs, SRMs, ARs, and MGs need to have their corresponding ammo types placed somewhere on the mech to be used (it doesn't have to be the same location as the gun itself), while laser and energy weapons don't require extra ammo to function.

Pay special attention to a weapon's minimum and optimal ranges. A mech outfitted with just a PPM and LRMs will be useless in short-range combat (and will need several heat sinks if you intend to fire every round).

When refitting weapons, make sure to finish your loadout with extra heat sinks or jump jets to get to that mech's specific ideal tonnage. If you have any leftover space -- even a single 0.5 of a ton -- you will always get an annoying warning box when entering combat.

The game doesn't explain this at all, but if you don't need jump jets or heat sinks, you can increase the tonnage by paying to increase armor on each individual location with the small white + buttons, which can be much more useful.

 A solid mix of long- and short-range weapons will keep you alive in more situations 

Using Light Mechs Effectively

When outfitting mechs for your lance, those fast-moving, lightly armored mechs seem useless at first -- but they absolutely aren't. While they become less useful as you need heavier mechs in later missions that can take more damage, in the beginning stages, these are cheap ways to get easy wins.

Use light mechs for scouting to know which direction enemies are coming from, and reposition them quickly with their long-range sprinting and jump jet abilities to quickly take out vehicles with melee attacks.

Adding the Evasive Movement skill to a mechwarrior who uses light mechs can make them extremely difficult to effectively hit in ranged combat. You should also make use of the Reserve action to hold these highly mobile mech's actions for later in the round. Since they can cross larger distances, light mechs reserved for the end of a round can mop up heavily damaged mechs or vehicles after your heavy hitters have launched their payloads.

 The bewildering number of mech and weapon options will be daunting at first

Mastering Movement During BattleTech Missions

Now that you know the basics, it's time to get into the nuts and bolts of how to win a mission. First and foremost -- stay mobile! Evasion is critical to staying alive against long-range attacks. The more points of Evasion you can generate, the better. While moving across the map, use forest terrain and the Entrenched condition to your advantage against superior numbers.

Moving to get a point of Evasion and then using Sensor Lock to remove an enemy mech's Evasion is usually more useful than standing still and unloading a bunch of ammo on a mech who isn't going to take any damage anyway due to those Evasion points. RNG is a strange mistress, though, and there's always the possibility you get a lucky shot and blow off a critical component.

Right-click a mech to see how many points of Evasion it currently has (these are the >>> marks beneath the black box at the top of the screen) as well as getting an overview of the enemy's weapon loadout. Be on the lookout for enemy turrets to Sensor Lock your lance, which exposes them to indirect missile fire every round, even if they are nowhere near an enemy mech. 

BattleTech Formations

In general, the old D&D adage of "never split the party" holds true. There are only a few missions where it's worthwhile to break into small squads of two mechs and hit from different directions. You don't have to worry about large-scale area effect attacks that hit multiple mechs simultaneously, so staying clustered together for defense is usually a better option.

There are possible exceptions to that rule. For instance, one strategy is to send a mobile, melee-focused mech ahead to engage the enemy (using jump jets to get out of harm's way when enemies swarm around) while the three other mechs in your lance use long-range attacks from a distance.

This is a particularly risky strategy, however, as your nimble melee mech is probably going to take enough damage to make the mission a bust, unless you get incredibly lucky. More likely, you will RNG yourself out of a good, solid mech.

 Don't split the party!

Spending Money on Mech Repairs/Ship Upgrades

There's a subtle but important focus shift in BattleTech from other turn-based strategy war games. You are a mercenary company, not a fanatical military devoted to a particular purpose or plot of land. Your job is to make enough c-bills to keep operating, not to win wars for other people at all costs.

If you are going to end up spending more money on repairs, re-buying destroyed weaponry, and recruiting new pilots than the job is going to generate, then it's time to withdraw from the mission. So long as you killed at least one enemy, you won't even take a hit on your rating with the Mercenary Review Board. 

Each job is negotiated ahead of time, with sliders used to decide whether you are going to get more money, more guaranteed salvage, or less of both in exchange for a reputation bonus.

Salvage can be better than money, especially if it means you don't have to re-buy expensive weapons after a mech is damaged, but having money on hand at all times is always a good idea, especially when those random events pop up during space travel. In general, if you are flush with cash, you may want to go with the salvage or the rep boost, while in lean times, you should move the slider towards the high end of the monetary payment.

When you finally have a surplus of cash and get your hands on the Argo drop ship, don't rush to buy all the ship upgrades immediately as soon as you have enough c-bills available. Besides their initial investment, they cost money every month to maintain, which can add up quickly. If you do poorly on several missions in a row, you may end up running out of cash unexpectedly.

Expanding the Argo gives more event options, but not all of them are worth the investment cost

Those are all the BattleTech combat and negotiaton basics you need to know to play the game. Have any other BattleTech tips and tricks or awesome mech loadouts we should try? Let us know your best mech combat strategy in the comments below!

Overwatch Guide: How to Use Hanzo's Storm Arrows Tue, 24 Apr 2018 10:54:35 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest patch for Overwatch PTR replaced the infamous Hanzo ability -- Scattered Arrow. Now the bow master will be able to use a brand-new type of arrows -- Storm Arrows.

Instead of scattering the damage around, it will give Hanzo a chance to shoot six charged arrows in fast sequence. In combination with his new Leap ability, the Storm Arrow becomes highly efficient against tanks.

If you want to know how to play with Hanzo's new ability, then follow the guide below.

How to Use Storm Arrows in Overwatch

Since the speed of the arrows has been increased from 85 to 100, Hanzo can now deal a lot more damage than before.

Each arrow deals 80, which equals 480 in total. However, if you can manage headshots, then each arrow will deal 160, which totals 960 damage, which is way more than Scattered Arrow could ever do.

This means that you can kill Tracer with one, single headshot. Otherwise, you can deal six bodyshots to Orisa or Zarya and kill them that way. If Orisa activates armor, you can still kill her with a couple of headshots.

But what about Reinhardt? Sure, he can't be killed only with six bodyshots, so you'll need to manage at least one headshot after five consecutive bodyshots. If your aiming is way off and you're not doing well with headshots, then simply use melee attack on him after the full Stowm Arrow ability has been used.

The same strategy can be used against Winston. And if he activates a shield, then one fully charged Storm Arrow will be able to remove it. The same goes for D.Va and her mech.

The rest of the heroes will go down as quickly after 3-4 consecutive shots. This means that Hanzo's new Storm Arrow ability is very efficient if you have great aim.


Try to get used to the new Storm Arrow ability so you will be able to kill quickly and efficiently, and for other Overwatch guides at GameSkinny, check out the following links:

Frostpunk Beginner Tips and Tricks Guide Mon, 23 Apr 2018 11:22:15 -0400 Sergey_3847

Frostpunk is the latest offering from 11 bit studios, the developer of This War of Mine. It's a complex survival strategy game that requires you, as a newly elected mayor, to make life in a frostbitten settlement bearable for your population.

The game throws you into the thick of the problems right away, and you need to make the right kinds of decisions as quickly as possible. Time management is one of the most important aspects of the gameplay in Frostpunk, so this is where you should begin.

Manage Your Working Hours Wisely

You will have access to several menus in Frostpunk. The stats and the time controls are located in the upper menu, and the construction and laws on the bottom menu.

On the upper-left menu you will see a clock ticking and an indicat